TechRef en

20 30 40 50
GPS System 500
Technical Reference Manual

Version 4.0
English
System GPS500
Congratulations on your purchase of Leica System 500
To use equipment in the permitted manner, please refer to

the detailed safety instructions in the User Manual.
2 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Support
Technical Support is provided by Leica Geosystem’s worldwide network of

representatives. We are represented in almost every country in the world. A
representative directory is available at:
www.leica-geosystems.com
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 3

Symbols used in this manual
Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice

as they enable the product to be used in a technically
correct and efficient manner.
Symbols used in this manual 4 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

View of chapters
Chapter 1 - Introduction 11
Chapter 2 - Equipment Setup and Connection 20
Chapter 3 - Using System 500 without a Terminal 70
Chapter 4 - TR500 Terminal Overview 74
Chapter 5 - Configuring the Receiver 86
Chapter 6 - Jobs and Points 156
Chapter 7 - Measuring with System 500 158
Chapter 8 - Coding 232
Chapter 9 - The CONFIG key 241
Chapter 10 - Status 259
Chapter 11 - Applications 273
Chapter 12 - Utilities 307
Chapter 13 - Transfer 310
Appendices 321
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 5 View of chapters

Contents
1. Introduction ..............................................11 2.10 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover,
1.1 The GPS Antenna ............................................... 12 All on Pole, direct clip of TR500 on to Sensor ....... 48
1.2 The GPS Receiver ............................................... 13 2.11 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover,
1.3 The TR500 Terminal ............................................ 15 All on Pole, TR500 and Sensor separated ............ 51
1.4 Data Storage ....................................................... 16 2.12 Equipment Setup - Real Time Rover, GIS Rover . 54
1.5 Batteries/Power Supply ........................................ 18 2.13 Equipment Setup - Repeater Station and
1.5.1 Charging the Batteries ......................................... 19 Repeater Box ...................................................... 58
2.14 Using the Minipack ............................................ 61
2. Equipment Set Up and Connection ....... 20 2.15 Measuring Antenna Heights ............................... 63
2.1 GPS Receiver ports ............................................. 21 2.15.1 Mechanical Reference Planes ........................... 64
2.2 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Static/Rapid 2.15.2 Antenna Height components ............................. 65
Static/Reference on Pillar .................................... 22 2.15.3 Measuring Slope Heights ................................... 69
2.3 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Static/Rapid
Static/Reference on Tripod .................................. 25
3. Using System 500 without a Terminal ... 70
2.4 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic, 3.1 Setting up the Equipment ..................................... 71
Minipack and Pole ............................................... 28 3.2 Operation ............................................................ 71
2.5 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic, 3.3 Shut Down ........................................................... 71
All on Pole, Direct Clip of TR500 on to Sensor ...... 32 3.4 LED Indicators ..................................................... 72
3.4.1 Power LED .......................................................... 72
2.6 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic,
3.4.2 Satellite Status LED ............................................. 72
All on Pole, TR500 and Sensor separated ............ 35 3.4.3 Memory Status LED ............................................ 73
2.7 Equipment Setup - Real Time Reference, 3.5 Field Record Sheet .............................................. 73
single tripod ....................................................... 38
2.8 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Reference, 4. TR500 Terminal Overview ....................... 74
Two Tripods ...................................................... 41 4.1 Screen Layout ..................................................... 75
2.9 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover, 4.2 Status Icons ........................................................ 77
Pole and Minipack ............................................... 44 4.3 Keyboard ............................................................. 82
4.4 General Operating Principles ............................... 83
Contents 6 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Contents, continued
5. Configuring the Receiver ........................ 86 7.1.6 Measuring procedure ......................................... 163
5.1 Configuring the Receiver for Static and Rapid Static 7.1.7 Using the ADD key ............................................ 166
Operations .......................................................... 88 7.2 Post-processed Kinematic Survey (Rover) ......... 167
7.2.1 Overview of Procedure ...................................... 168
5.1.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Static and Rapid
7.2.2 Adding the Point Id ............................................ 168
Static .................................................................... 95
7.2.3 Adding the Antenna Height ................................ 169
5.2 Configuring the Receiver for Post-Processed
7.2.4 Adding a Code ................................................... 170
Kinematic Operations .......................................... 99 7.2.5 Adding a Starting Time ...................................... 171
5.2.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Post-Processed 7.2.6 Measuring Procedure ........................................ 172
Kinematic ........................................................... 112 7.2.7 Using the AUTO key .......................................... 174
5.3 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Reference 7.2.8 Using the ADD key ............................................ 174
Operations ......................................................... 116 7.3 Real-Time Reference Stations ........................... 176
5.3.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time 7.3.1 Measuring procedure ......................................... 177
Reference Stations ............................................. 124 7.3.2 Using the ADD key ............................................ 180
5.4 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Rover 7.4 Real-Time Rover, Surveying New Points ............ 181
Operations ........................................................ 127 7.4.1 Overview of Procedure ...................................... 182
5.4.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Rover 148 7.4.2 Adding the Point Id ............................................ 182
6. Jobs and Points..................................... 156 7.4.4 Adding a Code ................................................... 184
6.1 Management of Jobs ......................................... 156 7.4.5 Adding a Starting Time ...................................... 185
7.4.6 Measurement Procedure ................................... 186
7. Measuring with System 500 ................. 158 7.4.7 Using the AUTO key .......................................... 190
7.1 Static and Rapid Static Survey, Post-Processed 7.4.8 Using the INIT key ............................................. 193
Kinematic Reference ......................................... 159 7.4.9 Using the ADD key ............................................ 194
7.1.1 Overview of Procedure ...................................... 160 7.4.10 Using the NEAR key ........................................ 206
7.1.2 Adding the Point Id ............................................ 160 7.4.11 Radio Down Infill .............................................. 206
7.1.4 Adding a Code ................................................... 161
7.1.5 Adding a Starting Time ...................................... 163
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 7 Contents

Contents, continued
7.5 Real-Time Rover, Staking Out ............................ 208 9. The CONFIG Key ................................... 241
7.5.1 Entering Stakeout .............................................. 208 9.1 Survey - Satellite ................................................ 242
7.5.2 Stake-Out Types ................................................ 209 9.2 General - Units .................................................. 243
7.5.3 The Stake-Out Screen ....................................... 210
9.3 General - Language ........................................... 244
7.5.4 Orientation ......................................................... 211
7.5.5 Polar and Orthogonal ........................................ 215 9.4 General - Hot Keys ............................................ 244
7.5.6 Using the Reverse function ................................ 216 9.5 General - Time and Initial Position ...................... 245
7.5.7 Using the Redraw function ................................. 217 9.6 General - Start-Up ............................................. 245
7.5.8 Picking up a new point ....................................... 217 9.7 General - TR500 ................................................ 246
7.5.9 Using the INIT key ............................................. 217 9.8 General - Identification ....................................... 247
7.5.10 Using the NEAR key ........................................ 218 9.9 Interfaces ......................................................... 247
7.5.11 Graph .............................................................. 218 9.10 Interfaces - Real-Time ..................................... 247
7.5.12 Aux Pt .............................................................. 219 9.11 Interfaces - NMEA Output ................................ 248
7.5.13 Point Stake-Out - Procedure ............................ 220
9.12 Interfaces - ASCII Input .................................... 249
7.5.14 Slope Stake-Out - Procedure ........................... 222
7.5.15 Grid Stake-Out - Procedure ............................. 226 9.13 Interfaces - Hidden Point .................................. 253
9.14 Interfaces - GSI/User Out ................................. 253
8. Coding .................................................... 232 9.15 Interfaces - Remote ......................................... 254
8.1 Thematical Coding ............................................. 232 9.16 Interfaces - PPS Out ........................................ 255
8.1.1 Importing, Selecting and Defining a 9.17 Interfaces - Event Input .................................... 256
Thematical Codelist ............................................ 233
8.1.2 Defining New Codes and Attributes ................... 234 10. Status ................................................... 259
8.1.3 Defining and Activating/Deactivating Layers ...... 235 10.1 Real-Time Input Status .................................... 259
8.1.4 Adding a Thematical Code to a Point ................. 236 10.2 Stop and Go Indicator ...................................... 261
8.2 Free Coding ...................................................... 237 10.3 Position ........................................................... 263
8.2.1 Importing, Selecting and Defining a 10.4 Logging Status ................................................. 266
Free Codelist ...................................................... 237 10.5 Satellite Status ................................................. 267
8.2.2 Defining New Codes .......................................... 238
10.6 Point Log Status .............................................. 269
8.2.3 Adding a Free Code .......................................... 239
Contents 8 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Contents, continued
10.7 Code Log Status .............................................. 270 13.4 Antenna Info ..................................................... 311
10.8 Message Log Status ........................................ 270 13.5 Codelist ............................................................ 311
10.9 Memory/Battery Status ..................................... 270 13.6 ASCII/GSI to Job ............................................ 312
10.10 Sensor Status ................................................ 271 13.7 GSI / User ....................................................... 314
10.11 Software Version Status ................................. 271 13.8 Geoid Field File ................................................ 316
10.12 Interfaces Status ............................................ 272 13.9 CSCS Field File ............................................... 316
13.10 Firmware ....................................................... 316
11. Applications ......................................... 273 13.11 Firmware TR500 ............................................ 317
11.1 Determining a Coordinate System .................... 273 13.12 Language Version .......................................... 317
11.2 Adding Points to Existing Coordinate Systems .. 283 13.13 Application Text .............................................. 317
11.3 Point Management ........................................... 284 13.14 Almanac ........................................................ 318
11.4 Calculator ........................................................ 288 13.15 Account File ................................................... 318
11.5 Wake-up Sessions ........................................... 288 13.16 CFC Log Mask File ........................................ 318
11.6 COGO ............................................................. 290 13.17 Beacon Station List ....................................... 319
11.7 Area ................................................................ 303 13.18 Modem/GSM Station List ............................... 319
11.8 Line Division .................................................... 304 13.19 System ......................................................... 319
12. Utilities ................................................. 307 13.20 Any File Type ................................................. 320
12.1 Directory of Memory Device ............................. 307 Appendix A - Operating and Storage
12.2 Format Memory Module ................................... 308
Temperatures ............................................. 321
12.3 Enter Security Code ......................................... 309
12.4 Self Test .......................................................... 309 Appendix B - Observation Times ............. 322
13. Transfer ................................................ 310 Appendix C - Seismic Record Format ..... 323
13.1 Job .................................................................. 310
13.2 Config Set ....................................................... 310 Appendix D - Defined Line File Format ... 324
13.3 Coordinate System ........................................... 311
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 9 Contents

Contents, continued
Appendix E - NMEA Message Formats .... 325 RTB Module (CSI) ................................................... 352
GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data ............... 327 RTS Module (Racal) ................................................ 354
GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP ........................ 328 SAPOS ................................................................... 356
GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP ................. 328 Using a SAPOS decoder box ..................................... 356
GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ .......................... 329 Using a SMARTgate box ............................................ 357
Using the Telemax Service ......................................... 359
GLL - Geodetic Position - Latitude, Longitude ........... 329
Hidden Point ........................................................... 361
GNS - GNSS Fix Data ............................................. 330
GSA - GPS DOP and Active Satellites ..................... 330 Appendix I - MC500 ................................... 364
GSV - GPS Satellites in View ................................... 331
LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP ...................... 331 Appendix J - RS500 ................................... 369
LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality ..................... 332
Appendix K- GS50 / GS50+ and GIS Data
VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed ....... 332
ZDA - Time and Date ............................................... 333 Collection ................................................... 377
Hardware and Accessories ...................................... 378
Appendix F - Pin Assignments and Compact Flash and Sensor Transfer ........................ 382
Sockets ...................................................... 334 Operation and Configuration .................................... 383
The CONFIG Key .................................................... 384
Appendix G - Data Device Directory The STATUS Key .................................................... 388
Structure .................................................... 336 Data Collection with the GS50 and GS50+ ............... 389
Appendix H - External Devices................. 338
RS232 .................................................................... 339
Radio and Repeaters ............................................... 340
GSM ....................................................................... 344
Modem ................................................................... 350
10 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

1. Introduction
System 500 is used to receive signals
from GPS satellites which are then
processed to obtain a position on the
earth’s surface.
It can be used in many applications,

the main ones being Land Survey,
Stakeout and Hydrographic Survey.
The main components of System 500

are the GPS Antenna and GPS
Receiver. Ancilliary components are
the Terminal, Batteries, PC Cards and
cables.
SKI-Pro, a PC based software is also

used in conjunction with the hardware
listed above for post-processing GPS
data and for downloading coordinates
recorded in the field. Instructions for System 500 - main hardware components
using SKI-Pro can be found in the
accompanying printed guides and on-
line help.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 11 1. Introduction

1.1 The GPS Antenna
There are several System 500 GPS The Choke Ring Antennas are
Antennas available. These are: designed for use where the utmost
precision is required. Typical applica-
• AT501 Single Frequency Antenna. tions include Static Surveys of long
• AT502 Dual Frequency Antenna. baselines, Tectonic Plate monitoring,
• AT503 Dual Frequency Choke Reference Stations, etc.
Ring Antenna.
• AT504 JPL Design Dual Fre- Use the AT503 and AT504 with the
quency Choke Ring Antenna. SR520 or SR530 Receiver. Use the
• Single Frequency Choke Ring Single Frequency Choke Ring with
Antenna. the SR510 Receiver.
The GPS Antenna is selected for use

based upon the application. The vast Also available is a combined GPS/
AT502 Antenna
majority of applications will require RTB or GPS/ RTS antenna. Refer to
the AT501 or AT502 Antenna. Appendix K for further information.
The AT501 is a L1 single frequency

antenna. Use it with the SR510
Receiver. The AT502 is a dual fre-
quency antenna. Use it with the
SR520 or SR530 Receiver.
AT504 Antenna
1. Introduction 12 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

1.2 The GPS Receiver
The GPS Receiver is the instrument SR520 - Tracks the L1 C/A code and measurements and L2
that processes the GPS signals L2 P-code to reconstruct the carrier pseudoranges. A radio modem
received by the GPS Antenna. phase. When Anti-Spoofing (A-S) is attaches and the receiver can be
There are six different models of GPS activated, the receiver switches to a used for RTK operations. Coordinates
receiver in System 500. The model patented P-code aided tracking can be calculated with a precision of
number is printed on the PC card lid. technique that provides full L2 carrier up to about 1cm
measurements and L2 Data can also be stored for post-
See the detailed descriptions of each pseudoranges. Data can be stored for
of these receivers given down below. processing. Baselines can be calcu-
post-processing. Baselines can be lated with a precision of up to about
calculated with a precision of up to 3-10mm +1ppm.
SR510 - Tracks the L1 C/A code and about 3-10mm +1ppm.
uses it to reconstruct the carrier System 500 GPS Receivers can be
With a radio modem attached the operated with or without the TR500
phase. Data can be stored for post- receiver can be used for real-time
processing in SKI-Pro. Baselines can Terminal (see section 1.3). The
measurements accepting RTCM TR500 is used for field data acquisi-
be calculated with a precision of up to code corrections. Coordinates can be
about 5-10mm +2ppm. tion and for configuring the receiver.
calculated with a precision of up to
about 0.5m. Details of using the Receiver without
With a radio modem attached the
a Terminal are given in Chapter 3.
receiver can be used for real-time
measurements accepting RTCM code
SR530 - Tracks the L1 C/A code and
corrections. Coordinates can be
L2 P-code to reconstruct the carrier
calculated with a precision of up to
phase. When Anti-Spoofing (A-S) is
about 0.5m.
activated, the receiver switches to a
patented P-code aided tracking
technique that provides full L2 carrier

MC500 - A ruggedized version of the
SR530 designed specifically for
Machine Control. Can also be utilised
as a dedicated GPS Reference
Station. Please refer to Appendix I for
specific details.
RS500 - A dedicated GPS Reference

Sation receiver designed for perma-
nent installation. Please refer to
Appendix J for specific details.
GS50 - This receiver has been

specifically designed for GIS applica-
tions. Please refer to Appendix K for
more information that is specific to
the GS50 and the corresponding PC-
software GIS DataPRO.

1.3 The TR500 Terminal
The TR500 Terminal provides a full
user interface to all System 500 GPS
Receivers.
It can be used to set parameters in
the receiver and to steer the GPS
measurement operation.
The TR500 can be used to set and
store parameters in one GPS receiver
and then removed and used to set
parameters in another System 500
receiver. The receiver can then be
used in the field without the TR500
attached. Note that whilst this is
possible when measuring in any
mode, for a Reference or Rover, it is
recommended that the Receiver only
be used without a TR500 at Refer-
ence stations or with Static/Rapid
Static Rovers.
TR500 mounted on the Receiver TR500 connected using the cable
The TR500 is connected either
directly to the receiver or via a cable.
Data input is via a fully alphanumeric
QWERTY keyboard and an LCD
display of 32 x 12 characters which
may be illuminated.

1.4 Data Storage
Data is stored on either an Internal The Internal Memory is available in
Memory or PC Card. The PC Card is 8MB or 16MB capacities and resides
the preferred data storage medium. in the Receiver. When data has to be
The Internal Memory is an option. downloaded to SKI-Pro, connection is
The PC Card is inserted into the slot made between port 2 on the Receiver
on the front of the GPS Receiver. PC and a serial port on the PC.
Cards are available from Leica with
varying capacities. Note that whilst The memory device is checked
other PC Cards may be used, Leica before starting a survey. If it is more
recommend Leica PC cards only and than 80% full, an information mes-
cannot be held responsible for data sage appears. Inserting the PC Card
loss or any other error that may occur
whilst using a non-Leica card.
To insert the PC Card in the GPS Follow the care instructions shown on
Receiver, open the card slot door, the rear of the card. Keep the card
with the Leica Logo uppermost and dry, only use within the specified
facing you, slide the card into the slot temperature range, do not bend the
firmly until it clicks into position. Press card and protect it from direct shock.
the eject button at the side of the card Failure to follow these instructions
to remove it. could result in data loss and/or
permanent damage to the card.
The card can become very hot during

use. Avoid touching the metal parts of
the card after prolonged use.

PC Card versus Internal Memory Using an Internal Memory means
The PC Card is the preferred data however that the data has less
storage medium as it has the follow- chance of being misplaced or lost.
ing advantages over internal memory: This can happen when multiple PC
Cards are used for the same project.
• Faster download times. A PC
Card download using a PC If you are not sure about which type
Card Reader or PCMCIA port is of memory to use, try using a PC card
virtually instantaneous. Internal but don’t remove it from the Receiver.
memory has to download You can still download as if it were
through a serial connection and Internal Memory through any port.
can take time.
• Flexibility / no downtime of
GPS Receiver. A PC Card can
be removed from a receiver
when it is full and replaced with
a spare. The Receiver does not
have to be taken back to the office
for downloading.

1.5 Batteries/Power Supply
Connecting a GEB121 Battery Removing a GEB121 Battery
System 500 will normally be powered
by two GEB121 camcorder type
batteries. which plug into the under-
side of the GPS receiver.
Two batteries, fully charged, will
power the SR510 and TR500 for
about 7.5 hours continuously and the
SR520/530 for about 6 hours continu-
ously.
Operating times will be shorter when
working in cold weather and when a
radio modem is connected.
Plug in and remove the GEB121
batteries as shown opposite. With the Receiver upside down and Pull and hold the battery catch.
the Leica logo on the battery facing Withdraw the battery with the other
System 500 can also be powered by
you, locate one end into the battery hand.
the GEB71 7Ah battery or any 12V
DC power supply via either power bay. Press the opposite end of the
port, on the front face of the receiver battery down until it audibly clicks into
using an appropriate cable. place.
The battery contains toxic material and must be disposed of in an environmen-

tally friendly manner. Do not dispose of the battery in normal household or
office waste.

1.5.1 Charging the Batteries
GEB121 Batteries Chargers The batteries are delivered

GEB121 Batteries can be charged The GKL122 is an intelligent charger. from the factory totally
using the GKL122 or GKL111 battery It will charge the batteries by the discharged. They will require a full
chargers. The preferred model is the exact amount required. This maxi- charging cycle before the equipment
GKL122. mizes battery life. The GKL122 can can be used. For full instructions on
charge up to 2 GEB121 batteries at battery charging, refer to the manual
once. The GDI121 extension plate accompanying the charger you are
GEB71 Batteries enables a further two batteries to be using.
GEB71 Batteries can be charged charged from the same charger at the
using the GKL122 battery charger same time.
only. Additionally, the GKL122 can charge
up to two GEB71 batteries.
The GKL111 battery charger is a
simple charger. It will charge one
GEB121 battery at a time. It will
charge the batteries by the exact
amount required. This maximizes
battery life.

2. Equipment Set Up and Connection
The type of equipment set up that is
used will vary with the type of site
occupation and the measuring mode.
This also applies to the way in which
the various components are con-
nected together. There are optimal
solutions for setting up the equipment
on a tripod, in a backpack and on the
pole.
Set up on Tripod
Set up on Unipole
Set up on pole with Minipack
2. Set-up and Connection 20 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

2.1 GPS Receiver ports
All other components of System 500
12 11
connect to the GPS Receiver.
PORT 3
The TR500 Terminal fits either
directly on the Receiver or can be 1
connected to the Terminal port using
a cable.
2 ON
TERMINAL LEICA SR530
OFF
A Radio Modem in a housing can also EVENT1
be fitted directly to the Receiver.

Alternatively, if the housing is not
3 EVENT2
being used, the radio modem can be PPS
connected to Port 1 or Port 3 using a PWR ANT PORT 2/PWR PORT 1
cable.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The Antenna is connected to the
1. Port 3. 8 pin Lemo.Power/data 8. Port 2. 5 pin Lemo. Power/data
Receiver via the ANT Port.
in/out in/out.
External power can be connected via 2. Event Input 1 (Optional) 9. Pressure equalisation vent.
a cable through Port 2. 3. 5 pin Lemo. Power 10. Port 1. 8 pin Lemo. Power/data
4. Power ON/OFF in/out.
5. PPS Output (Optional) 11. PC Card door.
6. GPS Antenna in 12. Terminal in/out or Remote
7. Event Input 2 (Optional) Interface in/out.
SR530 Receiver, front panel
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 21 2. Set-up and Connection

2.2 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Static/Rapid Static/Reference on Pillar
Use
Static/Rapid Static operations or as Reference for Kin-
ematic.
The Receiver and TR500 (if used) can be assembled to
make one unit. One connection is made to the GPS
Antenna which is mounted on the Pillar. The Receiver and
TR500 can be kept in the case. Note that the Receiver
can be programmed with the TR500 prior to use which
can then be omitted from the set up.
Assumptions
1. GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting.
If using stub and GAD 31 adapter, procedures may
vary slightly.
2. GPS Antennas are AT501 or AT502. Procedures/
setup may vary if AT503, 504 or single frequency
choke ring are used.

Equipment Checklist
1. GPS Antenna AT501, 502, 503,
504 or 505
2. GRT146 Carrier
3. GDF122 or GDF112 Tribrach
4. Pillar Plate (if required)
5. GEV120 2.8m Antenna Cable
6. 2, GEB121 Batteries
7. SR510/520/530 GPS Receiver
8. TR500 Terminal (if required)
9. MCF XMB-3 PC Flash Card.
10. GVP602 System 500 Transport
Case.

Procedure The Next Steps
1. If a pillar plate is being used, If the Receiver has been pre-pro- When Using the GAD31
locate it on the pillar. grammed and the TR500 is not being adapter and GRT144 carrier,
2. Screw the tribrach to the pillar used, further guidance is available in ensure that the Antenna and GAD31
plate or the pillar. Level the Chapter 3. assembly slide down the full length of
tribrach. If the Receiver has been pre-pro- the GRT144 stub. An incorrectly
3. Place and lock the GRT146 grammed and the TR500 is being mounted Antenna will have a direct
Carrier in the Tribrach. used, further guidance is available in effect on your results.
4. Screw the Antenna onto the Chapter 7. In wet conditions the Re-
Carrier. ceiver can be placed in the
5. Check that the Tribrach is still If the Receiver requires programming
with the TR500, further guidance is transport case during use for extra
level. protection. Try to shut the case as
6. Connect the GPS Receiver to available in Chapter 5.
completely as possible.
the Antenna using the GEV120
Antenna cable. If the Receiver is left in the
7. Plug the GEB121 batteries into case during use in tempera-
the GPS Receiver. tures exceeding 25°C, the lid should
8. Attach the TR500 Terminal to be left open. Refer to Appendix A for
the Receiver if required. operating and storage temperatures.
9. Insert the PCMCIA Flash Card Use an external battery such
into the Receiver. as GEB71 to extend the
10. Switch on the system using the operating time past 6 hours.
ON/OFF button.
11. The Receiver can be placed in
the Transport Case for additional
protection.

2.3 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Static/Rapid Static/Reference on Tripod
Use
Static/Rapid Static operations or as Reference for Kine-
matic.
make one unit. This clips to the tripod leg or is placed in
the transport container. One connection is made to the
Antenna. Note that the Receiver can be programmed with
the TR500 prior to use which can then be omitted from the
set up.
Assumptions
vary slightly.
2. GPS Antennas are AT501 or AT502. Procedures/
setup may vary if AT503, 504 or single frequency
choke ring are used.

Equipment Checklist
1. GPS Antenna AT501 or AT502
2. GRT146 Carrier
4. GST20, GST05 or GST05L
Tripod
5. GZS4 Height Hook
10.MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA Flash
Card.
11.GVP602 System 500 Transport
Case.

Procedure The Next Steps
1. Set up the tripod. If the Receiver has been pre-pro- When Using the GAD31
2. Mount and level the tribrach on grammed and the TR500 is not being adapter and GRT144 carrier,
the tripod. used, further guidance is available in ensure that the Antenna and GAD31
3. Place and lock the GRT146 Chapter 3. assembly slide down the full length of
Carrier in the Tribrach. If the Receiver has been pre-pro- the GRT144 stub. An incorrectly
4. Screw the Antenna onto the grammed and the TR500 is being mounted Antenna will have a direct
Carrier. used, further guidance is available in effect on your results.
5. Check that the Tribrach is still Chapter 7. In wet conditions the Re-
level. ceiver can be placed in the
5. Insert the Height Hook into the If the Receiver requires programming
with the TR500, further guidance is transport case during use for extra
Carrier. protection. Try to shut the case as
6. Connect the GPS Receiver to available in Chapter 5.
completely as possible.
the Antenna using the GEV120
Antenna cable. If the Receiver is left in the
7. Plug the GEB121 batteries into case during use in tempera-
the GPS Receiver. tures exceeding 25°C, the lid should
8. Attach the TR500 Terminal to be left open. Refer to Appendix A for
the Receiver if required. operating and storage temperatures.
9. Insert the PCMCIA Flash Card Use an external battery such
into the Receiver. as GEB71 to extend the
10. Using the hook on the rear of operating time past 6 hours.
the unit, hang it on the Tripod leg
or place it in the box.
11. Switch on the system using the
ON/OFF button on the Receiver.

2.4 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic, Minipack and Pole
Use
Post Processed Kinematic Rover.
The Receiver is placed in the Minipack. Connections are
made to the Antenna and TR500. Recommended for
extended periods of use in the field.
Assumptions
vary slightly.
2. Aluminium poles are used. You may replace them
with their Carbon Fiber equivalents without any
change to these instructions.

Equipment Checklist
1. GPS Antenna AT501 or 502
2. GLS21 Upper half aluminium
pole with screw
3. GHT25 Grip for pole
4. GHT27 Holder for TR500
5. GLS20 Lower half aluminium
pole
6. GEV141 1.2m Antenna cable
8. TR500 Terminal
10. SR510, 520 or 530 GPS Re-
ceiver
11. GVP603 Minipack
12. MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA flash card
13. GEV97 1.8m, 5pin Lemo cable

How to set up the equipment
1. Screw the two halves of the pole amount of cable out of the
together. Minipack and tighten the cable
2. Slide the grip onto the pole. brake. Refer to the diagram.
Attach the TR500 holder and 8. Connect the TR500 to the port
tighten the screw. labelled “Terminal” on the
3. Screw the GPS Antenna to the Receiver using the 1.8m cable.
top of the pole. Pass it through the opening in
4. Slide the TR500 into the holder the bottom of the Minipack flap,
until it clicks into place. down through a cable brake and
5. Insert the PC Card into the then plug into the Receiver.
Receiver and plug in the Refer to the diagram.
GEB121 batteries. 10. Switch on the system using the
6. Place the Receiver front panel ON/OFF button on the Receiver.
up in the Minipack with the
batteries facing outwards.
Fasten the strap around the
Receiver
7. Connect the GPS Antenna to the
Receiver using the two Antenna
cables. Connect the longest To GPS Antenna
cable to the Receiver, pass the
To Terminal
cable through the cable brake
and down through the opening in Connecting the TR500 Terminal and GPS
the bottom corner of the Antenna in the Minipack
Minipack flap. Draw the required

The Next Steps
If the Receiver has been pre-pro- Ensure a dry plastic weather When using the upper pole
grammed and the TR500 is being protection cap is fitted to the halves with stub, ensure that
used, further guidance is available in socket on the TR500 that is not the Antenna and GAD31 screw/stub
Chapter 7. connected to the sensor. adapter slide down the full length of
If the Receiver requires programming the stub before tightening the locking
with the TR500, further guidance is ring. An incorrectly mounted Antenna
If moisture or water should will have a direct effect on your
available in Chapter 5.
appear in the socket that is results.
not used on the TR500, allow the
socket and plastic weather protection
cap to dry naturally. Advice on using the Minipack
is given in Section 2.14.

2.5 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic, All on Pole, Direct Clip of TR500 on to Sensor
Use
Post-processed Kinematic Rover.
The TR500 is mounted on the Receiver which is screwed
onto the pole grip. One connection is made from the
Receiver to the Antenna. Recommended for short periods
of use, especially where there are many obstacles (fences
etc.).
Assumptions
vary slightly.

Equipment Checklist
pole with screw
4. GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver
pole
8. TR500 Terminal
9. SR510, 520 or 530 GPS Re-
ceiver

How to set up the equipment The Next Steps When using the upper pole
1. Screw the two halves of the pole If the Receiver has been pre-pro- halves with stub, ensure that
together. grammed and the TR500 is being the Antenna and GAD31 screw/stub
2. Slide the grip onto the pole. used, further guidance is available in adapter slide down the full length of
Attach the GPS Receiver holder Chapter 7. the stub before tightening the locking
and tighten the screw. ring. An incorrectly mounted Antenna
If the Receiver requires programming will have a direct effect on your
3. Screw the GPS Antenna onto with the TR500, further guidance is
the top of the pole. results.
4. Attach the TR500 to the GPS
Receiver. Screw the GPS
Receiver to the GPS Receiver
holder.
5. Insert the PC Card into the
Receiver and plug in the
GEB121 batteries.
6. Connect the GPS Antenna to
the Receiver using the 1.2m
antenna cable.
7. Switch on the system using the
ON/OFF button on the TR500.

2.6 Equipment Setup - Post Processed Kinematic, All on Pole, TR500 and Sensor separated
Use
Post-processed Kinematic Rover.
The TR500 is fixed to the pole grip with a holder. With
another metallic holder and a holder piece, the receiver is
fixed to the pole. One connection is made from the Re-
ceiver to the Antenna. Another connection is made from
the Receiver to the TR500. Recommended for short
periods of use, especially where there are many obstacles
(fences etc.).
Assumptions
vary slightly.

Equipment Checklist
1. GPS Antenna AT501 or 502 1
pole with screw 2
pole 8
6. GHT37 Holder piece for GPS
Receiver with antenna cable and
3
5pin Lemo cable
9
7. GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver 4
8. TR500 Terminal L
9. 2, GEB121 Batteries 5
10. SR510, 520 or 530 GPS Re-
ceiver 10
11
7
6

1. Screw the two halves of the pole 10. Switch on the system using the When using the upper pole
together. ON/OFF button on the TR500. halves with stub, ensure that
2. Slide the grip onto the pole. the Antenna and GAD31 screw/stub
Attach the TR500 holder to the adapter slide down the full length of
The Next Steps
grip and tighten the screw. the stub before tightening the locking
3. Slide the holder piece for the If the Receiver has been pre-pro- ring. An incorrectly mounted Antenna
GPS Receiver onto the pole. grammed and the TR500 is being will have a direct effect on your
Attach the GPS Receiver holder used, further guidance is available in results.
and tighten the screw. Chapter 7.
4. Screw the GPS Antenna onto If the Receiver requires programming
the top of the pole. with the TR500, further guidance is
5. Slide the TR500 into the holder available in Chapter 5.
until it clicks into place.
6. Screw the GPS Receiver to the
GPS Receiver holder.
7. Insert the PC Card into the
Receiver and plug in the
GEB121 batteries.
8. Connect the GPS Antenna to the
Receiver using the antenna
cable supplied with the GPS
receiver holder piece.
9. Connect the TR500 to the port
labelled “Terminal” on the
Receiver using the 5 pin Lemo
cable.
2.7 Equipment Setup - Real Time Reference, single tripod
Use
Real Time Reference Station. May also collect raw obser-
vation data for post-processing.
make one unit. This clips to the tripod leg. Connections
are made to the GPS and Radio Antenna. Note that the
Receiver can be programmed with the TR500 prior to use
which can then be omitted from the set up.
The Radio Antenna is mounted on the Antenna Arm which
clips to the GPS Antenna.
The SR510 and SR520 can only be used as a DGPS
reference station if they are fitted with the DGPS option.
They cannot be used as a Real-Time Reference station.
The SR530 can be used as either a DGPS or Real-Time
reference station. Real-Time and DGPS are fitted as
standard on the SR530.
Assumptions
vary slightly.
2. Standard Radio modem is used. (Mounted in Radio
Housing).

Equipment Checklist
1. GPS Antenna AT501, 502
2. GRT146 Carrier
7. GST20/GST05/05L Tripod
8. GAT1/GAT2 Radio Antenna
9. GAD33 Radio Antenna Arm
11. GZS4 Height Hook
12. Radio Modem in GFU 5/6
Housing
13. MCF XMB-3 PC card
;;
@@

14. 2, GEB121 Batteries @@

;;
15. GVP602 Transport Case

How to set up the equipment The Next Steps
Follow steps 1-10 as described in If the Receiver has been pre-pro- When Using the GAD31
section 2.3. grammed and the TR500 is not being adapter and GRT144 carrier,
11. Clip the Antenna Arm to the used, further guidance is available in ensure that the Antenna and GAD31
GPS Antenna. Screw the Radio Chapter 3. assembly slide down the full length of
Antenna onto the Arm. If the Receiver has been pre-pro- the GRT144 stub. An incorrectly
12. Attach the Radio Modem in its grammed and the TR500 is being mounted Antenna will have a direct
housing to the GPS Receiver. used, further guidance is available in effect on your results.
13. Connect the Radio Antenna to Chapter 7. In wet conditions the Re-
the Radio Modem using the If the Receiver requires programming ceiver can be placed in the
1.2m Antenna Cable. with the TR500, further guidance is transport case during use for extra
14. Switch the System On using the available in Chapter 5. protection. Try to shut the case as
On/Off button on the Receiver. completely as possible.
If the Receiver is left in the
case during use in tempera-
tures exceeding 25°C, the lid should
be left open. Refer to Appendix A for
operating and storage temperatures.
Use an external battery such
as GEB71 to extend the
operating time past 6 hours.

2.8 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Reference, Two Tripods
Use
make one unit. This clips to the tripod leg. Connections
are made to the GPS and Radio Antenna. Note that the
Receiver can be programmed with the TR500 prior to use
which can then be omitted from the set up.
The Radio Antenna is mounted on the second tripod. This
increases the height of the Radio Antenna and therefore
maximizes radio coverage.
The SR510 and SR520 can only be used as a DGPS
reference station if they are fitted with the DGPS option.
They cannot be used as a Real-Time Reference station.
The SR530 can be used as either a DGPS or Real-Time
reference station. Real-Time and DGPS are fitted as
standard on the SR530.
Assumptions
vary slightly.
2. Standard Radio modem is used. (Mounted in Radio
Housing).

Equipment Checklist
1. GPS Antenna AT501/502
2. GRT146 Carrier
3. GDF122 or GDF112 Tribrach 15
4. SR510/520/530 GPS Receiver 16
5. TR500 Terminal (if required) 1 14
2 17
7. GST20\GST05\05L Tripod
8. GZS4 Height Hook
3 13
9. Radio Modem in GFU5/6 8
Housing 4
10. MCF XMB-3 PC Card
5 12 18
11. GEB121 Batteries 9
12. GST20\GST05\05L Tripod
13. GHT36 Base for Telescopic Rod 6 10
14. GEV120 2.8m Antenna Cable 7 11
15. GAT1\GAT2 Radio Antenna
16. GAD34 Short Antenna Arm
17. GAD32 Telescopic Rod
18. GVP602 Transport Case

How to set up the equipment The Next Steps When Using the GAD31
Follow steps 1-10 as described in If the Receiver has been pre-pro- adapter and GRT144 carrier,
section 2.3. grammed and the TR500 is not being ensure that the Antenna and GAD31
11. Attach the Radio Modem in its used, further guidance is available in assembly slide down the full length of
housing to the GPS Receiver. Chapter 3. the GRT144 stub. An incorrectly
12. Set up the second Tripod If the Receiver has been pre-pro- mounted Antenna will have a direct
nearby. Screw the Base onto the grammed and the TR500 is being effect on your results.
Tripod. Push the Telescopic Rod used, further guidance is available in In wet conditions the Re-
into the Base. Chapter 7. ceiver can be placed in the
13. Screw the Short Antenna Arm If the Receiver requires programming transport case during use for extra
onto the telescopic Rod. Screw with the TR500, further guidance is protection. Try to shut the case as
the Radio Antenna onto the Arm. available in Chapter 5. completely as possible.
14. Connect the Radio modem to If the Receiver is left in the
the Radio Antenna using the case during use in tempera-
2.8m Antenna cable. tures exceeding 25°C, the lid should
15. Switch the System On using the be left open. Refer to Appendix A for
On/Off button on the Receiver or operating and storage.
Terminal.

2.9 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover, Pole and Minipack
Use
The Radio Modem attaches to the Receiver and is placed
in the Minipack. Connections are made to the GPS
Antenna, Radio Antenna and TR500. Recommended for
extended periods of use in the field.
The cables coming from the Minipack can be discon-
nected in the event that an obstacle (E.g. a fence) has to
be crossed.
Assumptions
vary slightly.

Equipment Checklist
pole with screw or stub
pole
8. TR500 Terminal
10. SR510, 520 or 530 GPS Re-
ceiver
11. Radio Modem in GFU5/6 Hous-
ing

@
;
16. GAD34 Small Antenna Arm
18. GVP603 Minipack

Follow steps 1-5 as described in the Receiver and then up through To Radio Antenna
section 2.4. the slit in the top of the Minipack.
6. Attach the Radio Modem Hous- 11. Connect the GPS Antenna to the
ing containing the Radio Modem Receiver using the two Antenna
to the GPS Receiver. Cables. The longest Cable
7. Place the GPS Receiver front should be connected to the
panel up in the Minipack with the Receiver. Pass this cable
batteries facing outwards. through a cable brake and down
Fasten the strap around the through the slit under one of the
Receiver (refer to diagram) reflective strips at the bottom of
8. Push the Telescopic Rod the Minipack. Draw the required
through the slit in the top of the amount of cable out of the
Minipack. Ensure it is located in Minipack and tighten the cable
the sleeve inside the Minipack brake. Refer to the diagram.
and push it all the way to the 12. Connect the TR500 to the port
bottom. Adjust the height of the labelled “Terminal”on the Re-
Telescopic Rod to suit. ceiver using the 1.8m
9. Screw the Short Antenna Arm cable.Pass it through the open-
onto the Telescopic Rod. Screw ing under one of the reflective
the Radio Antenna onto the strips at the bottom of the
Short Antenna Arm. Minipack, up through a cable To GPS Antenna
10. Connect the Radio Modem to brake and then plug into the
the Radio Antenna using a 1.2m Receiver. Refer to the diagram. To Terminal
Antenna Cable. The cable 13. Switch the System ON using the
should pass down underneath ON/OFF key on the Terminal.

The Next Steps
If the Receiver has been pre-pro- Ensure a dry plastic weather When using the upper pole
grammed and the TR500 is being protection cap is fitted to the halves with stub, ensure that
used, further guidance is available in socket on the TR500 that is not the Antenna and GAD31 screw/stub
Chapter 7. connected to the sensor. adapter slide down the full length of
If the Receiver requires programming the stub before tightening the locking
with the TR500, further guidance is ring. An incorrectly mounted Antenna
If moisture or water should will have a direct effect on your
appear in the socket that is results.
cap to dry naturally. Advice on using the Minipack
is given in Section 2.14.

2.10 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover, All on Pole, direct clip of TR500 on to Sensor
Use
The TR500 is mounted on the Receiver which is clipped
to the grip. Connections are made from the Receiver to
the GPS and Radio Antennas. Recommended for short
(fences etc.).
Assumptions
vary slightly.

Equipment Checklist
pole with screw or stub
4. GHT27 Holder for GPS Receiver
pole
7. GAD33 Antenna Arm
10. TR500 Terminal
12. Radio Modem in GFU5/6 Hous-
ing
13. MCF XMB-3 PC Card ;;
@@

@@

;;

Follow steps 1-6 described in section If the Receiver has been pre-pro- When using the upper pole
2.5. grammed and the TR500 is being halves with stub, ensure that
7. Clip the Antenna Arm to the used, further guidance is available in the Antenna and GAD31 screw/stub
GPS Antenna. Screw the Radio Chapter 7. adapter slide down the full length of
Antenna onto the Arm. If the Receiver requires programming the stub before tightening the locking
8. Attach the Radio Modem in its with the TR500, further guidance is ring. An incorrectly mounted Antenna
housing to the GPS Receiver. available in Chapter 5. will have a direct effect on your
9. Connect the Radio Antenna to results.
the Radio Modem using a 1.2m
Antenna Cable. The Radio Antenna may also
10. Switch the System ON using the be connected directly to the
ON/OFF key on the Terminal. Radio Housing. Note however that
range and quality of signal received
may be affected.

2.11 Equipment Setup - Real-Time Rover, All on Pole, TR500 and Sensor separated
Use
The TR500 is fixed to the pole grip with a holder. With
another metallic holder and a holder piece, the receiver is
fixed to the pole. The Radio Modem plus radio antenna
attaches to the Receiver. One connection is made from
the Receiver to the Antenna. Another connection is made
from the Receiver to the TR500. Recommended for short
(fences etc.).
Assumptions
vary slightly.

Equipment Checklist
1. GPS Antenna AT501 or 502 1
pole with screw 2
pole 8
6. GHT37 Holder piece for GPS
Receiver with antenna cable and
3 9
5pin Lemo cable
7. GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver 4 11
8. TR500 Terminal L
10. SR510, 520 or 530 GPS Re-
ceiver 10
11. GAT1/GAT2 Radio Antenna 12
12. Radio Modem in GFU5/6 Hous- 13
ing
13. MCF XMB-3 PCMCIA flash card 7
6

Follow steps 1-9 described in section If the Receiver has been pre-pro- When using the upper pole
2.6. grammed and the TR500 is being halves with stub, ensure that
10. Attach the Radio Modem in its used, further guidance is available in the Antenna and GAD31 screw/stub
housing to the GPS Receiver. Chapter 7. adapter slide down the full length of
11. Screw the Radio Antenna onto If the Receiver requires programming the stub before tightening the locking
the housing. with the TR500, further guidance is ring. An incorrectly mounted Antenna
12. Switch on the system using the available in Chapter 5. will have a direct effect on your
ON/OFF button on the TR500. results.

2.12 Equipment Setup - Real Time Rover, GIS Rover
Use
The TR500 is held in the hand with the hand pouch.
Connections are made from the Receiver to the GPS (or if
being used the combined GPS/DGPS antenna). Recom-
mended for long periods of use, for mainly GIS type data
collection surveys.
The setup described in the following pages assumes an

RTB or RTS module is being used (see also Appendix K
for further information on GIS applications).
You may also use the Real-Time GIS Rover setup with a
standard radio device but note the following differences:
1. With a standard radio device being used you will need a
separate radio antenna: attach the GAT1/GAT2 Radio
Antenna to the pole using the GAD33 Antenna Arm (see
the RT-Rover, All on Pole chapter for further illustration).
2. The RTB/ RTS module cable will not be needed then:
Connect the Radio antenna to the Radio modem housing
using the GEV141 1.2m Antenna Cable (see the RT-
Rover, Pole and Minipack chapter for further illustration).

Equipment Checklist 1
1. Combined RTB (or RTS)/GPS
antenna
2. GAD32 Telescopic Rod 2
4. RTB (or RTS) differential 8
L
receiver module 3
5. 0.3m GPS receiver to RTB (or
RTS) module cable 9
6. MCF XMB-3 PC Card 11
8. TR500 Terminal
10. GS50 GPS Receiver
7
11. Handstrap with beltclip for
TR500 Terminal 10 4
12. GVP603 Minipack
5
6
L

How to set up the equipment 5. Connect the RTB/RTS module to
1. Insert the PC Card into the the Receiver GPS antenna port
Receiver and plug in the using the 30 cm antenna cable.
GEB121 batteries. 6. Switch on the system using the To GPS/RTB (or RTS) antenna
2. Place the Receiver front panel ON/OFF button on the Receiver.
up in the Minipack with the
batteries facing outwards.
Fasten the strap around the
Receiver
3. Connect the RTB/GPS Antenna
to the Receiver using the An-
tenna cables. Connect the cable
to the RTB/RTS module and
route the cable around the
bottom of the Receiver and up to
to the GPS antenna. Refer to the
diagram.
4. Connect the TR500 to the port
labelled “Terminal” on the
Receiver using the 1.8m cable.
Pass it through the opening in
the bottom of the Minipack flap, From RTS/RTB module
down through a cable brake and To Terminal to GPS antenna port
then plug into the Receiver.
Refer to the diagram.

The Next Steps
If the Receiver has been pre-pro- Ensure a dry plastic Advice on using the
grammed and the TR500 is being weather protection cap is Minipack is given in Section
used, further guidance is available in fitted to the socket on the TR500 that 2.14.
Chapter 7. is not connected to the sensor.
If the Receiver requires programming
with the TR500, further guidance is If moisture or water should
available in Chapter 5. appear in the socket that is
cap to dry naturally.

2.13 Equipment Setup - Repeater Station and Repeater Box
Use
The repeater box attaches to a tripod and the radio modem
to the repeater box. An external battery also attaches to the
tripod. The Radio Antenna is mounted on the tripod. One
connection is made from the battery to the repeater box.
Another connection is made from the radio to the radio
antenna.
For more information on repeaters and the repeater box see
Appendix H.
Assumptions
1. A RTK reference is set up, pre-programmed according
to chapter 5.3 and running according to chapter 7.3.
2. A RTK rover is prepared and pre-programmed
according to chapter 5.4.
3. The same type of radios are used on reference,
repeater and rover station.
4. The radio modem at the repeater station is
programmed to repeater mode.
5. All radio modems at reference, repeater and rover
operate on the same frequency.
6. The reference and rover receivers run standard
firmware 3.00 or higher.

Equipment Checklist
1. GAT1\GAT2 Radio Antenna
2. GAD34 Short Antenna Arm
4. GHT36 Base for Telescopic Rod
5. GEV120 2.8m Antenna Cable 1
6. Radio Modem in GFU5/6
Housing 2
5 3
7. GHT38 Repeater Box
8. 1.8 m Connection cable for 4
external battery 6
9. GEB71 Battery 7
10. GST20\GST05\05L Tripod 9
8
10

1. Set up the tripod. As soon as the Repeater Box is
2. Screw the Base for the connected to the battery, it is ready to
Telescopic Rod onto the Tripod. receive and broadcast data.
Push the Telescopic Rod into Start surveying or a staking-out with
the Base. the rover. Further guidance is
3. Screw the Short Antenna Arm available in Chapter 7.4 and 7.5.
onto the Telescopic Rod. Screw
the Radio Antenna onto the Arm.
4. Connect the Radio Modem to
the Repeater Box. Attach the
Repeater Box to the tripod.
5. Connect the Radio Modem to the
Radio Antenna using the 2.8m
Antenna Cable.
6. Connect the Repeater Box to the
GEB71 battery.

2.14 Using the Minipack
The Minipack has several features 1. Antenna Pole Strap 2. Hip Belt
which may not be readily apparent at Ensures the Antenna Pole does not The Hip Belt transfers most of the
first. These features help to make sway around and remains as upright weight from the shoulders to the hips
using System 500 more comfortable. as possible. when properly adjusted.
It also contains velcro attachments

through which cables can be passed.
Pass the strap around the pole and

fasten using the clip as shown in the
photograph.
Use the attachments as shown in the
photograph.

3. Internal Net Pouch 4. Using the Minipack in high
The Backpack has an internal net temperatures
pouch designed for carrying an In high temperatures it is desirable to
AT501 or AT502 Antenna when not in increase air flow around the Receiver.
use. It can also be used for storing Therefore the backpack can be kept
coiled cables or carrying a nonstand- half or even fully open when in use.
ard radio modem.
Open the Minipack halfway. Tuck the
flap inside. Secure it with the velcro
pad.
Open the Minipack flap fully and fold

the flap under the Receiver during
use in extremely hot temperatures.

2.15 Measuring Antenna Heights
The height of the GPS Antenna above the point consists Phase Center Eccentricities of Leica Antennas are
of several components - the Height Reading, the Vertical handled automatically by System 500. They will have to be
Offset and the Phase Center Eccentricities. When a entered manually when using non-Leica Antennas. Advice
standard System 500 Antenna mounted on standard on how to create a new Antenna Type for non-Leica
System 500 accessories is selected, the only measure- Antennas is given in the Online Help of SKI-Pro (Antenna
ment you will have to input is the Vertical Height (shown Management).
as VR in the following section). When a pole is used, even
this value is automatically suggested by the Receiver as Finally, the Antenna Height is sometimes calculated by
2.00m (the height of the System 500 pole). taking a slope distance from the point on the ground to the
outside edge of the Antenna. In this case, the Vertical
This means that for most operations, you will only need to Height must be calculated using the Slope Height and a
input the height measurement from the height hook or use Horizontal Offset.
the default height measurement of 2.00m for the pole.
Special care must be taken when using System 300 GPS
However, there may be cases when you need to calculate Antennas with a System 500 Receiver or when using the
the height components, such as when using non-Leica AT501/502 GPS Antenna on the System 300 pole.
accessories or Antennas or when not using a tripod or
pole.
It is also important to realize where the Antenna Heights

are measured to. This Datum is referred to as the Me-
chanical Reference Plane. This varies for different Anten-
nas. It is also the datum from which the Phase Center
Eccentricities are calculated.

2.15.1 Mechanical Reference Planes
The Mechanical Reference Plane or datum to which the AT504

Antenna Height is measured and from which the Phase
Center Eccentricities are calculated is shown for each 0.1897m
Leica System 500 Antenna.
AT501 and AT502
0.0345m
MRP
MRP
The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of the The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of the
threaded metal insert. Preamplifier Housing. The AT504 is built to a JPL design
specified by the IGS for Reference Stations. The Me-
AT503 chanical Reference Plane is always referred to as the
Bottom of Preamplifier or BPA by the IGS.
MRP 0.1501m
The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of the

Antenna itself.
2.15.2 Antenna Height components
1. Pillar Setup
VO Vertical Offset
VR Vertical Height Reading
VE1 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L1.
VE2 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L2
MRP MRP Mechanical Reference Plane
VE1 VE2
VO=0
Although an AT501/502 Antenna is shown, the same principles apply to the
AT504 and AT303.
VR The Vertical Height (VR) value is measured from the pillar benchmark to the
Mechanical Reference Plane of the Antenna. As there is no accessory avail-
able to measure the Vertical Height in this case, it is usually obtained through
levelling. Refer to the details on the next page for help in measuring the
Vertical Height.
The Vertical Offset is not required in this case and therefore is input as zero.
The Vertical Phase Center Eccentricities are stored in the Receiver for all
Leica System 500 Antennas and any non-Leica Antenna that you define. As
long as the correct antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value into
the Receiver. These values do need to be calculated when a new type of
Antenna that does not exist in the Antenna Setup Records is used.

Pillar Setup II - Carrier and Adapter dimensions
All dimensions are shown in millime-
ters and may be required when
determining the Vertical Height
Reading on a pillar or other nonstand-
ard setup. They allow you to deter-
9.3
mine the height to a surface on the

carrier (which is probably easier than
determining it to the Mechanical
Reference Plane), and then add the
remaining value to the Mechanical
109
Reference Plane.
99.7
145.5
145.5
36.5
36.5
GRT44 Carrier with GAD31 Stub to GRT46 Carrier

Screw Adapter

2. Tripod Setup
VO Vertical Offset
MRP
MRP Mechanical Reference Plane
VE1 VE2
Although an AT501/502 Antenna is shown, the same principles apply to the
AT504 and AT303.
VO
The Vertical Height Reading (VR) value is measured using the Height Hook.
The Vertical Offset (VO) value is stored in the Antenna Setup record and for a
Tripod Setup with the Height Hook as shown is 0.36m. This will need to be
measured if you are entering a new Antenna Setup Record without using the
Height Hook. There are two methods for mounting Leica Antennas - using a
VR GRT46 with a 5/8 inch screw or using a GRT44 with stub and a GAD31 stub to
screw adapter. The VO value remains constant whichever setup is used.
long as the correct antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value into

3. Pole Setup
VO Vertical Offset
MRP
VE1 VE2
VO = 0 Although an AT501/502 Antenna is shown, the same principles apply to the
AT504 and AT303.
The Vertical Height Reading (VR) value fixed at the height of the pole. With a
standard Leica System 500 pole this is 2.0m. There are two System 500 upper
pole halves. One has a 5/8 inch screw - the Antenna screws on directly. The
VR other has a stub and uses a GAD31 stub to screw adapter. Whichever pole
type is used, the height remains at 2.00m. Additional 1.00 m pole sections
maybe easily added or subtracted. In some special cases where the lower half
of the pole alone is used, the height will be 1.00m.
The Vertical Offset (VO) value is zero in this case.
long as the correct Antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value into

2.15.3 Measuring Slope Heights
VO Vertical Offset
HO Horizontal Offset
SR Slope Height Reading
HO VE1 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L1.
VE2 VE1 MRP
-VO
If you are using the Slope Height Reading the antenna

height is calculated as follows:
Antenna Height = √(
√(SR² - HO²) ± VO
If the Offset Point on the antenna is above the Mechanical

SR
Reference Plane MRP, the Vertical Offset VO is negative.
The Slope Height Reading is measured from the point on

the ground to the outside edge of the antenna. The
Antenna used for this example is a Dorne Margolin T
(Leica AT504) as specified by the IGS. The Mechanical
Reference Plane will differ depending on the Antenna type
used.

3. Using System 500 without a Terminal
The SR510, 520 and 530 receivers
can be used without the TR500
attached.
Applications and set ups most suited
to this type of configuration are
Reference Stations for Post-Process-
ing and Real-Time and Static/Rapid
Static measurements.
The receiver can be programmed in
the office using the TR500. This
greatly reduces the knowledge
required to operate the instrument in
the field.
Full instructions on how to program
the receiver are given in Chapter 5.
3. Using System 500 without a Terminal 70 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

3.1 Setting up the Equipment 3.2 Operation 3.3 Shut Down
The Receiver and Antenna will Once the equipment is set up, switch To shut down the equipment press
usually be mounted on a tripod or it on using the ON/OFF switch on the and hold the ON/OFF button for 3
pillar. Refer to Chapter 2 for details Receiver. seconds. The LED indicators will not
of equipment set up and connec- The equipment will automatically be lit when the equipment is switched
tions. begin to acquire and track satellites off.
Measure the Antenna Height using and record data as set up in the
the Height Hook. Note this value Receiver configuration.
down. You will need to enter it into Wait at the point for the required time.
SKI-Pro when you get back to the Note that the required observation
office. You should also note the Point time does not begin until the Satellite
Id and start and stop times. Status LED is constant green (see
A suggested form for recording next section). A list of approximate
necessary data is given in section observation times for Rapid Static
3.5. and Static baseline measurements is
The Receiver needs to be configured given in Appendix B.
correctly before it will work. The
parameters that are especially
important for working without a
Terminal are in Occupation Settings.
Full details are given in Chapter 5.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 71 3. Using System 500 without a Terminal

3.4 LED Indicators 3.4.1 Power LED 3.4.2 Satellite Status LED
Every System 500 Receiver has three Power LED off - Satellite Status
LED indicators that inform the opera- No Power LED off - No
tor of basic Receiver status. The LED Satellites tracked
indicators are located at the top of the
Receiver and are only visible when
the TR500 Terminal is not attached.
The top LED gives power information,
the middle gives satellite tracking
information and the lower gives
memory status.
Power LED Satellite Status
green - Power LED flashing
OK green - first
satellite tracked,
position not yet
Power
available
Satellite Tracking
Memory Status
Power LED Satellite Status

Flashing Green - LED Green -
Power Low Enough satellites
tracked to com-
pute position
3. Using System 500 without a Terminal 72 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

3.4.3 Memory Status LED 3.5 Field Record Sheet
Memory Status Memory Status
Field Record - Static/Rapid
LED off - Memory LED red -
Static Survey point
Device not Memory full on
available (PC selected device
Card not inserted Operator Name:
or Internal
Memory not Start time (Local):
fitted). Stop Time (Local):
Point ID:
Memory Status Antenna Height:
LED Green -
Receiver Serial No.:
Memory capacity
OK on selected Date:
device
Memory Status
LED flashing
green - Memory
capacity 75% full
on selected
device
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 73 3. Using System 500 without a Terminal

4. TR500 Terminal Overview
The TR500 Terminal performs three main functions:
1. Program the GPS Receiver
2. Enable input of information to the GPS Receiver
3. Display information from the GPS Receiver
The Terminal must be connected to the GPS Receiver to function. It can be

connected using a cable or mounted directly onto the receiver.
Once connected, the Terminal and Receiver can be switched on using the ON/
OFF key on the Terminal.
A GHT28 handstrap/beltclip is available which fits on the rear of the Terminal.
This improves handling of the Terminal in applications where it is held con-
stantly in the hand. (E.g. GIS applications).
TR500 Terminal attached to GPS Receiver

with cable
4. TR500 Terminal Overview 74 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

4.1 Screen Layout
When activated for the first time, the Status Icons
Terminal runs through several boot up Directory Bar
screens and then the Main Menu
appears.
The basic layout consists of a row of
status icons over a main display area
with a row of six softkeys (F1-F6) at
the bottom.
The Status Icons provide information
related to basic Receiver functions.
The Directory Bar gives your location
within the menu structure.
The Main Display Area shows infor-
mation regarding the receiver and/or
ongoing survey operation.
The Softkeys (F1-F6) indicate which
command may be executed by Main Display Area
pressing the relevant key. Softkeys F1-F6
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 75 4. TR500 Terminal Overview

On certain screens a shift symbol will
appear in the bottom right corner
above the softkey. It indicates that
further choices are available on the
softkeys.
At this time, the shift key appears so:
When it is pressed, it appears so:
Pressing it again will toggle back to

the original softkeys.
When a function is being carried out
that will take a significant amount of
time, the hourglass symbol (shown
below) will appear.
This indicates that the system is busy.

4.2 Status Icons
Accuracy Status
High Precision Navigation (cm level)

Accuracy No. visible GSM Battery
Status Satellites Status Status Precision Navigation (0.5 - 5m level)
Position No. Satellites Memory Local
Mode used on L1/L2 Status Time
Radio Observation Auto Position
Navigation (<100m)
Status Recording Recording
Status Status
When no position is available, no icon is shown.
Note that the icons that appear depend upon

which System 500 Receiver you are using, the
options set on it and the configuration that you are using.

Position Mode No. Visible Satellites No. Satellites used on L1/L2
Static - the GPS Antenna The number of theoretically visible When an Accuracy Status icon is
should be held stationary. satellites according to the current displayed the number of satellites
almanac are displayed. currently used for the position compu-
tation are shown. Satellites that are
Moving - The GPS Antenna
tracked but with a poor signal quality
may move. When the Track Mode is set to
are not shown.
MaxTrak this will be indicated
with a little “T” being added to
The Position Mode is governed by the
the icon. When no Accuracy Status icon is
type of operation defined in the
displayed the number of tracked
Configuration.
satellites are shown, irrespective of
the signal quality.

Radio Status GSM Status Memory Status
Radio Transmitting (blinks) The GSM phone is connected Internal Memory selected
to the network.
Radio Receiving (blinks) PC-Card selected
If this icon blinks, the GSM phone is
either trying to connect to or discon-
If two radio modems are being used Safe to remove PC-Card
nect from the network.
simultaneaously, the icon will alter-
nate between each modem. Memory level Indicator. Has 12
levels between:
Memory Empty and
Memory Full

Observation Recording Status Auto Position Recording Status Local Time
The Receiver is recording raw Will appear when Auto Position The local date can be set to display
GPS observations in Recording has been activated in the either 12 or 24 hour clock.
Stationary mode. The Configuration Set.
Receiver should be held
stationary.
Positions are being recorded
The Receiver is recording raw according to distance.
GPS observations in Moving
mode. The Receiver may Positions are being recorded
move. according to time.

Battery Status
Battery Voltage OK Due to the discharge characteristics

of the batteries, the lengths of time
between the four voltage level icons
Battery supplying 2/3 peak
may not be consistent. The voltage
voltage
level will decrease more quickly the
lower it gets.
Battery supplying 1/3 peak
voltage
Battery empty
The battery being used is denoted by

the letter next to it. A and B are the
plug-in camcorder batteries, E is the
external battery.
This example shows that an external

battery is fully charged and is being
used to power the system.
The system will always use the
battery with the highest voltage level.

4.3 Keyboard
The Terminal keyboard is a QWERTY Use the Shift key when the Shift
layout designed for use in temperture symbol is displayed to reveal further
extremes and also for gloved hands if choices on the softkeys F1-F6.
necessary.
Use the CONFIG key to enter the
The six keys F1-F6 at the top of the Configuration menus at any time.
keyboard correspond to the six
softkeys that appear on the screen The CE key is used to clear the last
when the Terminal is activated. character entered when entering
names, numbers etc. into the Re-
Pressing Shift followed by F1 will ceiver.
always activate the Help screen.
Pressing Shift followed by F6 will quit Use the ENTER key to confirm an
the Help and return you to the screen entry into the system.
you were on.
Alternatively, pressing Shift followed Use the STATUS key to access
by F6 will quit Survey, Stake Out or status information at any time.
Application.
Use the Cursor keys to move around
Use the Esc key to step back to the the screen.
previous screen at any time.
The keys F7-F10 are user definable
Use the key combination Alt + L to function keys. They can be defined to
lock and unlock the terminal. execute commands or access any
Use the key combination Alt + B to screen of your choosing. See section
switch the screen illumination on and 9.4.
off.
4.4 General Operating Principles
There are several conventions used 1. Function Keys 2. Entering Data
in the user interface of System 500. F1-F6 function keys appear below six At times you will have to enter Point
bars on the screen. These bars will Ids, Names etc. Enter the data using
appear with commands in them on the keyboard and press the Enter key.
each screen. To execute the com-
mand, press the corresponding Special characters such as ä, á, ç
function key. etc. can be entered using the
alphanumeric input. When the
character you wish to input is not on
the keyboard, press the Enter key.
The F1-F6 keys will then contain 5
characters on each. Press the key
that contains the character you
require. The F1-F6 keys will then
contain one of each of the five that
you selected. Use the up and down
cursor keys to scroll through all the
possible characters. Press the key
that corresponds to the character you
require.This will then be entered. The
extra characters that are available for
use can be configured in the
Configure menu.

3. Selecting items from list boxes
Working Example
At times you will have to select an
item from a list box. This could be a
Application - Entering a special character.
point Id, Job, code etc. There are two
types of list boxes.
Technique - N/A
1. The list box appears as the
Requirement - You need to enter the Job name “Cézanne”. All the charac-
whole screen.
ters are contained on the keyboard except “é”.
2. An item appears with an arrow
next to it indicating a drop down
list box.
When a list box appears on the whole

screen, a search field will appear in
the directory line with a blinking
cursor. If you know the name of the
item you are search for you may type
in the first few letters. The item(s) that
Field Procedure - The “C” is entered. To select the “é”, press F1. The
match what you type will be automati-
function keys will then change as follows:
cally highlighted. This is case sensi-
tive. List boxes that contain more
lines than is possible to fit on the
screen have a scroll bar at the side.
This indicates your position within the
Press F3 to select the “é”.
list.

match what you type will be automati-
cally highlighted. This is case sensi-
tive.
Alternatively you can move down the

list item by item using the cursor
keys.
Alternatively you can move down the Press the right or left cursor key to Pressing SHIFT will reveal HOME
list item by item using the cursor cycle through the choices or press (F2), END (F3), PG UP (F4) (Page
keys. ENTER to make the drop down box Up) and PG DN (F5) (Page Down)
appear. keys. You may also use these keys to
Pressing Shift will reveal HOME (F2), scroll up and down the list.
END (F3), PG UP (F4) (Page Up) and
PG DN (F5) (Page Down) keys. You
may also use these keys to scroll up
and down the list.
When a drop down list box is avail-

able, a small arrow appears next to
the selected item, as with Ant Name
A search field will appear at the top of
shown below.
the list box with a blinking cursor. If
you know the name of the item you
are search for you may type in the
first few letters. The item(s) that

5. Configuring the Receiver
The receiver has numerous Selecting Configure from the Main When Configure is selected from the
parameters and functions which can Menu enables a sequential Main Menu there are two
be configured by the user. configuration. Parameters can either configuration levels available,
be defined one after each other or Standard and Advanced. Standard
Different Configuration Sets are used explicitly selected from a list. These is recommended for most users.
for different measuring techniques. parameters are saved permanently in Advanced enables definition of
Several default Configuration Sets the Configuration Set and will be used parameters required for specialized
are programmed into the receiver as defaults each time the applications.
before delivery. These default files Configuration Set is used.
should cover the majority of To start defining a Configuration Set,
applications. Pressing the CONFIG key enters a attach the Terminal to the Receiver
menu from which you can choose the directly or connect it using a Lemo
However, you also have the parameter you wish to define. Certain cable.
opportunity to define your own infrequently used parameters are only
Configuration Sets. You may define available through the CONFIG key Switch on the Receiver and Terminal
several Configuration Sets to cover and are not contained in the by pressing the ON/OFF key.
every type of operation that you are sequential configuration.
likely to carry out. This can be done
using the TR500 Terminal. It is recommended that the CONFIG
key is only used when you are already
There are two methods for defining measuring and realize that you need
the Configuration. You can select to change a parameter temporarily
Configure from the Main Menu or (for the duration of the current
press the CONFIG key. survey), or need to configure a
parameter not contained in the
sequential configuration.
5. Configuring the Receiver 86 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

The following screen will appear the The following screen will appear: Pressing INFO (F5) toggles between
first time you switch on. the date of creation, creator and
description of the Configuration Sets.
Entering a new Configuration Set

After NEW (F2) has been selected,
the following screen will appear.
The most frequently used functions

You can select a Configuration Set by
are displayed. Use SHOW/HIDE (F4)
moving up and down the list and
to reveal/hide all of the functions.
pressing CONT (F1) or entering the
name of the Configuration Set. Press
This chapter covers configuration
EDIT (F3) to edit it. Changes in
using the sequential configuration
default Configuration Sets are only
(Configure) from the Main Menu.
temporary until the sensor is turned Enter the Name and, if required a
Details about configuration using the
of. Permanent changes, require the Description and Creator. Press the
CONFIG key can be found in Chapter
creation of a new Configuration Set. ENTER key after each entry. Press
9.
CONT (F1) when you are finished.
Select Configure from the Main
To enter a new Configuration Set
Menu. Press CONT (F1).
press NEW (F2). If you create a new Configuration Set
To delete a Configuration Set press a copy of the highlighted
DEL (F4). You will be asked for Configuration Set will be created.
confirmation before the Configuration
Set is deleted.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 87 5. Configuring the Receiver

5.1 Configuring the Receiver for Static and Rapid Static Operations
This section covers configuration of Operation Mode Or press LIST (F6) to get a listing of
the receiver for post-processed Select the Operation Mode that you the available parameter panels which
Static, Rapid Static or Kinematic require. The Operation Mode defines can then be accessed individually
Reference operations. which Configuration screens will be with CONT (F1). Changes are
available to you. automatically stored at the end of the
Highlight the Configuration Set you list. Changes in individual parameter
wish to edit and press EDIT (F3). You may choose between Standard panels can be stored with STORE
Note that you cannot edit default and Advanced. Standard is (F3) without the need to go to the end
Configuration Sets. You have to recommended for most users. of the list.
create a new Set and then edit it. Advanced enables definition of
parameters required for specialized The Standard Operation Mode is
applications. described from here on. The extra
configurable features available when
Advanced is selected are described in
section 5.1.1.
When you have made your selection

press CONT (F1) to go through the
fixed order of parameter panels.

Antenna Meas Type - Also, enter the means
Select the Antenna configuration that by which the Antenna height was
you are using. measured. For the majority of GPS
Antennas (including all Leica anten-
nas), this will be Vertical. The height
of some non-Leica GPS antennas
can only be measured by taking the
slope distance to the outer edge of
the Antenna. If this is the case, select You may select from this list or enter
Slope and enter the averaged value. your own Antenna configuration by
You will then be required to enter a pressing the NEW (F2) key. Note that
Horizontal Offset also. See Section the settings from the currently high-
Ant. Name - Displays and selects the 2.15.3 for more details on measuring lighted antenna setup are taken over
currently selected antenna setup. slope height. as suggested default values.
Vert Offset - Displays the vertical To select an antenna setup, highlight Most Static and Rapid Static Surveys
offset defined in the Antenna setup Ant. Name and press ENTER to or Reference Stations are carried out
(Ant Name). open the drop down box. All of the using a tripod or pillar setup.
existing antenna setups are listed.
Deflt Hgt - Displays a default height When a factory default tripod setup is
for the Antenna setup. This is of little chosen, the Vertical Offset is auto-
use for Static or Rapid Static applica- matically set at 0.36m. You will only
tions where the Antenna height differs need to measure the height with the
with each setup. height hook when setting up over a
point.

Note that factory default antenna Use the DEFLT (F5) key to reveal Position
setups contain an elevation depen- factory default Antenna configurations This screen defines the way in which
dent correction model. This is not with current System 500 GPS Anten- position is displayed. These settings
seen by the user. When setting up nas. This will then change to ALL. are mostly used for Real-Time Rover
your own configuration with the Use ALL (F5) to reveal System 300 setups.
Receiver, this model is not taken over. Antenna configurations also. You can
This model is required for real-time pick out the Antenna configurations
rover operations. If you need to input that you will use the most and delete
your own antenna setup and it re- the rest. All possible factory default
quires an antenna correction model, Antenna configurations may still be
use SKI Pro to configure the antenna accessed in the future by using the
setup and transfer it to the Receiver. DEFLT and ALL keys.
Advice on calculating Antenna

heights and offsets for Leica and non- Update Rate - Defines the rate at
Leica Antennas is given in Chapter which the position will be updated on
2.15. the display.
Use the EDIT (F3) key to edit the
highlighted Antenna configuration. Coord Sys - You may select a
Note that factory default Antenna coordinate system which will be used
configurations can only be viewed to display the positions. The WGS84
and not edited. coordinate system will always be
available and should be sufficient for
Use the DEL (F4) key to delete an Static/Rapid Static work. You may
Antenna configuration. determine other coordinate systems
in SKI Pro and upload them or you
may determine other coordinate

systems in the field using (F4) to delete the selected coordinate When using EDIT (F3) the same
Applications\Determine Coord system and INFO (F5) to reveal the descriptions apply.
System (see section 11.1). type of transformation used.
Press CONT (F1) to return to the
Further options are available on this When NEW (F2) is pressed, the CONFIGURE\Position screen.
screen in Advanced mode. See following screen appears.
section 5.1.1 for details.
Highlight Coord Sys and press

ENTER to reveal the list of coordinate
systems currently available.
Coord Sys - Defines the name of the

new coordinate system.
Further advice on Coordinate Sys-

tems is given in Section 11.
Select the coordinate system that you When you have set the parameters
wish to use. press CONT (F1) to return to the
CONFIGURE\Position screen.
Use NEW (F2) to define a new
coordinate system. Use EDIT (F3) to
edit a coordinate system. Use DEL

Formats Defined by - Defines the components Coding
used to calculate the DOP. The If you wish to select a coding system
definitions of the DOP are as follows: press ENTER and choose from
Thematical or Free coding. Complete
Height - VDOP descriptions of the coding systems
Pos - HDOP used by System 500 are given in
Pos + Hgt - PDOP Chapter 8.
Pos + Hgt + Time - GDOP
Press CODES (F3) to review the
You can configure the way in which OCUPY Counter - Defines how the codes in the chosen codelist. You
information is presented when length of time spent occupying a point may also edit the codelist here.
surveying. is displayed. Select from Time -
normal time or Observations - the
Format Grid - The format of grid number of observations recorded.
coordinates if they are being used.
Format Geodetic - The format of

geodetic coordinates if they are being
used.
Quality Type - The way in which the

quality of a position is displayed in the
Main Survey screen. This is Hard-
wired to DOP for Static/Rapid Static
Configurations. It will display a
Dilution of Precision according to the
components defined.

Real-Time Logging Log Moving Obs - Only available
For Static or Rapid Static post- when Log Static Obs = YES. Sets
processing operations select None the observation rate when the
and press CONT (F1). receiver is in Moving mode. This is
only used in Real-Time kinematic and
Post-Processed kinematic operations.
Log Auto Positions - Will

automatically log positions at a
Log Static Obs - Switches logging on specified rate. This is mostly used for
or off when the Receiver is in Static real-time rover operations. See
mode. The receiver has to be section 5.4 for details.
stationary.
Press CONT (F1) to continue to the
Obs Rate - The rate at which next screen.
observations will be logged. For Static
observations over long baselines and Further options are available on this
long periods of time 15-30 seconds is screen in Advanced mode. See
a reasonable rate. For Rapid Static section 5.1.1 for details.
applications, 10-15 seconds is
normally used. For Reference
stations for post-processed and real-
time kinematic rovers, the rate should
be set the same as at the Rover.

Occupation Settings Auto Store - Allows you to Id Templates
These settings control the way in automatically store a point after the An Id template is used to pre-define a
which points are occupied and STOP key has been pressed. Point Id. This feature is mainly used
recorded. in post-processed and real-time
Further options are available on this kinematic operations where many
screen in Advanced mode. See points are collected quickly. For
section 5.1.1 for details. Static, Rapid Static and Real-Time
Reference operations, set all fields to
No template used.
Further options are available on this

screen in Advanced mode. See
OCUPY Mode - Sets the way in
which coordinates will be recorded for Press CONT (F1) to complete the
a point. For Static, Rapid Static and configuration. You will return to the
Post-processed Reference Station Main Menu.
applications Normal only will be
available.
This means that observations will be
recorded until the STOP key is
pressed. The last observation that is
recorded is the one that expired
directly before STOP was pressed.

5.1.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Static and Rapid Static
The Advanced Mode contains extra Position Multiquadratic distributes the

configurable parameters that may be In addition to the functionality given in residuals using a multiquadratic
required for certain specialized Standard mode, details about the interpolation approach.
applications. chosen coordinate system are given.
Transform - The name of the
Select Advanced in transformation set used is displayed.
CONFIGURE\Operation Mode. Ellipsoid - The name of the local
ellipsoid is displayed.
Projection -The name of the
projection used is displayed.
Geoid Model - The name of the
geoid model used is displayed.
Residuals - Available when editing a CSCS Model - The name of the
coordinate system. The method by CSCS model used is displayed.
which residuals will be distributed
throughout the transformation area is
Only the screens that differ from displayed. Note that the details that are
those seen in Standard Mode are This may help the transformation displayed depend upon the type of
described here. result be more realistic and help transformation used. Certain types of
disperse any strains in the transformation do not use all of the
transformation. 1/Dist, 1/Dist2 and 1/ described parameters to calculate
Dist3/2 distributes the residuals of the local coordinates.
control points according to the
distance between each control point
and the newly transformed point.

Logging Occupation Settings
In addition to the functionality given in Additional functionality available in
Standard mode, you can also specify this panel over Standard mode is
the observables to be recorded and Auto OCUPY, Auto Stop, STOP P-
access further functionality via the PRC and END Survey.
FILES (F6) key.
Log File Segments - Will split up

the recorded data into files of a
specific time-based length unless 1
File is selected. If a time is selected
the option Split Tracks will become
available. Select No will only record
data into a new file if the time is Auto OCUPY - will automatically
Observables - Defines what is reached and a new track is observed. occupy the point as soon as the
recorded in the raw GPS data. survey is started. Timed is chosen for
Extended records extra observables Auto Del Log Files - Will delete the automatic point occupations at a
including the Doppler observable. recorded data after the specified certain time. The time is specified in
length of time unless Never is se- the SURVEY panel.
Pressing the FILES (F6) key enables lected.
you to configure further options. Auto Stop - will automatically stop
Press CONT (F1) to return to the measurements according to the
CONFIGURE\Logging. setting in the STOP P-PRC function.
The measurements stop when the
criteria for the setting reach 100%.

STOP P-PRC - Defines the method When: # of Sats is selected, set the length of
used for Auto Stop when Auto Stop is Time is selected, set the required time to observe depending on the
set to YES. observation time for each point. The number of satellites available. You
When Auto Stop is set to NO a time starts counting when OCUPY is may edit the value for each number of
percentage value will be displayed pressed. The Receiver stops record- satellites. Should the number of
next to the Time or Epochs in the ing when the set length of time is available satellites change during
Main Survey screen. This indicates reached. observations, the observations
how much of the Auto Stop criteria already recorded will be taken into
has elapsed. The Auto Stop criteria is STOP&GO Indicator is selected, set account. Should the number of
defined using the P-PRC (F5) key the baseline range. When measuring, satellites decrease, more time will be
(see below). an observation time will be calculated added. Should the number of satel-
based on the selected baseline lites increase, time will be subtracted.
END Survey - Defines how the The Receiver stops recording when
range, the number of available
survey will be ended. Manual lets you the time limit is reached.
satellites and the GDOP. This is
exit the survey yourself. Automatic
displayed as a percentage value.
will exit the survey automatically. Press CONT (F1) to return to
Auto & Shut-down will exit the CONFIGURE\Occupation Settings.
Observations is selected, set the
survey and turn the sensor off.
number of epochs that should be
When one of the STOP P-PRC recorded at each point.
options is selected the P-PRC (F5)
key will become available. Pressing
this key will enable you to configure
the option you have selected.

Working Example
Id Templates
Id Templates are not normally of use
Application - Post Processed Rapid Static Observation Recording
for Static, Rapid Static or Kinematic
Reference Stations and should be set
Technique - Rapid Static
to No Template Used.
Requirement - You wish to view the Stop and Go Indicator on the Main
However, should you wish to use
Survey screen but do not want to automatically stop the survey.
them, you will find you may also
configure Id Templates for Auxiliary
Settings -
Points in exactly the same way as for
normal points.
Other Settings - Use P-PRC (F5) to set the Baseline Length.
Field Procedure - After pressing OCUPY the time or epoch counter will
start. The Stop and Go Indicator percentage value will be shown in brackets
next to this. It will run until STOP is pressed. The observations will not stop
being recorded at 100% automatically. Further information regarding the
STOP & GO indicator is available in STATUS\SURVEY\STOP&GO
Indicator.

5.2 Configuring the Receiver for Post-Processed Kinematic Operations
This section covers configuration of Operation Mode can then be accessed individually
the receiver for Post-Processed Select the Operation Mode that you with CONT (F1). Changes are
Kinematic operations. require. The Operation Mode defines automatically stored at the end of the
which Configuration screens will be list. Changes in individual parameter
available to you. panels can be stored with STORE
(F3) without the need to go to the end
You may choose between Standard of the list.
and Advanced. Standard is
recommended for most users. The Standard operation mode is
Advanced enables definition of described from here on. The extra
parameters required for specialized configurable features available when
applications. Advanced is selected are described in
Section 5.2.1.

Or press LIST (F6) to get a listing of

the available parameter panels which

Antenna Meas Type - Also, enter the means Most Post-Processed Kinematic
Select the Antenna configuration that by which the Antenna height was Surveys are carried out using the
you are using. measured. For kinematic measure- System 500 pole. When a factory
ments using a pole, this will be default pole setup is selected, (AT501
Vertical. Pole/AT502 Pole) the Vertical Offset
is set automatically at zero and the
To select an antenna setup, highlight Deflt Hgt at 2.00m. Note that the
Ant. Name and press ENTER to settings from the currently highlighted
open the drop down box. All of the antenna setup are taken over as
existing antenna configurations are suggested default values.
listed.
Ant. Name - Displays and selects the Heights and offsets for Leica and
currently selected antenna setup. non-Leica Antennas is given in
Chapter 2.15.
Vert Offset - Displays the vertical
offset defined in the Antenna setup Use the Edit (F3) key to edit the
(Ant Name). highlighted Antenna configuration.
Use the DEL (F4) key to delete an
Deflt Hgt - Displays a default height Antenna configuration.
for the Antenna setup. If the antenna You may select from this list or enter
will always be mounted at a fixed your own antenna configuration by Use the DEFLT (F5) key to reveal
height (E.g. on a pole or always at the pressing the New (F2) key and default antenna configurations with
same fixed location), enter the value. entering the required information. current System 500 GPS antennas.
You will also get a chance to enter the This will then change to ALL.
height for each set up during survey
operations.

Use ALL (F5) to reveal System 300 Position Further options are available on this
antenna configurations also. You can This screen defines the way in which screen in Advanced mode. See
pick out the antenna configurations position is displayed. These settings section 5.2.1 for details.
that you will use the most and delete are mostly used for Real-Time Rover
the rest. All possible antenna setups. Highlight Coord Sys and press
configurations may still be accessed ENTER to reveal the list of coordinate
in the future by using the DEFLT and systems currently available.
ALL keys.
Update Rate - Defines the rate at

which the position will be updated on
the display. Select the coordinate system that you
wish to use.
Coord Sys - You may also select a
coordinate system which will be used Use NEW (F2) to define a new
to display the positions. The WGS84 coordinate system. Use EDIT (F3) to
coordinate system will always be edit a coordinate system. Use DEL
available and should be sufficient for (F4) to delete the selected coordinate
post-processed kinematic work. You system and INFO (F5) to reveal the
may define other coordinate systems type of transformation used.
in Applications in Determine Coord
System (see section 11.1).

When NEW (F2) is pressed, the Formats It will display a Dilution of Precision
following screen appears. according to the components defined.
Defined by - Defines the components

used to calculate the DOP. The
definitions of the DOP are as follows:
Height - VDOP
Pos - HDOP
Pos + Hgt - PDOP
Coord Sys - Defines the name of the You can configure the way in which Pos + Hgt + Time - GDOP
new coordinate system. information is presented when sur-
veying. OCUPY Counter - Defines how the
Further information about Coordinate length of time spent occupying a point
Systems is given in Chapter 11. Format Grid - The format of grid is displayed. Select from Time -
coordinates if they are being used. normal time or Observations - the
When you have set the parameters number of observations recorded.
press CONT (F1) to return to the Format Geodetic - The format of
CONFIGURE\Position screen. geodetic coordinates if they are being
used.
When using EDIT (F3) the same
descriptions apply. Quality Type - The way in which the
Press CONT (F1) to return to the Main Survey screen. This is Hard-
CONFIGURE\Position screen. wired to DOP for Post-processed
Kinematic Configurations.

Coding Real-Time Logging
If you wish to select a coding system For Static or Rapid Static
press ENTER and choose from postprocessing operations select
Thematical or Free coding. Complete None and press CONT (F1).
descriptions of the coding systems
used by System 500 are given in
Chapter 8.
Press CODES (F3) to review the

codes in the chosen codelist. You Log Static Obs - Switches logging on
may also edit the codelist here. or off when the Receiver is in Static
mode. The receiver has to be
stationary. This is used when
performing Static Initializations or
when occupying distinct points in a
kinematic chain.
Obs Rate - The rate at which

observations will be logged when the
receiver is stationary or when it is
moving. For Static intializations or
occupying distinct points in a
kinematic chain, the rate should be
set at between 0.1-2 seconds.

Log Moving Obs - Only available Further options are available on this Occupation Settings
when Log Static Obs = YES. Acti- screen in Advanced mode. See These settings control the way in
vates observation recording when the section 5.2.1 for details. which points are occupied and
receiver is in moving mode. The rate recorded.
is set in Obs Rate.
Static Init - Sets whether a Static

Initialization will be performed at the
beginning of a kinematic chain. When
using the SR510 set this option to
YES.
Log Auto Positions - Will automati-

cally log positions at a specified rate. OCUPY Mode - Sets the way in
This is mostly used for real-time which coordinates will be recorded for
operations. See section 5.4 for a point.
details. Normal means that the observations
will be recorded when the STOP key
Moving Ant Height - Sets the is pressed. A type of averaging is
Antenna Height when the receiver is performed on the measurements
in moving mode. When a standard observed over the time spent on the
System 500 pole setup is used, the point. This helps filter out effects of
suggested default will be 2.00m. slight movement. (E.g. trembling
hands).
Press CONT (F1) to continue to the Instantaneous means that a time tag
next screen. will be recorded when the OCUPY

key is pressed. During post-
processing, A coordinate will be Normal
OCUPY Button STOP Button
interpolated between the positions at Pressed Pressed
the neighboring two epochs.
Time in Epochs
For post-processed kinematic
surveys, it is possible to use either of
the settings. Post-processed coordinates
computed by averaging
resulting positions of epochs
2 and 3
Auto Store - Allows you to
automatically store a point after the
Instantaneous
STOP key has been pressed.
OCUPY Button OCUPY Button
Pressed and Point Pressed and Point
Coordinates Coordinates
Further options are available on this interpolated based interpolated based
screen in Advanced mode. See on Epochs 2 and 3 on Epochs 4 and 5
section 5.2.1 for details. Time in Epochs
OCUPY Button
Pressed and Point
Plan View Coordinates
OCUPY Button interpolated based
Pressed and Point on Epochs 4 and 5
Coordinates
interpolated based
on Epochs 2 and 3
Overview of Normal and Instantaneous settings

Id Templates Select the template that you wish to No Template Used - if this option is
An Id template is used to pre-define a use. Press ENTER to reveal the list of selected the last Point Id entered in
Point Id. This feature is mainly used available templates. the Survey panel will be displayed.
in post-processed kinematic and real- The Point Id will be automatically
time kinematic operations where incremented if that Point Id contains
many points are collected quickly. any numerical characters.
When set up correctly it will save you If you overtype this Point Id the auto
having to type in the Point Id at each increment will start from the new
point. Point Id.
Time and Date - will automatically

use the current local time and date as
In this panel two default templates are the Point Id.
displayed and also a template that a
user has previously defined. Point ##### - automatically writes
Inc stands for Increment and denotes the word “Point” followed by an
the amount by which any specified automatically incrementing 5 figure
number will increment at each point. number (denoted by #).
OCUPY Pts - Displays the Id Crsr stands for Cursor and denotes
template selected for use with the character number at which the
manually recorded points. cursor will be automatically placed.
Auto Log Pos - Displays the Id The arrow means that this
template selected for use with template is set to operate in the
automatically recorded points. Remain Running mode.

To define your own Id Template press Id - Displays the way in which the Num Inc - Defines the amount by
NEW (F2). template is currently configured. You which any automatically incrementing
may also enter any standard text here number will increment.You may enter
that you would like to see in the Id a negative increment if required.
Template. (In this example the
standard text is the word “Point”. The Cursor Pos - Defines the position at
# symbols indicate automatically which the cursor will start at.
incrementing numbers).
Note that leading spaces cannot be Press CONT (F1) until you return to
accepted. the CONFIGURE\ Id Templates
Pt Id. Mode - Is the Mode how the Pt screen.
Template will be used. If you select Num Start - Defines the start position
Remain Running and you enter a of any automatically incrementing To edit an existing Id Template press
different Point Id manually in the number. EDIT (F3).
Survey panel the new Point Id will be
used as the new Id Template. The Num End - Defines the end position To delete an existing Id Template
following Point Id’s will then be based of any automatically incrementing press DEL (F4).
on this new Template. If you select number.
Change to Indiv. and then enter a Further options are available on this
Point Id manually in the Survey panel Auto Inc - Defines whether the screen in Advanced mode. See
the Point Id will return to the Id number will increment automatically section 5.2.1 for details.
Template as it is defined. at subsequent points.

Working Example 1
Requirement - You are completing a survey where you will require many different point IDs. Most point IDs will
need an incrementing number behind the text. The first points you measure will need the point ID
“Bolt ###”.
Settings - In CONFIG\ OCUPY Pts set up a point ID template

as shown here.
Note that the Id type is set to “Remain Running”.
Field Proc - Within the Survey panel, the first point will
automatically show the Point Id “Bolt 001” upon
pressing STORE, the next Point Id will automatically
show “Bolt 002”.

Working Example 1 (cont)
Field Proc You now wish to survey points with the Id

(cont) - “Road####” starting with Id “Road0723”. Enter this
point Id into Survey panel. The next point Id will
automatically be “Road0724”.
You now wish to survey one individual point and give

it the point ID “BM98”. In the Survey panel, press
SHIFT and then INDIV (F5) and enter this point Id.
Survey this point and upon pressing STORE, the

next point Id will revert back to “Road0724”.
Note: Should you wish to store any new point Id as a template into the “library” then access the
CONFIGURE\ ID Templates panel (CONFIG, 1 Survey, 5 Point Id Templates) and then press
CONT (F1). The point Id currently in use is now stored as a template.

Working Example 2
Requirement - You are completing a survey where you need only one point ID that needs an incrementing number
behind the text. These points will need the point ID “Point####”. However you will also survey
some individual points that will need unique point Ids.
Settings - In CONFIG\ OCUPY Pts set up a point ID

template as shown here.
Note that the Id type is set to “Change to Indiv.”.
automatically show the Point Id “Point0001”. Upon
pressing STORE, the next Point Id will
automatically show “Point0002”.

Field Proc You now wish to survey one individual point and give
(cont) - it the point ID “BM98”. In the Survey panel, enter this
point ID. Survey this point and upon pressing
STORE, the next point Id will revert back to
“Point0002”.
Note - When entering the individual point Id “BM98”

you did not need to press SHIFT INDIV (F5) as in
Working Example 1. This is because the “Point####”
template is operating in the Change to Individual
mode.
Suppose you do now wish to survey points using a

new point Id “###Fence” and you wish this template
to operate in the Remain Running mode.
Enter the point Id “001Fence” and then press SHIFT

RUN (F5). Occupy and store this point. The next
point Id will be “002Fence”
Note: Numerical characters in front of any text will also increment. This allows any type of
incrementing point Ids to be created.

5.2.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Post-Processed Kinematic
The Advanced Mode contains certain Position Note that the details that are
extra configurable options that may In addition to the functionality given in displayed depend upon the type of
be required for specialized Standard mode, details about the transformation used. Certain types of
applications. chosen coordinate system are given. transformation do not use all of the
described parameters to calculate
Select Advanced in local coordinates.
CONFIGURE\Operation Mode.
Residuals - The method by which

residuals will be distributed
displayed.
Transform - The name of the
Only the screens that differ from transformation set used is displayed.
those seen in Standard Mode are Ellipsoid - The name of the local
described here. ellipsoid is displayed.
Projection -The name of the
projection used is displayed.
CSCS Model - The name of the
CSCS model used is displayed.

the observables to be recorded and Auto OCUPY, Auto Stop, STOP P-
access further functionality via the PRC and END Survey.
FILES (F6) key (not on the GS50/
GS50+).
Log File Segments will split up the

recorded data into files of a specific
length unless 1 File is selected. If a
time is selected the option Split
Tracks will become available. Select
No will only record data into a new file
if the time is reached and a new track Auto OCUPY - will automatically
is observed. occupy the point as soon as the
Observables - Defines what is survey is started. Timed is chosen for
recorded in the raw GPS data. Auto Del Log Files will delete the automatic point occupations at a
Extended records extra observables recorded data after the specified certain time. The time is specified in
including the Doppler observable. Full length of time unless Never is se- the SURVEY panel.
details of what is recorded in each lected.
mode is given in Appendix D. Auto Stop - will automatically stop
Pressing the FILES (F6) key enables CONFIGURE\Logging. setting in the STOP P-PRC function.
you to configure further options. The measurements stop when the

STOP P-PRC - Defines the method When: # of Sats is selected, set the length of
used for Auto Stop when Auto Stop is time to observe depending on the
set to YES. Time is selected, set the required number of satellites available. You
When Auto Stop is set to NO a observation time for each point. The may edit the value for each number of
percentage value will be displayed time starts counting when OCUPY is satellites. Should the number of
next to the Time or Epochs in the pressed. The Receiver stops record- available satellites change during
Main Survey screen. This indicates ing when the set length of time is observations, the observations
how much of the Auto Stop criteria reached. already recorded will be taken into
has elapsed. The Auto Stop criteria is account. Should the number of
defined using the P-PRC (F5) key STOP&GOIndicator is selected, set satellites decrease, more time will be
(see below). the baseline range. When measuring, added. Should the number of satel-
an observation time will be calculated lites increase, time will be subtracted.
END Survey - Defines how the based on the selected baseline The Receiver stops recording when
survey will be ended. Manual lets you range, the number of available the time limit is reached.
exit the survey yourself. Automatic satellites and the GDOP. This is
will exit the survey automatically. displayed as a percentage value. The Press CONT (F1) to return to
Auto & Shut-down will exit the Receiver stops recording as soon as CONFIGURE\Occupation Settings.
survey and turn the sensor off. 100% is reached.
When one of the STOP P-PRC Observations is selected, set the

options is selected the P-PRC (F5) number of epochs that should be
key will become available. Pressing recorded at each point. This setting is
this key will enable you to configure recommended for post-processed
the option you have selected. kinematic surveys.

Working Example Id Templates
You may also configure Id Templates
Application - Picking up distinct points in a Kinematic chain for Auxiliary Points in exactly the
same way as for normal points.
Technique - Post-Processed Kinematic on the Fly. (Not possible with
SR510).
Requirement - You wish to automatically stop recording and store each

point after pressing OCUPY.
Settings -
Other Settings - Use P-PRC (F5) to set the Observations to 1 or 2.
Field Procedure - At the point you wish to measure, place and level the
pole on the point. Press OCUPY. The point will be recorded and stored
automatically as soon as the set number of observations are recorded. Note
that the Point Id must be correctly defined and any code (if required) se-
lected BEFORE OCUPY is pressed due to Auto Store being set to YES.

5.3 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Reference Operations
This section covers configuration of Operation Mode Or press LIST (F6) to get a listing of
the receiver for Real-Time Reference Select the Operation Mode that you the available parameter panels which
Operations. Note that Real Time require. The Operation Mode defines can then be accessed individually
Reference Operations are only which Configuration screens will be with CONT (F1). Changes are
possible with an SR530 (Real-Time to available to you. automatically stored at the end of the
centimeter level) or an SR510 or 520 list. Changes in individual parameter
that has the RTCM 2.x option You may choose between Standard panels can be stored with STORE
activated (DGPS to 0.5 - 5m level). and Advanced. Standard is (F3) without the need to go to the end
recommended for most users. of the list.
Highlight the Configuration Set you Advanced enables definition of
wish to edit and press CONT (F1). parameters required for scientific The Standard Operation mode is
Note that you cannot edit default research and other specialized described from here on. The extra
Configuration Sets. You have to applications. configurable features available when
create a new one and then edit it. Advanced is selected are described in
the next section.


Antenna Meas Type - Also, enter the means
Select the Antenna configuration that by which the Antenna height was
you are using. measured. For the majority of GPS
Antennas (including all Leica
antennas), this will be Vertical. The
height of some non-Leica GPS
antennas can only be measured by
taking the slope distance to the outer
edge of the Antenna. If this is the Most Real-Time Reference Stations
case, select Slope and enter the are setup on a tripod or pillar.
value. You will then be required to
enter a Horizontal Offset also. See You may select from this list or enter
Ant. Name - Displays and selects the Section 2.15.3 for more details on your own Antenna configuration by
currently selected antenna setup. measuring slope height. Note that the pressing the NEW (F2) key. Note that
settings from the currently highlighted the settings from the currently
Vert Offset - Displays the vertical antenna setup are taken over as highlighted antenna setup are taken
offset defined in the Antenna setup suggested default values. over as suggested default values.
(Ant Name).
To select an antenna setup, highlight When a factory default tripod setup is
Deflt Hgt - Displays a default height Ant. Name and press ENTER to chosen, the Vertical Offset is
for the Antenna configuration. This is open the drop down box. All of the automatically set at 0.36m. You will
of little use for Real-Time Reference existing antenna configurations are need to measure the Antenna Height
stations where the Antenna height listed. with the height hook when setting up.
differs with each setup.

Setting up on a pillar will require that All possible factory default Antenna Position
you use the default pillar setup. configurations may still be accessed This screen defines the way in which
in the future by using the DEFLT and position is displayed.
Advice on calculating Antenna ALL keys.
heights and offsets for Leica and non-
Leica Antennas is given in Chapter
2.15.
Use the EDIT (F3) key to edit the

highlighted Antenna configuration.
Note that factory default Antenna
configurations can only be viewed
and not edited. Update Rate - Defines the rate at
which the position will be updated on
Use the DEL (F4) key to delete an the display.
Antenna configuration.
Coord Sys - You may also select a
Use the DEFLT (F5) key to reveal coordinate system which will be used
factory default Antenna configurations to display the positions. The WGS84
with current Leica GPS Antennas. coordinate system will always be
This will then change to ALL. available. You may define other
coordinate systems in Applications
Use ALL (F5) to reveal System 300 in Determine Coord System (see
Antenna configurations also. You can section 11.1).
pick out the Antenna configurations
that you will use the most and delete
the rest.
Further options are available on this Select the coordinate system that you When you have set the parameters
screen in Advanced mode. See wish to use. press CONT (F1) to return to the
section 5.3.1 for details. CONFIGURE\Position screen.
Use NEW (F2) to define a new
It is especially important to define a coordinate system. Use EDIT (F3) to When using EDIT (F3) the same
local coordinate system for a Real- edit a coordinate system. Use DEL descriptions apply.
Time Reference Station if you intend (F4) to delete the selected coordinate
to use a known local grid coordinate system and INFO (F5) to reveal the Press CONT (F1) to return to the
at the Reference Point. The Receiver type of transformation used. CONFIGURE\Position screen.
must be able to calculate an equiva-
lent coordinate in the WGS84 coordi- When NEW (F2) is pressed, the
nate system for transmission to the following screen appears.
Rover(s).
Highlight Coord Sys and press

ENTER to reveal the list of coordinate
systems currently available.

new coordinate system.
Further advice on Coordinate Sys-

tems is given in Section 11.

Formats Defined by - Defines the components Coding
used to calculate the DOP. The Normally, when setting up a Real-
definitions of the DOP are as follows: Time Reference Station, the
Reference Point will be selected from
Height - VDOP a predefined point list. These points
Pos - HDOP will have been measured previously
Pos + Hgt - PDOP and any required code already
Pos + Hgt + Time - GDOP assigned. Therefore a Coding System
is not usually required.
You can configure the way in which OCUPY Counter - Defines how the
information is presented when length of time spent occupying a point If you still wish to select a coding
surveying. is displayed. Select from Time - system press ENTER and choose
normal time or Observations - the from Thematical or Free coding.
Format Grid - The format of grid number of computed navigation Complete descriptions of the coding
coordinates if they are being used. solutions recorded. systems used by System 500 are
given in Section 8.
Format Geodetic - The format of
geodetic coordinates if they are being Press CODES (F3) to review the
used. codes in the chosen codelist. You
may also edit the codelist here.
Quality Type - The way in which the
Main Survey screen. This is Hard-
wired to DOP for Real-Time
Reference Configurations. It will
display a Dilution of Precision
according to the components defined.

Real-Time 1/2 either Port 3 or Port 1. RTCM is for use when Rover units
Configures the parameters used for You may also attach a radio modem from a different manufacturer will be
Real-Time operations. If needed, it is or phone via a cable to any port. used. RTCM message 3 is always
possible to configure two real-time generated irrespective of which other
interfaces. Use the right or left cursor keys to message types are chosen.
select a port for transmission of real- RTCM 18, 19 - Uncorrected Carrier
time data. The device that is currently phase and pseudorange. Use for
assigned to this port will be displayed. RTK operations where the
ambiguities will be resolved at the
Rate - Set the rate at which you wish Rover (RTK). An accuracy of around
to output messages. System 500 1-5cm (rms) can be expected after a
supports rates of 0.1 to 60 seconds. successful ambiguity resolution.
R-Time Data - defines the operation RTCM 20, 21 - RTK Carrier phase
mode of the receiver. Select To define the Data Format, highlight corrections and high-accuracy
Reference to broadcast real-time the Data Format field and press pseudorange corrections. Use for
data. ENTER. RTK operations. There is little or no
difference in the accuracy obtained
Data Format - Defines the format Leica is the proprietary Leica real- using these messages as compared
used to broadcast the real-time data. time GPS data format. This is the to messages 18 and 19.
best format to use when working RTCM 1, 2 - Differential and Delta
Port - defines the port to which the exclusively with Leica System 500 Differential GPS corrections. Use for
Real-Time data will be sent. Normally Rover units. DGPS applications. An accuracy of
a radio modem or GSM phone will be 0.5-5m rms can be expected at the
connected to the port. When the radio CMR and CMR+ are compacted Rover.
modem is a Satelline, Pacific Crest or formats used to broadcast data for
GSM phone it will be mounted in the third party receivers.
radio housing box and attached to

Pressing the DEVCE (F5) key lets Press CONT (F1) to return to CON- stations simultaneously, broadcasting
you configure and assign a device to FIGURE\ Real-Time1. on different frequency channels and
the selected port. use frequency switching at the rover.
Pressing REF (F6) enables you to or
configure further options concerning 2. The Reference is being moved
the broadcast messages from the from one point to another.
reference station.
If it is required to configure the sec-

ond real-time interface press SHIFT
R-T 2 (F2) in the CONFIGURE\ Real-
Select the device you wish to assign Time 1 panel.
to the port. If no default devices are
displayed press DEFLT (F5) to reveal
them. Default devices have an
asterisk before the device name.
You may define a number for the
Select a device from the list. To view reference station ID, select a carriage
the configuration of your chosen return at the end of each message
device, press EDIT (F3). If the device and, if RTCM format has been
you wish to use requires a different selected, choose the RTCM Version Configure the parameters for the
configuration, select Unknown Radio to output. Note that the Reference Real-Time 2 interface as described
and press NEW (F2) and enter the and Rover must use the same RTCM above. The second Real-Time 2
Name and Port Settings for the version. interface is completely independent to
device. the Real-Time 1 interface so that a
A complete list of all available devices You will need to define a Ref Stn Id if: different Data Format and Rate may
is given in Appendix H. 1. You intend to work with 2 reference be selected.
Note that a different port must be Logging For Real-Time Reference stations the
selected to that used for the Real- If required, you may log the raw rate should be set the same as the
Time 1 interface. observations. This may be used if Position Update Rate at the Rover.
there are problems with the data This will normally be between 0.1-2s.
Use SHIFT R-T 1 (F2) to accept the reception at the Rover and a Real-
configuration settings and return to Time position could not be calculated. Press CONT (F1) to continue to the
Real-Time 1. The observation data can be post- next screen.
processed when back in the office to
Use CONT (F1) to return to the fill in any gaps in the Real-Time Further options are available on this
CONFIGURE\ Interface panel. positions. Of course, observations screen in Advanced mode. See
must be logged at the Rover also. section 5.3.1 for details.
The Port/ Device configured for both
real-time interfaces is now visible. Press CONT (F1) to complete the
configuration.
Log Static Obs - Switches logging on

or off when the Receiver is in Static
mode.
Obs Rate - The rate at which obser-

vations will be logged.

5.3.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Reference Stations
The Advanced Mode contains extra Position Note that the details that are dis-
configurable parameters that may be In addition to the functionality given in played depend upon the type of
required for certain specialized Standard mode, details about the transformation used. Certain types of
applications. chosen coordinate system are given. transformation do not use all of the
Select Advanced in local coordinates.
CONFIGURE\Operation Mode.
Residuals - The method by which

residuals will be distributed through-
out the transformation area is dis-
played.
Only the screens that differ from Transform - The name of the trans-
those seen in Standard Mode are formation set used is displayed.
described here. Ellipsoid - The name of the local
ellipsoid is displayed.
Projection -The name of the projec-
tion used is displayed.
CSCS Model - The name of the

Real-Time 1/2 If RTCM is selected as the Data channel. Time Slicing on System500
Configures parameters used for Real- Format, you may select different rates works for radios, GSM and the
Time operations. for the various message types. RS232 interface.
E.g. Message 3 is always output
regardless of which RTCM messages
are selected. As this message does
not usually have to be constantly
output, you may select a lower rate
for it.
If Leica Data Format is selected, you Time Slicing - Activates time slicing.
Data Format - There are two extra may select different rates for the raw If set to Yes, two more lines become
formats available for RTCM. You data transmission (Data Rate), the available.
have the possibility to output both rate at which the reference coordi-
Code corrections together with raw nates are output (Coord Rate) and Used Ref Stations - Set the number
GPS data or high-precision phase the rate at which Reference Station of reference stations in use. You can
corrections by selecting the options information (Point Id, etc.) is output have up to 4 reference stations from
RTCM 1, 2, 18, 19 or RTCM 1, 2, 20, (Info Rate). where RTK messages are sent.
21.
In addition to the configuration op- Time Slot - The time slot represents
Also, the extra key RATES (F3) is tions in the standard mode, pressing the actual time delay. The number of
available. REF (F6) enables you to configure time slots is the number of reference
Time Slicing. Time Slicing is the stations in use. The time delay equals
RATES enables different messages possibility to send RTK messages 1 sec devided by the total number of
to be output at different rates. delayed. This is required when RTK reference stations. If two reference
messages from different reference stations are used, the number of time
stations are sent on the same radio delay is 0.50.
Therefore, the time slots are at 0.00 Logging
sec and at 0.50 sec. With three In addition to the functionality given in
reference stations, the time delay is Standard mode, you can also specify
0.33. The time slots are at 0.00, 0.33 the observables to be recorded and
and 0.66 sec. access further functionality via the
FILES (F6) key.
The second Real-Time 2 interface is
completely independent to the Real-
Time 1 interface so that the number Log File Segments - Will split up the
of reference stations and time slots recorded data into files of a specific
can be configured differently. length unless 1 File is selected.
If a time is selected the option Split
if the time is reached and a new track
Observables - Defines what is is observed.
recorded in the raw GPS data.
Extended records extra observables Auto Del Log Files - Will delete the
including the Doppler observable. recorded data after the specified
length of time unless Never is se-
Pressing the FILES (F6) key enables lected.
you to configure further options.
Press CONT (F1) to return to
CONFIGURE\Logging.

5.4 Configuring the Receiver for Real-Time Rover Operations
This section covers configuration of Operation Mode can then be accessed individually
the receiver for Real-Time Select the Operation Mode that you with CONT (F1). Changes are
Rover Operations. Note that Real require. The Operation Mode defines automatically stored at the end of the
Time Rover Operations are only which Configuration screens will be list. Changes in individual parameter
possible with an SR530 (Real-Time to available to you. panels can be stored with STORE
centimeter level) or an SR510 or 520 (F3) without the need to go to the end
that has the RTCM 2.0 option You may choose between Standard of the list.
activated (DGPS to 0.5 - 5m level). and Advanced. Standard is
recommended for most users. The Standard Operation mode is
Highlight the Configuration Set you Advanced enables definition of described from here on. The extra
wish to edit and press EDIT (F3). parameters required for scientific configurable features available when
Note that you cannot edit default research and other specialized Advanced is selected are described in
Configuration Sets. You have to applications. the next section.
create a new Set and then edit it. If
the only existing Configuration Sets
are default Sets, highlight the Set that
corresponds to the type of operation
you wish to configure (in this case,
RT_ROV), and press NEW (F2).
After entering the Name, etc., select
the new Configuration Set and press
EDIT (F3). When you have made your selection
Or press LIST (F6) to get a listing of

the available parameter panels which

Antenna Real-Time Rover operations. You will You may select from this list or enter
Select the Antenna configuration that also get a chance to enter the height your own antenna configuration by
you are using. for each set up during survey opera- pressing the NEW (F2) key and
tions. entering the required information.
Meas Type - Also, enter the means Most Real-Time Rover Surveys are
by which the Antenna height was carried out using the System 500
measured. For Real-Time Rover pole. When a factory default pole
operations this will usually be Verti- setup is selected, (AT501 Pole/AT502
cal. Pole) the Vertical Offset is set
automatically at zero and the Deflt
To select an antenna setup, highlight Hgt at 2.00m. Note that the settings
Ant. Name - Displays and selects the Ant. Name and press ENTER to from the currently highlighted antenna
currently selected antenna setup. open the drop down box. All of the setup are taken over as suggested
This will normally be AT502 Pole for existing antenna configurations are default values.
real-time Rover operations. listed.
Vert Offset - Displays the vertical Heights and offsets for Leica and
offset defined in the Antenna setup non-Leica Antennas is given in
(Ant Name). Chapter 2.15.
Deflt Hgt - Displays a default height Use the EDIT (F3) key to edit the
for the Antenna configuration. If the highlighted Antenna configuration.
antenna will always be mounted at a Use the DEL (F4) key to delete an
fixed height (E.g. on a pole or always Antenna configuration.
at the same fixed location), enter the
value. This will normally be 2.00m for

Use the DEFLT (F5) key to reveal Position Highlight Coord Sys and press
default antenna configurations with This screen defines the rate for and ENTER to reveal the list of coordinate
current Leica GPS antennas. This will the way in which position is displayed. systems currently available.
then change to ALL. Use ALL (F5) to If you wish to work in local
reveal System 300 antenna coordinates, you MUST define the
configurations also. You can pick out coordinate system here.
the antenna configurations that you
will use the most and delete the rest.
All possible antenna configurations
may still be accessed in the future by
using the DEFLT and ALL keys.
Select the coordinate system that you

wish to use.
Update Rate - Defines the rate at Use NEW (F2) to define a new
which the position will be updated on coordinate system. Use EDIT (F3) to
the display. edit a coordinate system. Use DEL
(F4) to delete the selected coordinate
Coord Sys - You may also select a system and INFO (F5) to reveal the
coordinate system which will be used type of transformation used.
to display the positions. The WGS84
coordinate system will always be When NEW (F2) is pressed, the
available. You may define other following screen appears.
coordinate systems in Applications
in Determine Coord System (see
section 11.1).

Formats Defined by - Defines the components
used to calculate the Quality.
Height - 1D Height Quality

Pos - 2D Position Quality
Pos + Hgt - 3D Position Quality
Pos + Hgt + Time - 3D Position
Quality
new coordinate system. You can configure the way in which OCUPY Counter - Defines how the
information is presented when length of time spent occupying a point
When you have set the parameters surveying. is displayed. Select from Time -
press CONT (F1) to return to the normal time or Positions - the
CONFIGURE\Position screen. Format Grid - The format of grid number of position calculations.
coordinates if they are being used.
When using EDIT (F3) the same
descriptions apply. Format Geodetic - The format of
geodetic coordinates if they are being
Press CONT (F1) to return to the used.
CONFIGURE\Position screen.
Quality type - For real-time rover,
Further options are available on this select Quality. This will display a
screen in Advanced mode. See Coordinate Quality in cm within which
section 5.4.1 for details. the position lies. This is calculated
using the standard deviations of the
coordinate components.

Coding Real-Time Use the right or left cursor keys to
If you wish to select a coding system select a port for transmission of real-
press ENTER and choose from time data. The device that is currently
Thematical or Free coding. Complete assigned to this port will be displayed.
descriptions of the coding systems
used by System 500 are given in Ref Sensor - Select the Receiver
Chapter 8. type used at the Reference Station. If
this is not a Leica Receiver select
Press CODES (F3) to review the R-Time Data - defines the operation Unknown.
codes in the chosen codelist. You mode of the Receiver. Select Rover
may also edit the codelist here. to receive real-time data. Ref Antenna - select the Antenna
used at the reference station. All
Data Format - Defines the format Antennas in the current antenna list
used to broadcast the real-time data. are available. If you do not know
which Antenna is being used at the
Port - defines the port to where the reference or an Antenna is being
Real-Time receive device will be used which is not in the list, select
connected. Normally this will be a Unknown. If the reference data is
radio modem or GSM phone. When corrected by absolute antenna cali-
the radio modem is a Satelline 1AS/ bration values and you want to use
2ASx/2ASxE, Pacific Crest Leica standard antenna models on
RFM96(W) or GSM phone it will be the rover side, select
mounted in a housing and attached to ADVNULLANTENNA.
either Port 3 or Port 1. You may also
attach a radio modem or phone Use Phase - Set to NO if only a code
without a housing via a cable to any solution is required.
port.

Radio Down - Raw observations can RTCM 20, 21 - RTK Carrier phase Pressing the DEVCE (F5) key lets
be logged for post-processing in case corrections and high-accuracy you configure and assign a device to
of radio link interuption. pseudorange corrections. Use for the selected port.
RTK operations. There is little or no
To define the Data Format received, difference in the accuracy obtained
highlight the Data Format field and using these messages as compared
press ENTER. to messages 18 and 19.
RTCM 1, 2 - Differential and Delta
Leica is the proprietary Leica real- Differential GPS corrections. Use for
time GPS data format. This is the DGPS applications. An accuracy of
best format to use when working 0.5-5m rms can be expected at the
exclusively with Leica System 500 Rover. Select the device you wish to assign
Rover units. RTCM 9, 2 - GPS Partial Correction to the port. If no default devices are
CMR and CMR+ are compacted Set and Delta Differential GPS displayed press DEFLT (F5) to reveal
formats used for receiving data from Corrections. Use for DGPS them.
third party receivers. applications. An accuracy of 0.5-5m
RTCM is used for receiving data from rms can be expected at the Rover.
a non-System 500 Reference Station. Use this when a slow data link is
RTCM Message 3 will always be being used in the presence of
received by default. interference.
RTCM 18, 19 - Uncorrected Carrier
phase and pseudorange. Use for
RTK operations where the
ambiguities will be resolved at the
Rover (RTK). An accuracy of around
1-5cm (rms) can be expected after a
successful ambiguity resolution.
A complete description of all available Press SHIFT and then PRED (F3) to There are two advantages in using
devices and detailed configurations activate and deactivate Prediction on prediction:
and uses is given in Appendix H. the rover. 1. Update rate: Prediction allows RT
positions to be computed on the rover
Press CONT (F1) to return to the at a rate greater than the
CONFIGURE\Real-Time screen. transmission rate of the data from the
reference station. This means RT
Press CONT (F1) again. The next positions can be computed on the
screen will depend on the device that rover at a rate up to 10Hz, regardless
has just been chosen. For example, if of the rate at which data is
the chosen device is the Pacific Crest transmitted from the reference
radio, the user will be able to choose If an SR530 is being used as the RTK station.
the radio channel. If the chosen reference station, then the Leica data 2. Reduced latency: Positions
device is a GSM device, the user will format should always be used. In this computed with prediction will have a
be able to configure parameters for case Prediction should always be set latency of around 30 to 40ms.
use with a GSM device such as PIN to YES.
code. However, should the RTK messages
If however, the reference is transmitted from the reference station
A complete description of the different transmitting a 3rd party data format be effected by latency, then the
screens is given in Appendix H. such as RTCM, CMR or CRM+, then accuracy of the positions computed
prediction on the rover may be turned using prediction may be reduced. In
on or off. Prediction is only of use in these circumstances, it may be
RTK cm accuracy surveys. necessary to deactivate positions
computed by prediction. In this case
The default setting is that prediction Prediction should be set to NO.
will be activated.

However deactivating prediction Logging Log Static Obs - Switches logging on
would mean: If required, you may log the raw or off when the Receiver is in Static
1. Update rate: Positions can only be observations. This may be used if mode. The receiver has to be station-
computed at the rate at which data is there are problems with the real-time ary. This is used when occupying
transmitted from the reference data reception at the Rover and a distinct points in a kinematic chain.
station. Real-Time position could not be
2. Increased latency: Computed calculated, or if you wish to be able to Obs Rate - The rate at which obser-
vations will be logged when the
positions would have an increased check your work back in the office.
receiver is stationary or when it is
latency. Observations must be logged at the
moving. For Static intializations or
Reference also.
occupying distinct points in a kine-
In all RTK surveys where the refer- matic chain, the rate should be set at
ence station is not an SR530 and the Another alternative for post-process- between 0.1-2 seconds.
RTK message is not Leica format, it ing infill is to use the Radio Down
is up to the user to decide if the option. This is available in Advanced Log Moving Obs - Only available
performance of the rover is better mode in CONFIGURE\Real-Time. when Log Static Obs = YES. Acti-
with prediction activated or deacti- (See section 5.4.1). vates observation recording when the
vated. receiver is in moving mode. The rate
is set in Obs Rate.
Press CONT (F1) to continue.
Static Init - Available when Log
Moving Obs = YES. Defines whether
or not a static initialization will be
performed at the beginning of each
kinematic chain.

Log Auto Positions - Will automati- Note, if it is chosen to store Auto-
cally log positions at a specified rate. Points to the GeoDB, the maximum
recording rate is 1Hz.
Moving Ant Height - Sets the
Antenna Height when the receiver is Start Mode – You may select from
in moving mode. When a standard either Immediate or Controlled. If
System 500 pole setup is used, the you select Immediate the system will
Log Pos by - Defines the criteria by
suggested default will be 2.00m. automatically start with logging Auto-
which an automatic position will be
logged. Points as soon as you start the
Press CONT (F1) to continue to the survey. If you select Controlled you
When Time is selected, the Position
next screen. will decide when you start the logging
Rate defined in Configure\Position is
displayed. This may be multiplied by of Auto-Points. Press the AUTO key
Further options are available on this in the main Survey panel to enter the
the Log Factor to give a position
screen in Advanced mode. See mode for measuring Auto-Positions.
logging rate displayed in the Log
section 5.4.1 for details. In the AUTO-POS panel the START
Every line.
(F6) key will be available to you.
Store Pt DB – If this parameter is set
When Log Auto Positions is set to
to YES the Auto-Points will be stored
YES, the POS (F3) key becomes
to the GeoDB. This is the setting that
available. Use this key to define the
is needed if it is intended to store
criteria for automatic position record-
codes with Auto-Points. Auto-Points
ing.
stored to the GeoDB may additionally
be viewed and edited in the Point
Management, they may be output
with an .FRT file, they may be staked
out or viewed in the Graph panel.

Quality Info - Defines which quality Point annotations for auto logged After doing so and reentering the
information should be recorded with points are independant from point panel SURVEY\Point Annotations
the position. You may select from the annotations for manually occupied with ANNOT (F5), the keys LAST
Full covariance information or just points. (F3) and LAST# (F5) will be active. #
the coordinate quality (CQ only). stands for the numbers 1 to 4 of the
point annotations and changes with
Use Beep - If YES, the terminal will the cursor position. LAST (F3)
beep when an automatic position is reactivates all previous four point
logged. annotations. LAST# (F5) only
reactivates the previous annotation of
Monitor CQ - If YES, the CQ of the the last line.
automatic position will be monitored
and the point will only be recorded if An ANNOT (F5) key becomes Annotations are ignored when
less than the specified quality. When available. entering point annotations first and
YES is chosen an additional line then changing USE ANNOT to NO.
appears below Monitor CQ to enter With setting USE ANNOT to YES
the specified quality. again, the last annotations are
remembered.
Use Annot - This line is visible, if Point Annotations are remembered
Store Pt DB is set to YES. If YES, until the system is turned off.
point annotations will be stored in the
GeoDB with each auto logged point, You may type in 4 notes with up to 26 Point annotations can be viewed in
too. Point Annotations may be used characters in each note. Point Management. See chapter 11.3.
as an electronic notepad where
events, notes etc. may be written. Press CLEAR (F6) to delete the
They are then taken with the point Id content of all input fields and CONT
information into SKI-Pro. (F1) to leave the panel.

The logging of Auto-Positions may Press CONT (F1) to continue to the Instantaneous means that a time tag
also be configured from inside the next screen. will be recorded when the OCUPY
AUTO-POS panel. See chapter 7.4.7 key is pressed. A coordinate will be
Using the AUTO key for more interpolated between the positions at
information. the neighbouring two epochs.
When Distance is selected, a posi- Occupation Settings More details about Normal and
tion will be recorded every time the Instantaneous occupy modes are
distance from the previously recorded given in section 5.2.
point matches the value set in the
Log Every line. You can also define Auto Store - Allows you to automati-
the Quality Info recorded with the cally store a point after the STOP key
point in the same way as when Time has been pressed.
is selected.
Further options are available on this
OCUPY Mode - Sets the way in screen in Advanced mode. See
When Height is selected, a position
which coordinates will be recorded for section 5.4.1 for details.
will be recorded every time the height
a point.
difference from the previously re-
Normal means that the coordinates
corded point matches the value set in
will be recorded using an average of
the Log Every line. You can also
the positions calculated between
define the Quality Info recorded with
pressing OCUPY and STOP. This
the point in the same way as when
helps filter out effects of slight move-
Time is selected.
ment. (E.g. trembling hands).
CONFIGURE\Logging screen.

Id Templates Press ENTER to reveal the list of Time and Date - will automatically
available templates. use the current local time and date as
An Id template is used to pre-define a the Point Id.
Point Id. This feature is mainly used
in post-processed kinematic and real- To define your own Id Template press
time kinematic operations where NEW (F2).
many points are collected quickly.
When set up correctly it will save you
having to type in the point Id at each
point.
Inc stands for Increment and denotes
the amount by which any specified
number will increment at each point.
Crsr stands for Cursor and denotes
the character number at which the Pt Id. Mode - Is the Mode how the Pt
cursor will be automatically placed. Template will be used. If you select
The arrow means that this tem- Remain Running and you enter a
plate is set to operate in the Remain Point Id manually in the Survey panel
OCUPY Pts - Displays the Id tem- Running mode. the new Point Id will be used as the
plate selected for use with manually new Id Template and the following
recorded points. No Template Used - if this option is Point Id’s will be based on this new
Auto Log Pos - Displays the Id selected an automatically Template. If you select Change to
template selected for use with auto- incremented Point Id of the last Indiv. and then enter a Point Id
matically recorded points. entered Point Id will be displayed in manually in the Survey panel the
the Survey panel. If you overtype this Point Id will return to the Id Template
Select the template that you wish to Point Id the auto increment will start as it is defined.
use. from the new Point Id.
Id - Displays the way in which the Cursor Pos - Defines the position at
template is currently configured. You which the cursor will start at.
may also enter any standard text here Press CONT (F1) until you return to
that you would like to see in the Id the CONFIGURE\ Id Templates
Template. (In this example the screen.
standard text is the word “Point”. The
# symbols indicate automatically Further options are available on this
incrementing numbers). screen in Advanced mode. See
Num Start - Defines the start position
of any automatically incrementing
number.
Num End - Defines the end position

of any automatically incrementing
numbers.
Auto Inc - Defines whether the

number will increment automatically
at subsequent points.
Num Inc defines the amount by

which any automatically incrementing
number will increment.

Working Example 1
Requirement - You are completing a survey where you will require many different point IDs. Most point IDs will
need an incrementing number behind the text. The first points you measure will need the point ID
“Bolt ###”.
Settings - In CONFIG\ OCUPY Pts set up a point ID template

as shown here.
Note that the Id type is set to “Remain Running”.
automatically show the Point Id “Bolt 001” upon
pressing STORE, the next Point Id will automatically
show “Bolt 002”.

Field Proc You now wish to survey points with the Id

(cont) - “Road####” starting with Id “Road0723”. Enter this
point Id into Survey panel. The next point Id will
automatically be “Road0724”.
You now wish to survey one individual point and give

it the point ID “BM98”. In the Survey panel, press
SHIFT and then INDIV (F5) and enter this point Id.
Survey this point and upon pressing STORE, the

next point Id will revert back to “Road0724”.
Note: Should you wish to store any new point Id as a template into the “library” then access the
CONFIGURE\ ID Templates panel (CONFIG, 1 Survey, 5 Point Id Templates) and then press
CONT (F1). The point Id currently in use is now stored as a template.

Working Example 2
Requirement - You are completing a survey where you need only one point ID that needs an incrementing number
behind the text. These points will need the point ID “Point####”. However you will also survey
some individual points that will need unique point Ids.
Settings - In CONFIG\ OCUPY Pts set up a point ID

template as shown here.
Note that the Id type is set to “Change to Indiv.”.
automatically show the Point Id “Point0001”. Upon
pressing STORE, the next Point Id will
automatically show “Point0002”.

Field Proc You now wish to survey one individual point and give
(cont) - it the point ID “BM98”. In the Survey panel, enter this
point ID. Survey this point and upon pressing
STORE, the next point Id will revert back to
“Point0002”.
Note - When entering the individual point Id “BM98”

you did not need to press SHIFT INDIV (F5) as in
Working Example 1. This is because the “Point####”
template is operating in the Change to Individual
mode.
Suppose you do now wish to survey points using a

new point Id “###Fence” and you wish this template
to operate in the Remain Running mode.
Enter the point Id “001Fence” and then press SHIFT

RUN (F5). Occupy and store this point. The next
point Id will be “002Fence”
Note: Numerical characters in front of any text will also increment. This allows any type of
incrementing point Ids to be created.

Threshold Settings Avg. Limits Pos - Only available if Monitor CQ - Allows to check the
Avg is selected. Sets the averaging quality (CQ) of a point before it is
These settings are used as checks if limit for position. When two or more stored. It is possible to choose to set
more than one set of measured coordinates are recorded for the a Pos only, Height only, Pos +
coordinates are recorded for the same point, the system will compute Height CQ limit or no limit at all
same point. an average for the positions and (None).
check that each position does not
differ from the average by more than Quality - Sets the value for Monitor
the defined amount. If they do differ CQ.
by more than the defined amount, you
will be alerted and can then decide
whether to raise the averaging limits
and record the coordinates or to
ignore the coordinates.
Avg/Abs Diffs - A check can either be
defined as an averaging functionality or Avg. Limits Height. - Only available
as an absolute coordinate difference if Avg is selected. Sets the averaging
for X, Y, Z and E, N, H (with local limit for height. The system will
coordinate system). Avg is the default compute an average for the heights
option. When selecting Abs, the and check that each height does not
average position is still calculated. differ from the average by more than
the defined amount. If they do differ
Regardless of whether Avg or Abs is by more than the defined amount, you
selected, points with more than one will be alerted and can then decide
associated measured point will still be whether to raise the averaging limits
shown as average in Point and record the coordinates or to
Management. ignore the coordinates.
If Abs is chosen then the Avg. Limits Stakeout Store → Job - Appears when ASCII
Pos and Avg. Limits Height are not File is selected in Stake from. This
shown but the ABS (F6) key be- parameter takes the original ASCII
comes available. coordinate and stores it in the Job,
together with the staked point. This is
useful when comparing design points
to actually staked points.
Show Path - Will display a track on

Stake from - Sets the source from the graphics screen of your previous
which target points will be taken. Job positions when set to Yes.
Press ABS (F6) to set the limits for means that the Rover will look for
the absolute position difference in E, target points from a Job that you use. Def. Orient - Defines the default
N, H and X, Y, Z. ASCII File means that you can stake orientation direction for stake out.
out using an ASCII file. The ASCII file This is the direction from which
may be uploaded to the Receiver bearings or offsets will be taken. Note
using SKI Pro or by copying the ASCII that this is the default orientation. A
file onto a PC Card and using the different orientation may always be
Transfer function. Alternatively use defined when running Stakeout.
the ASCII / GSI to Job converter and
use Stake from Job. See section 13.6 The options are:
for more information. North - orient towards north.
Press DEFLT (F5) to set the default Sun - the sun is used as the orienta-
value of 0.07 m in all lines. tion direction. System 500 can calcu-
late the position of the sun for any
Press CONT (F1) to continue. time and location on the earth’s
surface.
Last Point - Use the last recorded This functionality will make the When ASCII File is selected in Stake
point. system automatically display the from, the ASCII (F4) key becomes
Known Point - Use any point in the differences if the defined Limit is available. Use this to define the
job. The point can be defined when exceeded. format of the ASCII file.
running Stakeout.
Line - Orient parallel to any line Use DTM - Appears when the DTM
defined in the current job. The line Stakeout option has been purchased
can be defined when running Stake- and enables you to use a Digital
out. Terrain Model as the height datum
Arrow - Shows an arrow on the and will show cut and fill values
graphical side of the stake-out panel. relative to the DTM. DTMs are stored
Simply walk in the direction of this on the PC card or sensor internal
arrow to find the point to be staked memory.
out.
Delimiter - Sets the character used
Use Beep - Will make the system to separate the various point compo-
beep whenever you are within the nents. Choose from Comma (,), Line
distance of the chosen target point Feed (new line), Semicolon (;), and
set in Dist from Pt. Space (blank).
Diff Check - Possible options to ID Pos - Sets the position of the Point
check the difference between the Id.
design coordinates and the staked
coordinates are by Height only,
Position only, Pos + Hgt or not to
check the difference at all (None).

East Pos - Sets the position of the
easting.
North Pos - Sets the position of the

northing.
Height Pos - Sets the position of the

height.
An example of what is selected is

displayed. Use the DEFLT (F5) key to
reset the format to its original values.
Define the delimiter used to separate
the information for each point and
then define the position of each
component of each point. An example
of what you have defined is given at
the bottom of the screen.

CONFIGURE\Stakeout screen and
CONT (F1) again to complete the
configuration.

5.4.1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Rover
The Advanced Mode contains extra Position Geoid Model - The name of the
configurable parameters that may be In addition to the functionality given in geoid model used is displayed.
required for certain specialized Standard mode, details about the
applications. chosen coordinate system are given. CSCS Model - The name of the
Select Advanced in
CONFIGURE\Operation Mode. Note that the details that are
displayed depend upon the type of
transformation used. Certain types of
transformation do not use all of the
local coordinates.
Residuals - The method by which Pressing Shift followed by FILT (F4)

residuals will be distributed will access the panel CONFIGURE\
throughout the transformation area is Filter.
Only the screens that differ from displayed.
those seen in Standard Mode are Height Smoothing - Enables you to
described here. Transform - The name of the activate or deactivate the height
transformation set used is displayed. smoothing filter. With YES, smoothing
is applied to all heights measured in
Ellipsoid - The name of the local the WGS84 or in a local coordinate
ellipsoid is displayed. system or output via NMEA. The filter
defaults are best suited for high
Projection -The name of the dynamic variations in height up to
projection used is displayed. 1 m/s as carried out by graders.

Height Smoothing and Filter techniques with kinematic GPS
Due to the nature of GPS, the height In kinematic surveys, this fact results By applying the filter, the height
is the weakest part in GPS measure- in height variations of a few centime- variations are smoothed and most of
ments. Height information can only ters as shown in the blue curve. the noise in height component is
be received from satellites above the Some GPS monitoring applications, eliminated. In the diagram below,
antenna. Signals from the satellites however, require a stabilised height. smoothed heights are shown in red.
of the other half of the orbits are
blocked off by the earth.
Therefore, the GPS heights are less
“stabilised” than the positions where
information all around the horizon is
available.

Real-Time The observation rate is fixed at 1
second. When Radio Down is set to
Log Obs, two further options appear.
Log After - Defines the length of time

that should elapse without radio
contact before logging commences.
RTCM Versn - Choose between
For minimum - Defines the length of RTCM v2.1 and v2.2.
Use Phase - Enables you to define
time that GPS raw data will be logged
whether or not to use the phase data
for after an interruption is detected. #Bits/Byte - Choose between 6 and
broadcast from the reference station.
Even if radio contact is re- 8 bits per byte.
For normal centimeter level Real-
established, raw data logging will
Time surveying this will be set to
continue for the specified time. Change Ref Net to YES if corrections
YES.
for a virtual reference shall be used.
If radio contact is lost again, these
When MaxTrak is selected Use
two options will be used to log raw Telemax - To make use of the
Phase will automatically be set to NO
data again automatically. German SAPOS reference station
and the ability to edit the Use Phase
service via Telemax, set to YES. For
option is disabled. For further
If the chosen Data Format is RTCM, more information see Appendix H.
information on MaxTrak refer to
the RTCM (F6) button is available.
chapter 9.1 Survey - Satellite.
Accountfile - Only available if
Telemax = YES. Select the
Radio Down - Enables you to log
appropriate Accountfile, which you
raw GPS data in the event that radio
have transferred to the receiver
contact is lost to the reference
before.
station.

the observables to be recorded and Auto OCUPY, Auto Stop, STOP R-
access further functionality via the TME and END Survey.
FILES (F6) key.
Log File Segments will split up the

recorded data into files of a specific
length unless 1 File is selected. If a
time is selected the option Split
if the time is reached and a new track Auto OCUPY - will automatically
Observables - Defines what is is observed. occupy the point as soon as the
recorded in the raw GPS data. survey is started. Timed is chosen for
Extended records extra observables Auto Del Log Files will delete the automatic point occupations at a
including the Doppler observable. recorded data after the specified certain time. The time is specified in
length of time unless Never is the SURVEY panel.
Pressing the FILES (F6) key enables selected.
you to configure further options. Auto Stop - will automatically stop
CONFIGURE\Logging. setting in the STOP R-TME function.
The measurements stop when the

STOP R-TME - Defines the method Auto Store - Will automatically store Id Templates
used for Auto Stop when Auto Stop is the point information and GPS data You may also configure Id Templates
set to YES. when the survey is stopped. for Auxiliary Points in exactly the
When Auto Stop is set to NO a same way as for normal points.
percentage value will be displayed END Survey - Sets how the Survey
next to the Time or Epochs in the operation will be ended. Manual lets
Main Survey screen. This indicates you exit the survey yourself. Auto-
how much of the Auto Stop criteria matic will exit the survey automati-
has elapsed. The Auto Stop criteria is cally. Auto & Shut-down will exit the
defined using the R-TME (F3) key survey and turn the sensor off.
(see below).
The criteria available to automatically

stop a real-time Rover are:
Accuracy -Stop when a specified
accuracy is reached.
Positions - Stop after a set number
of positions have been calculated.
Note that these are positions (position
recording rate) and not raw observa-
tions.
STOP&GOIndicator - Stop when the
Stop and Go Indicator has reached
100%.

Threshold Settings Hidden Point Hgt Qlty - The height quality defined
In addition to the functionality given in A hidden point is defined as a point here has to come from your own
Standard mode you can also specify that cannot be measured by GPS but knowledge or experience with the
a DOP limit. If the limit is exceeded by an external device. This is usually device you are using. System 500 will
no position will be recorded. due to satellite shading. Satellite not check any recorded
shading can be caused by the close measurements against the position
proximity of tall buildings, trees etc. and height qualities. It will however be
used in any least squares adjustment
that may be carried out later.
Press IFACE (F5) and then select

YES for Use Device to choose the
port and device to be used.
Press DOP (F3).
Include Hgt - Will compute a height
for a hidden point and include a quality
component for height difference.
Pos Qlty - The position quality

defined here has to come from your
own knowledge or experience with
Limit - Select the type of DOP limit. If the device you are using. System 500 Port - Use the right or left cursor keys
no limit shall be active select None. will not check any recorded to select the port to where the device
measurements against the position will be connected. This will normally
DOP - Enter the DOP limit value. and height qualities. It will however be be port 2.
used in any least squares adjustment
Press CONT (F1) to continue. that may be carried out later.
Pressing DEVCE (F5) allows the None - Neither instrument nor target Refer to Appendix H for a complete
device to be chosen. height is considered. The result is the list of all supported Hidden Point
delta height between the center of the devices, their configurations,
System 500 supports several devices external device and the aimed point. sketches and more information on
such as Leica Disto memo, Disto pro, This delta height can be measured, hidden points.
DistoTM pro4 and DistoTM pro4 a. All of estimated or left as zero.
them are hand held lasermeter that Inst Height - The instrument height is
can be used to record otherwise considered. If the delta height
inaccessible points. You may also use between the center of the external
a simple tape to measure to such device and the aimed point is
points and input the measurements measured or estimated, the result is
manually. the height difference between the
rover point on the ground and the
Press CONT (F1) to return to the aimed point. Enter the instrument
previous panel. height into the corresponding new
line.
Inst Height & Trgt Height -
Dist Offset - Enter a distance offset if Instrument as well as target height to
necessary. Refer to Appendix H for be considered. If the delta height
more information. between the center of the external
device and the aimed point is
Hgt Offset - Available if Include Hgt measured or estimated, the result is
in the previous panel and Use Device the ground height difference between
in the current panel are set to YES. rover and aimed point. Enter the
The options are: values in the corresponding two new
lines.

EAO (F3) allows the default method Seismic
to be set that will be used to enter an You can set whether or not to store a
External Angle Offset when seismic record with each point. If Use
measuring hidden points using a Seismic Record is set to YES,
device that measures azimuths. the seismic records for manually
occupied points are stored in point
annotation #4. The same holds true
for auto logged points as long as
Store Pt DB and Use Annot in panel
CONFIGURE\ Position Logging are
set to YES. For detailed information
see section 5.4.
The options are None, Permanent or The format for seismic records is
New For Each Point. If permanent is given in Appendix C.
chosen a default EAO can also be
entered. Press CONT (F1) to complete the
configuration.
If None is chosen it will not be
possible to enter an EAO during the
measurement of hidden points.

6. Jobs and Points 6.1 Management of Jobs
Jobs exist in order for you to be able Jobs are managed from the Job The currently available Jobs are
to structure and organize your work. option in the Main Menu. Press displayed together with the date they
They define a common location within SHOW (F4) to reveal all of the Main were created or last edited.
the System 500 file system for points. Menu choices.
Keys to help you navigate through the
All points that are recorded will be list are available by pressing SHIFT.
stored within a particular Job. This
Job may cover a whole project or part
of a larger project. It may cover
certain classes of points for a project
such as control points, detail points
etc.
Whole Jobs can then be downloaded Select Job and press ENTER.
to and uploaded from SKI Pro. Jobs
are downloaded to SKI Pro for post-
processing operations or for data
transfer to a further program (such as
a GIS). Points contained within Jobs
that are uploaded can be used for
Real-Time Stakeout operations.
A copy of the Coordinate System that

was used with the last active Job will
also be stored.
6. Jobs 156 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Creating a New Job
Press NEW (F2) to create a new Job. Device - Sets the device upon which Editing a Job
the Job is stored. Note that Internal To edit an existing Job press EDIT
Memory is not fitted as standard and (F3). The Job Name, Description,
therefore may not be an option. Creator and Device are displayed
and are available for editing.
Press CONT (F1) to confirm the entry
and return to JOB\PC-Card or Deleting a Job
JOB\Internal. To delete a Job, select the Job and
press the DEL (F4) key. You will be
asked for confirmation before the Job
Name - Defines the Job name. The is deleted. All points and data con-
name may be up to 16 characters tained in the Job will be lost.
long and may include spaces.
Selecting the Device
Description - A description of the job Jobs may be stored on the PC-Card
can be entered. This could be for or the Internal Memory if fitted. To
example, work to be performed or the change the device viewed, press the
type/class of points contained in the DEVCE (F5) key.
job. (Optional)
Creator -The name of the person that

created the job may be entered.
(Optional).
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 157 6. Jobs

7. Measuring with System 500
The use of System 500 with the most common techniques
of measurement are described.
The correct Receiver must be used for the technique

chosen. An overview is given below.
Application Post-Processed Post-Processed Post-Processed Real-Time Real-Time

Static/R. Static Kinematic (Static Kinematic on DGPS (1-5 m) RTK (1-5cm)
Post-Processed Initialisation) the Fly
Kinematic
Reference
SR510 ✓ ✓
SR520 ✓ ✓ ✓
SR510 with
RTCM2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
option
SR520 with
RTCM2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
option
SR530 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7. Measuring with System 500 158 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

7.1 Static and Rapid Static Survey, Post-Processed Kinematic Reference
Set up the equipment as described in Coord Sys - Displays the coordinate
Chapter 2. Attach the Terminal. system that will be used for the
display of coordinates. For post-
Switch on. The Main Menu will be processed work, this will normally be
displayed. The system will WGS84
automatically start searching for
satellites. Antenna - Defines the Antenna setup
to be used. The Setup defined in the
Select Survey and press CONT (F1). Configuration Set will be taken by
default although any other setup may
be selected. For post-processed
Static/Rapid Static or Kinematic
Reference work, this will normally be
AT501/502 Tripod.
Press CONT (F1) when you have

made your selection.
Config Set - Defines the

Configuration Set to be used. The last
Configuration Set used or created will
be taken by default although any
other Configuration Set may be
selected.
Job - Defines the Job to be used.
This is the Job where any point and
observation data will be stored.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 159 7. Measuring with System 500

7.1.1 Overview of Procedure 7.1.2 Adding the Point Id
The Main Survey Panel appears. The Moving Icon is displayed at this
point. This indicates that the Antenna
can be moved around and that no
Static Observations are being
recorded.
Use the OCUPY (F1) key to start data

recording. The icon changes to a
tripod, indicating that the Receiver The Point Id is an identifier for a
should remain stationary. particular point. It also collates all
From here you can add Point Id, and measurements made on that point
Antenna Height and observe the Press STOP (F1) when you have and all other associated data such as
DOP. enough data and STORE (F1) to codes, point annotations and
record the point information. meteorological data.
If configured, you will also be able to
add a Code. The ADD (F5) key is available in If a point Id template has been
Advanced mode and is explained in configured in the Configuration Set, a
If configured, you will also be able to section 7.1.7. Point Id will be suggested. You can
enter a start time for the point overwrite this with a different Id if
occupation. Further details about this procedure required.
are given in the sections that follow.
As soon as the receiver has enough If no point Id is suggested then enter
information, the DOP will be a point Id. By default if the point Id
displayed. contains any numerical values, these
will be incremented by 1.

7.1.3 Adding the Antenna Height 7.1.4 Adding a Code
To break the auto numbering press It will be possible to add a code to a

Shift INDIV (F5) and enter an indi- point if a coding system has been
vidual Point Id. After this point has defined for use in the Configuration
been stored it will return to the previ- Set.
ously suggested Point Id.
System 500 supports two coding
If you define a Point Id Template in methods; Thematical Coding and
the Configuration Set you have even Free Coding. Both methods of coding
more flexibility to automatically define Measure the Antenna Height. When are explained in Chapter 8.
your Point Id’s. using a Tripod this will be measured
using the Height Hook. When
Further information about Point Id mounted on a pillar, you must use Thematical Coding
Templates and two working examples some other way of measuring the
are given in Chapter 5.2. height. Enter the value in Ant Height.
Further details on measuring the

Antenna height can be found in
section 2.15.
The fields Point Code and Code

Name will be displayed as above.
Highlight the Point Code and either:
1. Use the left or right cursor keys to

cycle through the code list.
or

2. Press ENTER and select the code Free Coding or
from the list. 2. Press ENTER and select the code
or from the list.
3. Type in the first few characters of or
the code until the desired code is 3. Type in the first few characters of
displayed. the code until the desired code is
displayed.
The Code Name will be displayed for
the Point Code that you have cho-
sen. Enter any attributes for the code The Last Code and second last code
using the ATRIB (F4) key. (2Last Code) that were used are
shown.
The code is stored along with the
Point Id information. The CODE (F4) key will be available.
Press this key to access the codelist.
An asterisk next to a code indicates

that it has attributes.
Press CONT (F1) to select the code.
Further information about Coding

Systems is available in Section 8.
To select the code:

7.1.5 Adding a Starting Time 7.1.6 Measuring procedure
It will be possible to add a starting Initially, the time displayed in Start Measuring procedure without
time for a point occupation if auto Time is the current time with the starting time
occupy has been set to Timed in the seconds rounded to zero. Press the OCUPY (F1) key to begin
Occupation Settings of the recording observations. The icon
Configuration Set. Enter the time in Start Time in changes to a tripod, indicating that
hours:minutes:seconds. the Receiver should remain
stationary.
Static Obs/Time - The method by

which you have selected to count
time will be shown. In Advanced
mode, you may select to display the
amount of data required according to
one of four criteria. If this has been
set, a percentage value will be shown
next to the expired Epochs/Time.

This percentage value is the amount Press STORE (F1) to store the Point Measuring procedure with starting
of data recorded with 100% being the Id and any Thematical Code that you time
amount required. If Auto Stop was may have assigned. If Auto Store has After entering a point ID, the antenna
selected, the recording of been set in the Configuration, this will height and a start time, press the
observations will automatically stop happen automatically. OCUPY (F1) key.
when 100% is reached.
Leave the survey by pressing SHIFT
The ADD (F5) key is available. followed by QUIT (F6). To switch off,
Further information is available in the press the ON/OFF key on the
next section. terminal.
Further information about the Stop

and Go indicator, satellites tracked,
data logged etc. can be accessed
through the STATUS key. More The line Start Time changes to Time
information about this key is given in to go. The time before the
Chapter 10. measurement starts automatically is
displayed in hours:minutes:seconds
When the required length of time has and is counted down.
passed, press the STOP (F1) key to
stop raw observation recording. If Once the entered start time is
Auto Stop has been set in the reached, the measurement beginns.
Configuration, this will happen The icon changes to a tripod,
automatically. indicating that the Receiver should
remain stationary.

The ADD (F5) key is available. Once the point is stored, again the
Further information is available in the OCUPY (F1) key becomes available
next section. and the start time line is shown with
the current time and the seconds
Further information about the Stop rounded to zero. To start a new
and Go indicator, satellites tracked, occupation enter the next start time.
data logged etc. can be accessed Then press OCUPY (F1).
through the STATUS key. More
The line Time to go changes to information about this key is given in Leave the survey by pressing SHIFT
Static Obs/Time. Chapter 10. followed by QUIT (F6). To switch off,
press the ON/OFF key on the
Static Obs/Time - The method by When the required length of time has terminal.
which you have selected to count passed, press the STOP (F1) key to
time will be shown. In Advanced stop raw observation recording. If
mode, you may select to display the Auto Stop has been set in the
amount of data required according to Configuration, this will happen
one of four criteria. If this has been automatically.
set, a percentage value will be shown
next to the expired Epochs/Time. Press STORE (F1) to store the Point
This percentage value is the amount Id and any Thematical Code that you
of data recorded with 100% being the may have assigned. If Auto Store has
amount required. If Auto Stop was been set in the Configuration, this will
selected, the recording of happen automatically.
observations will automatically stop
when 100% is reached.

7.1.7 Using the ADD key
When the Advanced Mode is Adding Point Annotations Adding Meteorological Data
selected, the ADD (F5) key is Point Annotations may be used as an Meteorological data may be required
available. electronic notepad where events, when very precise work is being
notes etc. may be written. They are carried out or when very different
This key can be used to add Point then taken with the Point Id weather conditions exist between the
Annotations, and Meteorological information into SKI-Pro. Rover and Reference. This data will
Data. not be used by SKI-Pro but may be
To add Point Annotations, select exported in RINEX format from SKI-
Point Annotations from the list and Pro and used in a scientific
press CONT (F1). processing software that accepts
meteorological data for tropospheric
modelling.
Select Meteorological Data from the

list and press CONT (F1).
Press ADD (F5)
You may type in 4 notes with up to 26

characters in each note. Press CONT
(F1) when you are finished.
Press CLEAR (F6) to delete the

content of all fields.

7.2 Post-processed Kinematic Survey (Rover)
Enter the data and press STORE Set up the equipment as described in Coord Sys - Displays the coordinate
(F1). The data will be stored with a Chapter 2. Attach the Terminal. system that will be used for the
time tag. During long observation display of coordinates. For post-
periods you may need to store Switch on. The Main Menu will be processed work, this will normally be
several sets of meteorological data as displayed. The system will WGS84.
the weather changes. automatically start searching for
satellites. Antenna - Defines the Antenna setup
Select Survey and press CONT (F1). Configuration Set will be taken by
be selected. For post-processed
Kinematic work, this will normally be
AT501/502 Pole.
Press CONT (F1) when you have

made your selection.
Config Set - Defines the

Configuration Set to be used. The last
Configuration Set used or created will
be taken by default although any
other Configuration Set may be
selected.

The Main Survey screen appears. This will always be the case when
using a SR510. SR520 and SR530
users may set the static initialization
parameter to NO and perform
initialization on the fly.
Further details about this procedure

are given in the sections that follow.
The Point Id is an identifier for a
particular point. It also collates all
From here you can add Point Id, measurements made on that point
Code, Antenna Height and observe and all other associated data such as
the DOP. codes, point annotations and
meteorological data.
If configured, you will also be able to
enter a start time for the point If a point Id template has been
occupation. configured in the Configuration Set, a
Point Id will be suggested. You can
As soon as the receiver has enough overwrite this with a different Id if
information, the DOP will be required.
displayed.
If no point Id is suggested then enter
The PP_KIS default post-processed a point Id. By default if the point Id
kinematic configuration set is defined contains any numerical values, these
such that you must perform a static will be incremented by 1.
initialization.

7.2.3 Adding the Antenna Height
To break the auto numbering press The only time when the Antenna
Shift INDIV (F5) and enter an height will not remain constant is
individual Point Id. After this point has when a Static Initialization is carried
been stored it will return to the out on a Tripod and the Antenna is
previously suggested Point Id. then transferred onto a pole. In this
case, measure the Antenna height on
If you define a Point Id Template in the Tripod, add the offset (with a
the Configuration Set you have even height hook this is 0.36m) and enter
more flexibility to automatically define Usually, in post-processed kinematic it. Then, after pressing STOP (F1) to
your Point Id’s. surveys the Antenna will be mounted finish the initialization, the Moving
on a pole and therefore the height will Antenna height specified in the
Further information about Point Id remain constant. When an AT501/502 Configuration Set will be used for the
Templates and two working examples Antenna is used together with a moving part of the Kinematic chain.
are given in Chapter 5.2. System 500 pole, the Antenna Height
is 2.00m. This may have been
specified as the default height in the
Configuration Set.
Otherwise, measure the Antenna

height and enter it.

7.2.4 Adding a Code
It will be possible to add a code to a or Free Coding

point if a coding system has been 2. Press ENTER and select the code
defined for use in the Configuration from the list.
Set. or
3. Type in the first few characters of
System 500 supports two coding the code until the desired code is
methods; Thematical Coding and displayed.
Free Coding. The principles of both
methods of coding are explained in The Code Name will be displayed for
Chapter 8. the Point Code that you have The Last Code and second last code
chosen. Enter any attributes for the (2Last Code) that were used are
Thematical Coding code using the ATRIB (F4) key. shown.
The code is stored along with the The CODE (F4) key will be available.
Point Id information. Press this key to access the codelist.



7.2.5 Adding a Starting Time
To select the code: It will be possible to add a starting Initially, the time displayed in Start
1. Use the left or right cursor keys to time for a point occupation if auto Time is the current time with the
cycle through the code list. occupy has been set to Timed in the seconds rounded to zero.
or Occupation Settings of the
2. Press ENTER and select the code Configuration Set. Enter the time in Start Time in
from the list. hours:minutes:seconds.
or
the code until the desired code is
displayed.
An asterisk next to a code indicates



7.2.6 Measuring Procedure
The exact measuring procedure Measuring with Static Initialization As soon as this key is pressed the
varies depending upon which without starting time moving part of the chain will begin
Receiver you are using and the If you have selected to perform a and observations recorded at the
Configuration Set. static initialization, press OCUPY (F1) predefined rate. You may move along
as soon as you are ready. The static the course you wish to record.
When using an SR510, you must initialization will begin. The Receiver
perform a Static Initialization before needs to be kept perfectly steady When carrying out a post-processed
commencing the moving part of the during this time. For this reason, it is kinematic survey where a static
survey. The option to do this is advised to use a quickstand or to initialization has been performed, the
activated in the Configuration Set. mount the sensor on a tripod for the Receiver will automatically monitor
When using a SR520 or SR530, you initialization period. the number of satellites tracked. If at
may also perform a Static Initialization any time this number falls below 4,
if required although there is not The initialization may be thought of as observation recording will stop and a
strictly any need to do so. When a Rapid Static point. You will need to message will show on the screen
using the SR520 and SR530, the measure for several minutes, the informing you that the satellite count
normal way to work will be to initialize exact time being determined by the has fallen below 4 and you must
on the fly. No Static Initialization is baseline length (distance between reinitialize. You must then perform the
then required. rover and reference). The exact time static initialization again.
required may be shown using the
Stop and Go Indicator.
You may configure this to be shown in

the Main Survey panel and may also
access it through the STATUS key.
The moving part of the chain will not
begin until you have completed the
initialization and pressed STOP (F1).
Initialization on the Fly without Initialization and point recording
starting time with starting time
This is the method that will be After entering a point ID, the antenna
preferred by SR520 and SR530 height and a start time, press the
users. No Static Initialization is OCUPY (F1) key.
required. Observations will be
recorded as soon as CONT (F1) in
the SURVEY\Begin screen is The line Time to go changes to
pressed. Static Obs/Time.
When the required length of time has

Recording Distinct Points without passed, press the STOP (F1) key to
starting time stop raw observation recording. If
To record distinct points within the Auto Stop has been set in the
moving part of the kinematic chain Configuration, this will happen
(whether a static initialization has automatically.
been performed or not), occupy the The line Start Time changes to Time
point, level the pole and press to go. The time before the
measurement starts automatically is Press STORE (F1) to store the Point
OCUPY (F1). The point will be Id and any Thematical Code that you
recorded in accordance with what has displayed in hours:minutes:seconds
and is counted down. may have assigned. If Auto Store has
been defined in the Configuration Set. been set in the Configuration, this will
Check the Point Id and Antenna happen automatically.
Height. Add a code if required. Press Once the entered start time is
STOP (F1) followed by STORE (F1) reached, the measurement beginns.
to store the point.

7.2.7 Using the AUTO key 7.2.8 Using the ADD key
Once the point is stored, again the If Log Auto Positions is set to YES When the Advanced Mode is
OCUPY (F1) key becomes available in the CONFIGURE\ Logging screen selected, the ADD (F5) key is
and the start time line is shown with the Auto (F3) key is available in the available.
the current time and the seconds main Survey screen.
rounded to zero.
To start a new occupation - either the

first point recording after initialization
or a subsequent point recording -
enter the next start time. Then press
OCUPY (F1).
Auto (F3) can be used to switch to This key can be used to add Point
the mode for measuring Auto- Annotations, Meteorological Data and
Positions in the Auto-Pos panel. Hidden Points.
This functionality is mostly used in Press ADD (F5).

Real-Time Rover operations. For
details on measuring Auto-Positions
refer to chapter 7.4.7 Using the
AUTO key in Real-Time Rover
measurement procedures.

Adding Point Annotations Adding Meteorological Data
Point Annotations may be used as an Meteorological data may be required
electronic notepad where events, when very precise work is being
then taken with the Point Id weather conditions exist between the
information into SKI-Pro. Point Rover and Reference. When carrying
Annotations may only be added when out post-processed kinematic work, it
a distinct point is being recorded. only makes sense to input
meteorological data at distinct points, Enter the data and press STORE
To add Point Annotations, select (not during the moving parts). This (F1). The data will be stored with a
Point Annotations from the list and data will not be used by SKI-Pro but time tag. During long observation
press CONT (F1). may be exported in RINEX format periods you may need to store
from SKI-Pro and used in a scientific several sets of meteorological data as
processing software that accepts the weather changes.
modelling.

You may type in 4 notes with up to 26

(F1) when you are finished.


7.3 Real-Time Reference Stations
This chapter assumes that you will Config Set - Defines the Configura- Antenna - Defines the Antenna setup
use the default Real-Time Reference tion Set to be used. The last Configu- to be used. The Setup defined in the
File. ration Set used or created will be Configuration Set will be taken by
taken by default although any other default although any other setup may
Set up the equipment as described in Configuration Set may be selected. be selected. For Real-Time Refer-
Chapter 2. Attach the Terminal, but ence Stations, this will normally be
only attach the radio modem if you Job - Defines the Job to be used. AT501/502 Tripod.
are sure that the port is correctly This is the Job where any point and
configured. Attaching a radio modem observation data will be stored. Press CONT (F1) when you have
to an incorrectly configured port may made your selection.
result in damage to the radio modem. Coord Sys - Displays the coordinate
system that will be used for the
Switch on. The Main Menu will be display of coordinates. This coordi-
displayed. The system will automati- nate system is attached to the se-
cally start searching for satellites. lected Job. Press CSYS (F6) to
change the Coordinate System.
Select Survey and press CONT (F1). Information on determining the
coordinate system is given in section
11.1.

7.3.1 Measuring procedure
Using a known point Using the last used Reference

Select a point from the drop down list Station coordinates
box. This point will have been To use the same coordinates that
previously entered into the database were used when the sensor was last
manually, from SKI Pro, or may be a used as a reference station, choose
point resulting from a previous real- LAST (F3).
time rover measurement.
When a sensor is used as a
You will need to select the way in Use the COORD (F2) key to switch reference station and is turned off, the
which you define the reference point. display between coordinate systems. reference station coordinates are
You may select either a known point stored within the System RAM. They
from the drop down list or use the Measure and input the Antenna can then be used again the next time
LAST (F3) key to use the coordinates Height (Ant Height). When using a the sensor is used as a reference
that were used when the sensor was Tripod this will be measured using the station.
last used as a reference station. Height Hook.
Alternatively, use the HERE (F4) key This means that even if the PC card
to select the present navigation Further details on measuring the that previously contained the
position or use the Single Point Antenna height can be found in reference station coordinates is
Positioning SPP (F6) feature to section 2.15. formatted, the last used coordinates
determine the reference point. can still be used.

Using the current Navigation Using Single Point Position (SPP)
Position A SPP is where the GPS code
To use the current navigation position observations for a single point are
as the coordinates for the reference collected over a period of time and
point, press the HERE (F4) key. refined into a position that is generally
more accurate than a navigated
position.
Measure and input the Antenna To activate the Single Point position-
Height (Ant Height). When using a ing, press SPP (F6).
Tripod this will be measured using the
Height Hook.
Further details on measuring the

The current navigation position will be Antenna height can be found in
taken. Input the Point Id and press section 2.15.
STORE (F1). The point will be added
to the database and will be taken over The navigated position is normally
into the Main Survey screen. used in preference to the Single Point
Position (SPP) if there is no previ- The suggested Point Id is automati-
ously measured point available and cally created based on the Time and
the baseline between Reference and Date Point Id Template. It may if
Rover is 5km or less. In situations required be overwritten. The Time
where the baseline is greater than and Date Point Id Template follows
10km, it is probably better to use the following format:
SPP.

RRRRMMDD_HHMMSSS either there is no previously
measured point available and the
Where: baseline distance from the reference
RRRR = last four numbers of to the rover exceeds 10km.
Receiver serial number.
MM = month The HERE and SPP methods are
DD = Day only suitable for use at the start of a
HH = Hour project. On subsequent days,
MM = Minutes The occupation will run for the length reference station coordinates should
SSS = seconds to 1 decimal of time specified. After this time, the be the results of the previous days
place. point will be automatically recorded work!
and the Main Survey screen will be
Input the length of time over which shown. Alternatively, if you wish to cut When the reference point has been
the single point should be processed. the single point processing short, defined and the Main Survey panel is
The longer the time, the more press STOP (F1). shown, there is little more to be done.
accurate the single point. A good Data will be transmitted and, if so
compromise is 20 minutes. As soon as the Main Survey screen is configured, will also be recorded.
shown, observation data will be
Press OCUPY (F1) to begin the broadcast. Up to this point, only Point If working in Advanced mode, you
single point occupation. Id and battery status etc. will be may use the ADD (F5) key to add
broadcast. Point Annotations or Meteorological
data.
Single Point Processing is generally
used in preference to the navigation To shut the Receiver down, press
position as a means of defining STOP (F1) and then switch OFF. The
reference station coordinates when store function is executed
automatically.
When the Advanced Mode is se- used in a scientific processing

lected, the ADD (F5) key is available. software that accepts meteorological
data for tropospheric modelling.

This key can be used to add Meteo-

rological Data.
Press ADD (F5), followed by CONT

(F1) Enter the data and press STORE
(F1). The data will be stored with a
Meteorological data may be required time tag. During long observation
when very precise work is being periods you may need to store
carried out and/or when very different several sets of meteorological data as
weather conditions exist between the the weather changes.
Rover and Reference. This should
only be used when recording data for
post-processing. This data will not be
used by SKI-Pro but may be exported
in RINEX format from SKI-Pro and

7.4 Real-Time Rover, Surveying New Points
Set up the equipment as described in Coord Sys - Displays the coordinate
Chapter 2. Attach the Terminal. system that will be used for the
display of coordinates. For this type of
Switch on. The Main Menu will be work, a local coordinate system
displayed. The system will automati- should be used although this is not
cally start searching for satellites. strictly essential. Press CSYS (F6) to
change the Coordinate System.
Select Survey and press CONT (F1). Information on determining the
coordinate system is given in section
11.1.
Antenna - Defines the Antenna setup

Configuration Set will be taken by
be selected. For Real-Time Rover
work, this will normally be AT501/502
Config Set - Defines the Configura- Pole.
tion Set to be used. The last Configu-
ration Set used or created will be Press CONT (F1) when you have
taken by default although any other made your selection.
Configuration Set may be selected.


As soon as data is received from the Then press the OCUPY (F1) key.
Reference, and the Rover itself is
tracking sufficient satellites, the Then according to what has been set
ambiguity resolution process will in the Occupation Settings, press
begin. This processes the data and STOP (F1) and STORE (F1).
calculates the baseline from Refer-
ence to Rover to within 1-5 cm. When working with DGPS (code only)
corrections, the accuracy will be
When the ambiguities are resolved, around 0.5-5m. Ambiguity resolution The Point Id is an identifier for a
the Accuracy Status Icon will show will not be attempted. The Accuracy particular point. It also collates all
the position to be between 1 and Status Icon will show between 0.5 measurements made on that point
5cm. and 5m and all other associated data such as
codes, point annotations and meteo-
Additionally, the Coordinate Quality The Coordinate Quality (Quality) in rological data.
(Quality) in the Main Survey screen the Main Survey screen should show
should show between 0.01 and 0.05. between 0.5 and 5.0. If a point Id template has been
configured in the Configuration Set, a
To record a point, place and level the Raw GPS observation data may be Point Id will be suggested. You can
pole, Input the Point Id and Code (if logged during the Real-Time survey overwrite this with a different Id if
required). If configured, you will also with no change to the procedure. required.
be able to enter a start time for the
point occupation. If working in Ad- If no point Id is suggested then enter
vanced mode, use the ADD key to a point Id. By default if the point Id
add point annotations and/or hidden contains any numerical values, these
points. will be incremented by 1.

7.4.3 Adding the Antenna Height
To break the auto numbering press In this case, measure the Antenna
Shift INDIV (F5) and enter an height on the Tripod and enter it.
individual Point Id. After this point has Then, after pressing STOP (F1) to
been stored it will return to the finish the initialization, the Moving
previously suggested Point Id. Antenna height specified in the
Configuration Set will be used for the
If you define a Point Id Template in moving part of the Real-Time Rover
the Configuration Set you have even work.
more flexibility to automatically define Usually, in Real-Time Rover surveys
your Point Id’s. the Antenna will be mounted on a It will be possible to add a code if a
pole and therefore will remain coding system has been defined in
Further information about Point Id constant. When an AT501/502 the Configuration Set.
Templates and two working examples Antenna is used together with a
are given in Chapter 5.2. System 500 pole, the Antenna Height
is 2.00m. This may have been
specified as the default height in the
Configuration Set.
Otherwise, measure the Antenna

height and enter it.
The only time when the Antenna

height will not remain constant is
when a Static Initialization is carried
out on a Tripod and the Antenna is
then transferred onto a pole.

7.4.4 Adding a Code
It will be possible to add a code to a 1. Use the left or right cursor keys to Free Coding
point if a coding system has been cycle through the code list.
defined for use in the Configuration or
Set. 2. Press ENTER and select the code
from the list.
System 500 supports two coding or
methods; Thematical Coding and 3. Type in the first few characters of
Free Coding. The principles of both the code until the desired code is
methods of coding are explained in displayed.
Chapter 8. The Last Code and second last
The Code Name will be displayed for code (2Last Code) that were used
the Point Code that you have are shown.
Thematical Coding chosen. Enter any attributes for the
code using the ATRIB (F4) key. The CODE (F4) key will be available.
Press this key to access the codelist.
The code is stored then along with
the Point Id information.
Auto-logged points may also be

coded if a coding system has been
defined. The procedure will be the
The fields Point Code and Code same as with Occupy Points
Name will be displayed as above. described above.
For further information on how to use
codes with Auto-logged Points refer
to chapter 7.4.7 Using the AUTO key.
7.4.5 Adding a Starting Time
To select the code: Auto-logged points may also be free- It will be possible to add a starting
1. Use the left or right cursor keys to coded if a corresponding coding time for a point occupation if auto
cycle through the code list. system has been defined. The occupy has been set to Timed in the
or procedure will be the same as with Occupation Settings of the
2. Press ENTER and select the code Occupy Points described above. Configuration Set.
from the list.
or For further information on how to
3. Type in the first few characters of free-code Auto-logged points refer to
the code until the desired code is chapter 7.4.7 Using the AUTO key.
displayed.
Initially, the time displayed in Start

Time is the current time with the
seconds rounded to zero.
Enter the time in Start Time in

An asterisk next to a code indicates hours:minutes:seconds.


7.4.6 Measurement Procedure
Measuring procedure without Note that if code only measurements The Accuracy Status Icon will be
starting time are being used, the ambiguity displayed as follows:
Switch on the instrument. Select resolution process is not required and
Survey. Select a Real-Time Rover therefore will not start.
Configuration Set in which auto
occupy has not been set to Timed in The ambiguity resolution process will
the Occupation Settings. run. When the ambiguities are Additionally, the Coordinate Quality
resolved, the baseline from the should show between 0.01 and 0.05.
During this time, the unit should Reference to the Rover is calculated
acquire satellites and should pick up to between 1-5cm.
the signal from the Reference.
When enough of the same satellites

are tracked simultaneously at the
Rover and Reference and the signal
from the Reference is received, the
Receiver will automatically start the To record a point, place and level the
ambiguity resolution process. pole. Input information such as Point
Id and Code (if required). If working in
Advanced mode, use the ADD (F5)
key to add point annotations. Press
the OCUPY (F1) key.
Then, according to what has been set

in Occupation Settings, press STOP
(F1) and STORE (F1).

Measuring procedure with starting The ambiguity resolution process will The line Start Time changes to
time run. When the ambiguities are Time to go.
Switch on the instrument. Select resolved, the baseline from the The time before the measurement
Survey. Select a Real-Time Rover Reference to the Rover is calculated starts automatically is displayed in
Configuration Set in which auto to between 1-5cm. hours:minutes:seconds and is
occupy has been set to Timed in the counted down.
Occupation Settings. The Accuracy Status Icon will be
displayed as follows: Once the entered start time is
During this time, the unit should reached, the measurement beginns.
acquire satellites and should pick up The icon changes to a tripod,
the signal from the Reference. indicating that the Receiver should
Additionally, the Coordinate Quality remain stationary.
When enough of the same satellites should show between 0.01 and 0.05.
are tracked simultaneously at the To record a point, place and level the
Rover and Reference and the signal pole. Input information such as Point
from the Reference is received, the Id, Code (if required) and start time. If
Receiver will automatically start the working in Advanced mode, use the
ambiguity resolution process. ADD (F5) key to add point
annotations. Press the OCUPY (F1)
Note that if code only measurements key.
are being used, the ambiguity
resolution process is not required and
therefore will not start.

The line Time to go changes to Averaging Procedure The intervals are displayed with time
depending to the OCCUPY counter Whenever more than one coordinate when they were recorded, and the
set Positions / Time at point. for the same point is recorded, the differences in position and height.
system does the following:
Then, according to what has been set
in Occupation Settings, press STOP In any case, it carries out an
(F1) and STORE (F1). averaging procedure.
Once the point is stored, again the Depending on the Threshhold

OCUPY (F1) key becomes available Settings, either the difference
and the start time line is shown with between the average and the
the current time and the seconds individual point coordinates or the Should a point fall outside of these
rounded to zero. To start a new absolute coordinate differences threshold settings, this panel will be
occupation enter the next start time. between two points in X, Y, Z and E, accessed automatically. The asterisk
Then press OCUPY (F1). N, H (with local coordinate system) marks the measurement exceeding
can be displayed. Limits for the the threshold settings. Common
averaging procedure as well as for reasons for this happening are an
the absolute coordinate differences incorrect antenna height or a wrong
are also set in Threshold Settings. point Id.
Should a point fall within these You may either:

threshold settings and the system is Press ESC to return to the survey
set to the averaging functionality, you screen, check and correct the
may press AVRG (F2) to display the antenna height or point Id, then
differences between the average and rerecord the interval. Your previous,
the individual point coordinates. incorrect interval will be deleted.

or Should a point fall within the threshold You may either:
Highlight the interval that is incorrect settings and the system is set to Press ESC to return to the survey
and press USE (F2) to deselect the absolute coordinate differences, you screen, check and correct the
interval. Then press CONT (F1) to may press ABS (F2). antenna height or point Id, then
return to the survey screen. rerecord the interval. Your previous,
or incorrect interval will be deleted.
Highlight the interval that is incorrect or
and press DEL (F4) to delete the Highlight an interval that is incorrect
interval.Then press CONT (F1) to and press DEL (F4) to delete the
return to the survey screen. interval. Then press CONT (F1) to
or return to the survey screen.
With INFO (F5) toggle between or
different information for each interval. The intervals are displayed with time With INFO (F5) toggle between
when they were recorded, and the different information for each interval.
coordinate quality and class. or
Highlight an interval and press USE
Should a point fall outside of these (F2) to include or exclude a
threshold settings, this panel will be measurement from calculating the
accessed automatically. Common absolute coordinate difference. An
reasons for this happening are an absolute coordinate difference can
incorrect antenna height or a wrong only be calculated between two
point Id. The use flag for this point is measurements. After having set the
then set to N for no. use flag for two measurements to Y,
press DIFF (F3) to display the
absolute coordinate differences.

7.4.7 Using the AUTO key
If Log Auto Positions is set to YES AutoPt Id – If no Auto Log Pos Point
in the CONFIGURE\ Logging screen Id template has been chosen the
the Auto (F3) key is available in the default template Time and Date will
main Survey screen. be used. Alternatively a Point Id
template may be defined (see chapter
5.4. Configuring the Receiver for
Real-Time Rover Operations).
The absolute differences for Easting,
Northing and Height can only be Mov Ant Hgt – Sets the Antenna
displayed if the survey is carried out Height when the receiver is in moving
in a local coordinate system. mode. When a standard System 500
pole setup is used, the suggested
An asterisk identifies those which default will be 2.00m.
Auto (F3) can be used to switch to
exceed the threshold settings.
the mode for measuring Auto- Quality – Displays the quality of your
Positions in the Auto-Pos panel. current position.
CONT (F1) returns you to the survey
screen.
If a coding system has been defined

for use in the Configuration Set it will
be possible to add a code to the auto-
logged point. This may be either a
thematical code or a free code.

Note that adding a code is only Free Coding with auto-logged
possible if Store Pt DB is set to YES points
in the CONFIGURE\ Position Logging
screen (see chapter 5.4). The procedure of free-coding auto-
It is also only possible to change the logged points is very similar to the
code for auto-logged points when no free-coding of Occupy Points. For
auto-logged points are being further information on coding Occupy
measured. Points see chapter 7.4.4 Adding a
The fields AutoPt Code and Code Code.
Highlighting the AutoPt Code you

may either select a code from the
Thematical Coding with auto- given codelist or enter a new code.
logged points The Code Name will be displayed for
the AutoPt Code that you have
The procedure of thematically coding chosen.Using the ATRIB (F4) key you
auto-logged points is very similar to may enter up to three attribute values The Last Code and the second last
the thematical coding of Occupy for the code. code (2Last Code) that were used
Points. For further information on are shown.
coding Occupy Points see chapter The code is stored then along with
7.4.4 Adding a Code. the AutoPt Id information. To access the codelist and enter a
different or new code press the
CODE (F4) key.

To start the logging of Auto-Points Note that the storing of Auto-Positions
press the Start (F6) key. stops as soon as OCUPY (F1) is
pressed. When STOP (F1) is pressed
to stop the measurement on the
Occupy Point the system will start
again with storing Auto-Positions. As
soon as STORE (F1) is pressed the
AUTO (F3) key becomes visible
The fields Free Code and again to enter the AUTO-POS panel.
Description will be displayed as
above. To view or change the configuration of While Auto-Positions are collected
the Auto-Position logging press the the number of Positions already
Highlighting the Free Code you may POS (F5) key, which accesses the measured will be displayed.
either select a code from the given CONFIGURE\ Position Logging
codelist or enter a new code. The panel. For further information on how
Description will be displayed for the to configure the logging of Auto-
selected Free Code. Using the NEW- Positions see chapter 5.4 Cofiguring
I (F4) key you may enter up to 20 the Receiver for Real-Time Rover
attributes (Infos) for the code. Operations.
Press STORE (F1) to record the If you also wish to measure “normal”
code. Occupy Points whilst still recording Press STOP (F6) to terminate the
auto-logged points press the SURV logging of Auto-Points.
(F3) key to move back to the main
Survey panel.

7.4.8 Using the INIT key
The INIT (F6) key shows in the main On-The-Fly - Initializes as you are
survey screen and is available in moving with the Antenna. This is the
Advanced Mode. most common and useful method and
is used automatically by default. It
may be used again here after a
successful initialization on the fly as a
quality check.
Static - Initializes using Static. The Select the method you wish to use
Antenna should be mounted either on and press CONT (F1).
the pole with a quickstand or on a
tripod. This method may be used if for When Static and On-the-Fly have
When a Real-Time Rover some reason it is proving difficult to been chosen, the initialization
Configuration Set is chosen, the initialize on the fly and no known point procedure will begin immediately.
Receiver will automatically start the is available.
initialization process as On-the-Fly as When Known Point has been
soon as the conditions are right. Known Point - Initializes on a known chosen you will be prompted to select
point. If you have a point, the the point you wish to use to initialize
INIT (F6) can be used to select the coordinates of which are already on. This point must be contained in
initialization method and also to force accurately known in position and the Job you are working in.
a new initialization. Ensure that the height, you may use it to initialize.
correct Antenna height has been This method is used when it is
entered before starting the proving difficult to initialize on the fly.
initialization.

When the Advanced Mode is Adding Point Annotations Adding Meteorological Data
selected, the ADD (F5) key is Point Annotations may be used as an Meteorological data may be required
available. electronic notepad where events, when very precise work is being
then taken with the Point Id weather conditions exist between the
information into SKI Pro. Rover and Reference. When carrying
out Real-Time Rover work, it only
To add Point Annotations, select makes sense to input meteorological
Point Annotations from the list and data when recording data for post-
press CONT (F1). processing as well as recording
points in real-time. The
meteorological data should be
This key can be used to add Point entered at distinct points, (not during
Annotations, Meteorological Data and the moving parts). This data will not
Hidden Points. be used by SKI-Pro but may be
exported in RINEX format from SKI-
Press ADD (F5) Pro and used in a scientific
processing software that accepts
You may type in 4 notes with up to 26 modelling.
(F1) when you are finished. Select Meteorological Data from the

Hidden Points
A hidden point is a point that cannot
be measured by GPS. This is
normally due to satellite shading
caused by trees overhead, the close
proximity of buildings etc. This feature
is used by Real-Time Rovers only.
Enter the data and press STORE There are two possibilities for
(F1). The data will be stored with a inputting hidden point data. You may
time tag. During long observation attach a Hidden Point device such as
periods you may need to store Leica Disto memo, Disto pro, DistoTM
several sets of meteorological data as pro4 or DistoTM pro4 a. Or you may
the weather changes. measure to the hidden point using a
tape.
When using a Hidden Point device,

remember to set the correct Port
parameters. For details refer to
Appendix H.
Having selected Hidden Point from

the ADD menu, you have 5 choices.

Bearing and Distance, height function may be used if you do not
excluded know or have no device for
determining the bearing. Select a
point that lies on the line AH (see
diagram). Occupy the point and press
BRNG (F6).
Point A - GPS point on which

bearing α is measured.
Bearing - Bearing Angle to the
Hidden Point in units configured.
Distance - Horizontal distance from
Point A to the Hidden Point in units Input a Point Id and the Direction
configured. (Toward or Away from the hidden
point). Then press OCUPY (F1) and
Use ABORT (F1) to abort the STOP (F1), STORE (F1) according to A - GPS point on which bearing α
procedure. When Point A is the Occupation Settings. The is measured
highlighted, use NEWOC (F5) to Bearing towards point H will be B -Measured Distance from
occupy that point before you start calculated using the auxiliary point A to H
measuring the hidden point. and Point A. C -Auxiliary Point (optional)
H -Hidden point
When Bearing is highlighted, the α - Measured Bearing from A to H
BRNG (F6) key is available. This

Bearing and Distance, height When working with devices without CONT (F1) to return to the previous
included inclinometer the height difference can panel.
be estimated and typed in manuallly.
If the height computation for a When Distance is highlighted, use
hidden point has been enabled Use the I/T H (F4) key to check or SLOPE (F5) to enter a slope dis-
within the configuration, the follow- enter the instrument height at the tance and either an elevation angle
ing options apply in addition to standpoint and target height. or a grade in %. External devices
those on the previous page. work here as well.
The default values as defined in the

Delta Hgt - Height difference CONT (F1) returns to the previous
configuration are displayed but can
between the center of the external panel and displays the calculated
be edited. Use the DEFLT (F5) key to
device and the aimed point. De- horizontal distance and height
reveal the default values again.
vices with inclinometer like the difference.
Laser Locator will transfer the Trgt Height will only be available if
measured height difference auto- For further information on the Hidden
the settings have been done accord-
matically into this field as long as Point application and configuration
ingly in the configuration. Otherwise,
Include Hgt in the panel CONFIG- refer to Appendix H as well as
only the instrument height will be
URE\ Hidden Point is set to YES. chapter 5.4.1.
taken into account.

Double Bearing, height excluded When Bearing is highlighted, the
BRNG (F6) key is available. This
function may be used if you do not
know or have no means of calculating
the bearing. Select a point that lies on
the line AH (see diagram). Occupy
the point and press BRNG (F6).
Point A - The point from which

Bearing A is measured.
Bearing A - Bearing Angle α to
Hidden Point in units configured.
Point B - The point from which
Bearing B is measured
Bearing B - Bearing Angle β to
Hidden Point in units configured. Input a Point Id and the Direction
(Toward or Away from the hidden
A - Point from which Bearing A is
Use ABORT (F1) to abort the point). Then press OCUPY (F1) and
measured
procedure. When Pt from is STOP (F1), STORE (F1) according to
B -Point from which Bearing B is
highlighted, use NEWOC (F5) to the Occupation Settings. The Bear-
measured
occupy the point you are currently ing will be calculated using this point
C -Auxiliary Point (optional)
at before the hidden point is mea- and the point you are measuring
D -Auxiliary Point (optional)
sured. from.
H -Hidden Point
α - Measured Bearing from A
β - Measured Bearing from B

Double Bearing, height included without inclinometer the height CONT (F1) to return to the previous
difference can be estimated and panel and continue with the
If the height computation for a typed in manuallly. calculation of the hidden point.
hidden point has been enabled
within the configuration, the Use the I/T H (F4) key to check or For further information on the Hidden
following options apply in addition to enter the instrument height at the Point application and configuration
those on the previous page. standpoints A and B and target refer to Appendix H as well as
heights. chapter 5.4.1.
Delta Hgt - Height difference The default values as defined in the

between the center of the external configuration are displayed but can
device and the aimed point. be edited. Use the DEFLT (F5) key to
Devices with inclinometer like the reveal the default values again.
Laser Locator will transfer the
measured height difference Trgt Height will only be available if
automatically into this field as long the settings have been done
as Include Hgt in the panel accordingly in the configuration.
CONFIGURE\ Hidden Point is set Otherwise, only the instrument height
to YES. When working with devices will be taken into account.

Double Distance, height Use ABORT (F1) to abort the
excluded procedure. Use NEWOC (F5) to
occupy the point you are currently at
before the hidden point is measured.
Point A - Point from which Dis-

tance A is measured.
Distance A - Horizontal distance
from Point A to the hidden point in
units configured.
Point B - Point from which Dis- A - Point from which Distance A is
tance B is measured. measured.
Distance B - Horizontal distance B -Point from which Distance B is
from Point B to the hidden point in measured.
units configured. C -Distance A
Location - Locates hidden point to D -Distance B
left or right of Line AB. AB - Line AB
L - Left of Line AB
R -Right of Line AB

Double Distance, height included When working with devices without CONT (F1) to return to the previous
inclinometer the height difference panel.
If the height computation for a can be estimated and typed in
hidden point has been enabled manuallly. When Distance A or Distance B is
within the configuration, the following highlighted, use SLOPE (F5) to
options apply in addition to those on Use the I/T H (F4) key to check or enter a slope distance and either an
the previous page. enter the instrument height at the elevation angle or a grade in %.
standpoints A and B and target
heights.
External devices work here as well.

Delta Hgt - Height difference
CONT (F1) returns to the previous
between the center of the external The default values as defined in the panel and displays the calculated
device and the aimed point. configuration are displayed but can horizontal distances and height
Devices with inclinometer like the be edited. Use the DEFLT (F5) key to differences.
Laser Locator will transfer the reveal the default values again.
measured height difference
For further information on the Hidden
automatically into this field as long Trgt Height will only be available if Point application and configuration
as Include Hgt in the panel the settings have been done refer to Appendix H as well as
CONFIGURE\ Hidden Point is set accordingly in the configuration. chapter 5.4.1.
to YES. Otherwise, only the instrument height
will be taken into account.

Chainage and Offset, height
excluded
Point A - Point A on line.

Point B - Point B on line.
Chnge from - Point from which
chainage starts.
Chainage - Distance along line
Offset - Offset from line to hidden A - GPS Point A
point. Negative value = left of line, B - GPS Point B
Positive value = right of line. C - Chainage
O - Offset
Use ABORT (F1) to abort the H - Hidden point
procedure. Use NEWOC (F5) to
occupy the point you are currently at
before the hidden point is mea-
sured.

Chainage and Offset, height When working with devices without CONT (F1) to return to the previous
excluded inclinometer the height difference can panel and continue with the calcula-
be estimated and typed in manuallly. tion of the hidden point.
If the height computation for a
hidden point has been enabled Use the I/T H (F4) key to check or For further information on the Hidden
within the configuration, the follow- enter the instrument height at the Point application and configuration
ing options apply in addition to standpoints A and B and target refer to Appendix H as well as chap-
those on the previous page. heights. ter 5.4.1.
Delta Hgt - Height difference The default values as defined in the

between the center of the external configuration are displayed but can
device and the aimed point. De- be edited. Use the DEFLT (F5) key to
vices with inclinometer like the reveal the default values again.
Laser Locator will transfer the
measured height difference auto- Trgt Height will only be available if
matically into this field as long as the settings have been done accord-
Include Hgt in the panel CONFIG- ingly in the configuration. Otherwise,
URE\ Hidden Point is set to YES. only the instrument height will be
taken into account.

Backward Bearing & Distance, Go to the Hidden Point. When Bear-
height excluded ing is highlighted, the BRNG (F6) key
is available. This function may be
used if you do not know or have no
device for determining the bearing.
Select a point that lies on the line HA
(see diagram). Occupy the point and
press BRNG (F6).
Point A - GPS point towards which

bearing α is measured.
Bearing - Bearing Angle to Point A
in units configured.
Distance - Horizontal distance from
the Hidden Point to Point A in units
configured.
Input a Point Id and the Direction
Use ABORT (F1) to abort the (Toward or Away from Point A).
procedure. When Point A is high- Then press OCUPY (F1) and STOP A - GPS point towards which
lighted, use NEWOC (F5) to occupy (F1), STORE (F1) according to the bearing α is measured
that point. Occupation Settings. The Bearing B -Measured Distance from H to A
towards Point A will be calculated C -Auxiliary Point (optional)
using the auxiliary point and Point A. H -Hidden point
α - Measured Bearing from H to A

Backward Bearing & Distance, When working with devices without CONT (F1) to return to the previous
height included inclinometer the height difference can panel.
be estimated and typed in manuallly.
If the height computation for a When Distance is highlighted, use
hidden point has been enabled Use the I/T H (F4) key to check or SLOPE (F5) to enter a slope distance
within the configuration, the enter the instrument height at the and either an elevation angle or a
following options apply in addition to standpoint and target height. grade in %. External devices work
those on the previous page. here as well.
The default values as defined in the

Delta Hgt - Height difference configuration are displayed but can CONT (F1) returns to the previous
between the center of the external be edited. Use the DEFLT (F5) key to panel and displays the calculated
device and the aimed point. reveal the default values again. horizontal distance and height
Devices with inclinometer like the difference.
Laser Locator will transfer the Trgt Height will only be available if
measured height difference the settings have been done For further information on the Hidden
automatically into this field as long accordingly in the configuration. Point application and configuration
as Include Hgt in the panel Otherwise, only the instrument height refer to Appendix H as well as
CONFIGURE\ Hidden Point is set will be taken into account. chapter 5.4.1.
to YES.

7.4.10 Using the NEAR key 7.4.11 Radio Down Infill
Search for the nearest point to the Survey the point as usual. Radio Down Infill is used when
current sensor position by pressing contact between the Reference and
SHIFT and then NEAR (F2). The Rover is lost and a Real-Time
current sensor position is the position position cannot be calculated. This
at the time when the NEAR key is option is set in the Configuration Set.
pressed.
When contact is lost, the ambiguities
will also be lost after a few seconds.
The Accuracy Status Icon will display
a navigated position (<100m).
Stop the search with ABORT (F1). The Quality will be low, (a large
number).
Once the nearest point has been
found, its point ID is automatically Raw GPS data logging will
copied into the Point ID field. automatically commence at a rate of
This can be helpful when it is 1 second after the length of time
necessary to make a second specified in the Configuration Set.
measurement of a previously
measured point. It saves having to
remember and then type in the point
ID.

Then one of three scenarios can When using Post-Processing Infill it is
ensue: useful to note the following points:
1. Contact with the Reference is 1. The Reference Station must

reestablished within the also be logging data at the same
minimum logging time specified rate or higher than the Rover.
in the Configuration Set. Logging
will carry on for this minimum 2. The data is logged as a
time and then stop. kinematic chain. Distinct points
within the chain may be logged
2. Contact with the Reference is as in a post-processed
reestablished after the minimum kinematic survey.
logging time specified in the
Configuration Set. Logging will 3. The data has to be downloaded
stop. and processed using SKI-Pro.
All of the data (Real-Time points
3. Contact with the Reference is and raw data), will be imported
not reestablished. Logging will into the same SKI-Pro Project.
continue until the survey is
ended or contact with the
Reference Station is
reestablished.

7.5 Real-Time Rover, Staking Out 7.5.1 Entering Stakeout
Stake-Out is the staking out of Switch on. The Main Menu will be From the Main Menu, select Stake-
predetermined points. These points displayed. The system will Out.
may have been surveyed earlier and automatically start searching for
uploaded through SKI Pro, may satellites. If the Receiver is already
already exist in a Job on the Receiver configured as a Real-Time Rover and
or may have been uploaded in an a signal is available from a reference
ASCII file. station, the Receiver will also
automatically start the ambiguity
System 500 offers the possibility to resolution process.
stake out points, slopes and grids.
The following screen will then appear:
Stakeout must always be performed
in Real-Time, normally using a SR530
in order that centimeter level
accuracies can be achieved.
Therefore, a Real-Time Rover type
Configuration Set should always be
used.
Set up the equipment as described in Config Set - The Configuration Set

Chapter 2. Attach the Terminal. used for the stakeout.
Stake Pts - The Job or ASCII file
used as the source for the points to
be staked. The source type can be
configured in
CONFIG\Survey\Stakeout.

7.5.2 Stake-Out Types
Store Pts - The Job where the staked A Short log file will contain the design 1. Point
points are stored. co-ordinates, the “as staked” height Simple point stakeout. Points are
Stake Type - The type of Stake-Out coordinate and the differences in defined as targets and staked from a
operation to be performed. height between the design and staked predefined list. The distance in/out
Antenna - The Antenna setup used, points. and left/right or distance and bearing
defined in the Configuration Set. You are given to the target, together with
may select a different one if required. Use ASCII (F4) - to select whether the cut/fill. Orientation can be made in
Ant Height - The default Antenna you want to stakeout from an ASCII a variety of ways including orientation
Height defined in the Configuration file or from a Job. parallel to a line.
Set. You may enter a different height For more information on staking out
if required. from an ASCII file see section 5.4. 2. Slope
Stake points along a slope. Line is
Use LOG (F3) if you want to generate selected as orientation (no points are
a report file of the staked out points. available as orientation). The cut and
Select between Short, Long or fill are relative to the slope of the line.
None. A report log-file will be stored
on the PC Card or Internal memory in 3. Grid
the ‘Log’ sub-directory. Stake points in the form of a grid
A Long log file will contain the design based on lines. A reference line is
and “as staked” co-ordinates, the defined and the grid built up using
differences in easting, northing and increments along the line and offsets.
height between the design and staked
points and the antenna height.

7.5.3 The Stake-Out Screen
When Stake-Out has been started, the following screen appears:
1
2
5
3
1. Orientation - Defines the direction 3. Range Information - The range to 4. Quality - The quality of your
on which the Range Information (3) is the currently selected point. May be current position.
based. one of two formats:
5. Graphics panel - Shows your
2. Target Point - The current point for Orthogonal - Range In/Out and current position (a cross) relative to
which the Range Information (3) is Offset Left/Right plus Cut/Fill. the Target Point (central circle). The
shown. Polar - Range In/Out and Bearing scale changes depending on your
plus Cut/Fill. proximity to the target.

7.5.4 Orientation
The Orientation defines a reference Last Pt - The reference direction Line - The reference direction is
direction from which all from which all measurements are parallel to the selected line. Lines
measurements to target points are displayed to Target points is the Last may be defined based on points in
made. Point that was recorded. the Job.
The orientation is defined by a point Known Pt - The reference direction

or a line. from which all measurements are Defining a new Line for Orientation
displayed to Target points is a point A new line for orientation may be
To select a method of Orientation, contained within the current “Stake defined between any two points that
highlight the Orient field and use the from” Job. Select the point from the exist in the current Job used.
left or right cursor keys to cycle list that is presented when this option
through the options or press Enter to is chosen. In the Orient field selected Line.
open a window containing all the
options. Arrow - If Arrow has been selected
the graphical display will show a
North - The reference direction from moving arrow pointing in the direction
which all measurements are of the point to be staked.
displayed to Target points is north in
the active coordinate system.
Sun - The reference direction from A new entry field will appear below
which all measurements are Orient. This field will be empty if no
displayed to Target points is the sun. lines are defined. Move to this field
The Receiver contains an almanac and press ENTER to access the line
and can calculate the position of the list box.
sun irrespective of local time or
position.
The ASCII file is always defined as Start+Endpoint
STK_Line.txt and is stored on the PC Start+Dst+Bg+%
Card or Internal memory in the Data Start+Dst+Bg+H/V
sub-directory. You may write your own Start+Dst+Bg+V/H
line file on the PC and then transfer it Start+Dst+Bg+Hgt
to the PC Card or internal memory.
The file format is given in Appendix D. S - Start - Start point
The list of lines is displayed. If the list E - Endpoint - End point
is empty then there are no lines To define a new line, press NEW D - Dst - Horizontal Distance
defined! Use CONT (F1) to select the (F2). β - Brg - Bearing
highlighted line, New (F2) to define a H - H - Horizontal component
new line, EDIT (F3) to edit an existing V - V - Vertical component
line and DEL-A (F4) to delete all the h - Hgt - Height difference
lines in the list.
% = V/H × 100
Lines are always stored in an ASCII
file, it is not possible to store lines in a
Job.
Input a Name for the Line. Select the
Lines are stored in local grid format. It method to use to define the Line in
is however still possible to define a Type. You may select from:
line with WGS84 Geodetic or
Cartesian coordinates even when
only the WGS84 coordinate system is
being used. The sensor will
automatically use a standard UTM
projection to compute the necessary
grid coordinates.
Start+Endpoint Start+Dst+Bg+% Start+Dst+Bg+H/V
The Line is defined between two The line is defined by a start point, a The line is defined by a start point, a
points. horizontal distance and bearing from horizontal distance and bearing from
the start point and a percentage slope the start point and the ratio of
Either: value. horizontal increment over vertical
increment.
1. Enter the coordinates and height Enter/Select LocalE, Local N and
of each point. Ortho Hgt for the start point as Enter/Select LocalE, Local N and
or described in Start+Endpoint. Ortho Hgt for the start point as
2. Use the IMPRT (F3) key to described in Start+Endpoint.
import any point contained in the Enter the horizontal Distance to the
Job you are using. Make sure end point. This end point will be an Enter the horizontal Distance to the
that one of the entry fields for artificial point. If no value other than end point. This end point will be an
the point (start or end point) you zero is given, a default of 100m will artificial point. If no value other than
wish to define is highlighted, be taken. zero is given, a default of 100m will
press IMPRT (F3), select the be taken.
point from the list and press Enter the horizontal Bearing to the
CONT (F1). end point, through which the line Enter the horizontal Bearing to the
passes. end point, through which the line
passes.
Enter the Slope percentage value.
This is defined as described in the Enter the Slope H/V values. These
diagram. are defined as described in the
diagram.

Start+Dst+Bg+V/H Start+Dist+Bg+Hgt When you have entered the method
The line is defined by a start point, a The line is defined by a start point, a by which you wish to define the line
horizontal distance and bearing from horizontal distance and bearing from and the necessary parameters, press
the start point and the ratio of vertical the start point and the height CONT (F1) to continue.
increment over horizontal increment. difference between the start point and
artificial end point.
Enter/Select LocalE, Local N and
Ortho Hgt for the start point as Enter/Select LocalE, Local N and
described in Start+Endpoint. Ortho Hgt for the start point as
described in Start+Endpoint.
Enter the horizontal Distance to the
end point. This end point will be an Enter the horizontal Distance to the
artificial point. If no value other than end point. This end point will be an
zero is given, a default of 100m will artificial point. If no value other than The new line is displayed. Press
be taken. zero is given, a default of 100m will CONT (F1) to select the line for
be taken. orientation.
Enter the horizontal Bearing to the
end point, through which the line Enter the horizontal Bearing to the
passes. end point, through which the line
passes.
Enter the Slope V/H values. These
are defined as described in the Enter the Height Difference (Hgt Diff)
diagram. between the start point and the
artificial end point.

7.5.5 Polar and Orthogonal
There are two methods which you Orthogonal

can use to find your way to a point. The Orthogonal method gives you a distance In/Out to the point, a distance
These are Polar and Orthogonal. Use left/right to the point and a cut/fill.
the F2 key to switch between the two
methods.
O - Orientation direction (Orient)

P - Current Position
I/O - Horizontal Distance (In/Out)
L/R - Horizontal Distance (Left/Right)
C/F - Vertical Distance (Cut/Fill)
T - Target Point
Note: In - from current position to

target along the orientation direction.
Out - from current position to target
180° from orientation direction
Left/right - looking along orientation
direction, distance left/right to target
point.

7.5.6 Using the Reverse function
Polar The reverse function is available in

The Polar Method gives you a Bearing from the orientation reference, a Advanced mode and switches the
horizontal distance and a cut/fill to the point. orientation by 180°. It is used when
the Target lies behind you and you
would effectively have to walk
backwards to reach it.
Press REVRS (F3). The orientation is

turned through 180°. You can also
now turn through 180° yourself so
that you are facing the direction in
which you need to walk.
O - Orientation Direction (Orient) β - Bearing (Direct) to Target

P - Current Position C/F - Vertical Distance (Cut/Fill)
D - Horizontal Distance (Dist) to T - Target Point
Target

7.5.7 Using the Redraw function 7.5.8 Picking up a new point 7.5.9 Using the INIT key
The redraw function is used when This function is available in Advanced The INIT (F6) key is available in
Show Path has been chosen in the mode. If you are staking out and need Advanced mode and is used to select
configuration and the path that you to measure new points, you may do and force a new initialization.
have followed is shown on the graphi- so by pressing the PCKUP (F5) key.
cal area of the display. This brings you into survey mode. In Stake-Out, the initialization will
always be on-the-fly. More details
When moving around in the same about using the INIT key and
area, this graphical area may not initialization on the fly can be found in
refresh. The path may build up section 7.4.8.
obscuring the display.
Press REDRW (F4) to refresh the

display and erase the displayed path.
Measure the points and/or hidden

points as described in sections 7.4.6
and 7.4.9.
Press SHIFT and then STAKE (F2) to

return to Stake-Out. Returning to
Stake-Out is possible before a point
occupation or after storing the point.

7.5.10 Using the NEAR key 7.5.11 Graph
The nearest point to the current Once the nearest point has been A map of the 30 last measured points
sensor position for staking out can be found, its point ID is automatically can be displayed by pressing SHIFT
found by pressing SHIFT and then copied into the field of the Target and then GRAPH (F3). Each point is
NEAR (F2). The current sensor Point. given a temporary ID between 1 and
position is the position at the time 30.
when the NEAR key is pressed.
SCALE (F2) displays a linear scale

consistent with the current zoom
level.
It may also help when using this key Stake out the point as usual.
to set the stake out filter to Points to The map is displayed. Use ZOOM+
Stake. See chapter 11.3 for more (F3) and ZOOM- (F4) to zoom in and
information about the filter. out.
Stop the search with ABORT (F1). ID (F5) reveals a list with the tempo-
rary point IDs and the “real” point IDs.

7.5.12 Aux Pt
FILT (F6) allows to change the filter Auxiliary points are used as aids
settings for the currently selected Job. when trying to find a stake out point.
More information about filter settings Two auxiliary points are recorded to
can be found in section 11.3. form start and end points of a line.
The chainage and offset or distance
Press SHIFT to reveal REDRW (F4). from each auxiliary point to the target
This redraws the map to the original point is then displayed together with a
scale. sketch. The line AB is displayed together with
the location of the target point.
You may also scroll the map left/right, The auxiliary points can have codes
up/down by using the cursor keys. assigned to them and can also be Chg - The chainage along the line AB
downloaded into SKI Pro. to the target point.
Ofs - The Offset from line AB to the
To start the auxiliary point routine, target point. Negative value = left,
press SHIFT and then AUXPT (F5). positive value = right.
Hgt A/Hgt B - Height difference
Enter a point Id for Point A and record between auxiliary point A/B and the
the auxiliary point in exactly the same target point.
way that you would record any other
point in real-time. Then carry out the Press DIST (F3) to display the
same operation for point B. After distance from each auxiliary point to
pressing STORE (F1) the following the target point instead of the
screen will appear. chainage and offset.

stake out screen.

7.5.13 Point Stake-Out - Procedure
Point is selected as the Stake Type The cross and arrow indicate your
when entering Stake-Out. current position and direction of
moving. The rectangle points to the
The list of Target points are those target point and the triangle to the
contained in the Job or ASCII File. orientation point. The display is only
updated if you are moving faster than
The “as staked” points will always be 50cm/sec. If the rectangle is in one
stored in the Job. You may also line with the arrow you are heading
choose to store the Target points The measurement to the point will be towards the target point.
defined in the ASCII File in the Job. In displayed as Orthogonal or Polar. Use
this way you have the Target points the F2 key to switch between the If you are closer than 500 m to the
and the “as staked” points in one Job. methods. target point your position with respect
to the Target point is shown in an-
To stake out a point, select it from the If you are a 500 meter (or feet) away other graphical display. The scale
Target Point List. Press Enter to from the target point, the graphical shown on the left side of the display
expose a list of all points in the Job. display will look as follows: will change as you get closer to the
See section 11.3 for a description of point. The stages are 500m, 100m,
the useful filters and sorting methods 25m, 5m, 1m and 0.5m. Note that the
which may be helpful when staking a orientation direction is denoted by the
lot of points. A particularly useful filter arrow at the top center. When the
maybe to filter by Points to Stake. Reverse function is activated, this
arrow will appear bottom center of the
graphical display.

The graphical display is a square until Depending upon what has been set in If required, you may also add a code
the 0.5m level is reached. At this the configuration, the following screen (if a coding system has been
stage it will turn into a circle. may appear. configured). Details on adding codes
are given in section 7.4.4.
When you are satisfied with the input,

press STOP (F1).
The DIFF (F2) key is available.
Pressing this key gives the

differences between the design
When you are at the point to be The Point Id of the Target Point will be coordinates and staked coordinates
staked, the measurements to the taken by default. If you wish to enter a of the point.
point must be at or nearly zero. Make new point Id you may, but remember
sure that the pole is level and press that this will then be considered a
OCUPY (F1). If you had to level the separate point. If you simply wish to
pole, ensure that the measurements add aditional text to the suggested
to the point are still good before point Id, press Enter. The point Id in
pressing OCUPY. the display remains and the cursor
will be in the position defined in the
current Point Id template.

7.5.14 Slope Stake-Out - Procedure
If Diff Check has been set to either A check will be performed according Slope Stake-Out has two main
Position only, Height only or Pos + to the Required Coordinate Quality applications.
Hgt in the CONFIGURE\ Stake-Out set in the Configuration. If the point is
screen then the STAKE-OUT\ Occupy within the Required CQ, it will be
Differences panel will be displayed stored and no special messages will
automatically if the differences appear.
exceed the defined Limit.
If however the point is outside the
Diff In/Out - Horizontal distance In/ Required CQ, it may warrant further
Out to the Target Point. investigation.
Diff Left/Right - Horizontal distance
Left/Right to the Target Point.
Diff Cut/Fill - Vertical distance to the
Target Point.
Total Diff - Length of vector from
Target Point to measured point.
If you have chosen to record a LONG

log file these values will also be
stored in the log file.
Press STORE (F1)

1. Measurement/Stakeout of transi- The Line is defined as the section 2. Staking out of slope intercepts.
tion points of slopes for cross- line through the terrain. You ensure (points where design slopes and
sections. that you follow this line by observing terrain intersect).
the Left/Right value and keeping it at
Plan or near zero. When you arrive at a
point where the level of the terrain
begins to change, record the point.
You can also stake this point for
future reference.
Section
S - Startpoint of Slope Line
E - Endpoint of Slope Line
P - Current Position
I/O - Horizontal Distance In/Out to
Start Point
C/F - Vertical Distance Cut/Fill to
S - Startpoint of slope Slope Line
- Transition point to be measured/ - Slope Intercept
staked
The Slope Line is defined and se- Procedure
lected. Proceed along the line. You Slope is selected as the Stake Type
can ensure that you keep on the line when entering Stake-Out.
by observing the Left/Right value and
keeping it at or near zero. Observe
the Cut/Fill value. At the intercept(s) it
will be zero. When you arrive at such
a point, stake it and record it.
Stake-Out starts. Orient is along the
Slope Line only . Details about using
Lines as orientation are given in
section 7.5.4.
The “as staked” points will always be
stored in the Store Pts Job. If staking The measurements In/Out, Right/
from an ASCII file, you may also Left and Cut/Fill are given with
choose to store the Target points respect to the start point of the line.
defined there in the Job. In this way
you have the Target points and the When you reach the required point
“as staked” points in one Job. place the stake.
To start Slope Stake-Out, press To record the point, press OCUPY

CONT (F1). (F1).

You may also enter a completely
different Point Id if required.
Press STOP (F1).
A default Point Id is suggested. This Diff In/Out - Horizontal distance In/

comprises of the Line Id followed by Out to the startpoint
any incrementing numbers that you Diff Left/Right - Horizontal distance
have defined in the Occupy template. Left/Right to the startpoint.
Diff Cut/Fill - Vertical distance to the
Alternatively, you may press SHIFT startpoint of line.
and then PT ID (F3) to use the Point If a codelist has been defined you Total Diff - Length of vector from
ID currently defined in the Occupy may select a code. Details on adding startpoint to measured point.
template. codes are given in section 7.4.4.
If you have chosen to record a LONG
If you simply wish to add aditional text The DIFF (F2) key is available. log file these values will also be
to the suggested point Id, press Pressing this key gives the differ- stored in the log file.
Enter. The point Id in the display ences between the startpoint of the
remains and the cursor will be in the line and the staked point. Press STORE (F1) to store the point.
position defined in the current Point Id
template.

7.5.15 Grid Stake-Out - Procedure
Grid Stake-Out can be used to stake out grids relative to a The Reference Line is selected or defined. Define the
defined reference line. distance to the first station along the Reference Line, the
Horizontal and Vertical Offsets from the Reference Line.
Define the amount by which the Receiver should incre-
ment.
The first Target Point is the first point in the grid. Proceed
to this point and record it. After this point is recorded, the
next Target point will be shown. Carry on in this fashion
until you reach the end of the row.
You may then create a new row by redefining the Horizon-

tal Offset and switching the Increment to the negative
value. Follow this row back in the direction from which you
came, recording the grid points as you go. Alternatively,
you can redefine the horizontal offset and start the next
row in the same direction, next to the first grid point.
SE - Defined Reference Line
D - Distance to Station Begin
H - Horizontal Offset
V - Vertical Offset
I - Increment

Procedure Descriptions of how to define lines
Grid is selected as the Stake Type are given in section 7.5.4 (Although
when entering Stake-Out. this section is concerned with
orientation, the principles of defining
lines are exactly the same).
When you have selected/defined a

line, use the PARAM (F5) key to
Stake-Out starts. Select the define the grid parameters.
orientation.
Then move to the Target field (shown

The “as staked” points will always be empty here). You must select a line
stored in the Job. If staking from an as the target. Press ENTER.
ASCII file, you may also choose to
store the Target points defined there
in the Job. In this way you have the
Target points and the “as staked”
points in one Job. Station Beg - The distance along the
Reference Line to the first grid point.
To start Grid Stake-Out, press CONT Horz Offset - The Horizontal Offset
(F1). from the Reference Line to the first
grid point.
You may select the line from this Vert Offset - The Vertical Offset from
panel. If no lines are defined (as the Reference Line to the first grid
here), press NEW (F2) to define one. point.

Station Inc - The distance between Y is the Horizontal Offset from the
each grid point in the direction of the Reference Line.
Reference Line.
Scale - Depending on the Move to the point and record/stake it.
transformation method used and the Press OCUPY (F1).
stake out design criteria, you may
specify a scale factor to be applied to
the increment value within the map
projection plane. This is only used The first point in the grid is
when staking out grids over large automatically selected as the target
areas (tens of kilometers) and point and measurements to that point
otherwise should be left at the default are given.
value of 1.00.
Information about the point you are
Refer to the diagrams at the start of looking for is given in the Directory The Point Id is automatically chosen
this section for more details of each Bar. according to the format explained
parameter. previously.
Press CONT (F1) to continue. Alternatively, you may press SHIFT

The point is given as: and then PT ID (F3) to toggle be-
tween using the Point ID currently
+XXXX.XX+YYYY.YY defined in the Occupy template and
the suggested Line Id as described in
Where section 7.5.13.
X is the distance along the Refer-
ence Line.

If you simply wish to add aditional text Press STORE (F1) to store the point. You can then choose the way in which
to the suggested point Id, press you wish to proceed to the next row:
Enter. The point Id in the display
remains and the cursor will be in the 1. Increase the offset and start the
position defined in the current Point Id next row in either direction from
template. the last recorded grid point.
You may also enter a completely

different Point Id if required.
Add a code if required. Coding is The next target is automatically

explained in Chapter 8. selected according to the increment
value. The value given in the
Use the ADD (F5) key to add a Directory Bar also shows this.
Hidden Point and/or Point
Annotations. Carry on staking and recording points
in this way until you reach the end of
When you have the pole level, press the row.
STOP (F1).
The DIFF (F2) key is available.

Pressing this key reveals the
differences between the design grid
point and the as staked grid point. If
you have chosen to record a LONG
log file these values will also be
stored in the log file.
2. Increase the offset and start the To use option 1, highlight the Line and
next row in either direction press ENTER. Press PARAM (F5) to
adjacent to the first grid point. enter the Grid parameters.
Input the new Horizontal Offset (Horz

Offset). Press CONT (F1).
The next target point will be

Input the new Horizontal Offset (Horz displayed.
Offset). Give the Increment (Station
Inc) a negative value. Press CURST The REFLN (F3) key is used to
(F4) (current station). automatically set the start point of the
reference line as the target. If this is
The next target point will be pressed and the start point has
displayed. already been recorded, the end point
will be selected.
To use option 2, highlight the Line and
press ENTER. Press PARAM (F5) to
enter the Grid parameters.

If a point within the grid is obstructed
(E.g. a car is parked over it or it is
heavily shaded by trees), there is a
function that allows you to skip that
point and carry on to the next one.
Enter the Line definition screen.
Press SHIFT to reveal STAT+ (F3)

and STAT- (F4). STAT+ (F3) will
increment to the next point. STAT-
(F4) returns to the previous point.

8. Coding 8.1 Thematical Coding
There are two types of Coding Thematical Coding is point-based Although it is possible to create a
System available on System 500 - information recorded at the point you new, empty Codelist on the Receiver
Thematical Coding and Free Coding. are occupying. Thematical Codelists and then create new Layers, Codes
consist of Layers, Codes and and it is far more practical to create
Thematical Codes are point-based Attributes. the complete Codelist in SKI-Pro
information recorded together with the Codelist Manager and upload it to the
other point information. The Layer is the primary block of the Receiver.
codelist and describes a group of
Free Codes are time-based related codes. For example, the Layer
information, independent of the Vegetation could describe the Codes
points. A time stamp is recorded with Tree, Grass, Shrub etc.
each free code, allowing the
subsequent export of points and The Code is the secondary block and
codes in chronological order. This usually describes a single object.
information can then be used in third-
party mapping software. A Code may have one or more
Attributes attached to it. Attributes
describe properties of the Code. For
example, the Code Tree could have
the Attributes Type, Height, Age,
Girth, Spread etc.
8. Coding 232 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

8.1.1 Importing, Selecting and Defining a Thematical Codelist
Codelists can be transferred to the

PC Card or Internal Memory using the
Transfer function in SKI-Pro.
Codelists on the PC Card or Internal
Memory must then be transferred to
the Receiver using the Transfer
function.
The Codelist is then selected for use The Codelists on the Receiver are
in Configuration. displayed. To create a new, empty
Codelist press NEW (F2).
Coding Type - Choose Thematical.

Codelist - Select the codelist from Enter the Name of the new Codelist
the list or, to define a new codelist, and if required the name of the
press ENTER. Creator. Press CONT (F1).
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 233 8. Coding

8.1.2 Defining New Codes and Attributes
Layers, Codes and Attributes can be The list of existing codes is given.
added to a Codelist. When a Press NEW (F2) to create a new
Thematical Codelist has been se- code.
lected, the CODES (F3) and LAYER
(F5) keys will be available.
Enter a meaningful name for the

Attribute.
Select the Layer on which the code

will exist. To add a new Layer, press
To create new Codes and Attributes ENTER and NEW (F2). Refer to the
press CODES (F3). next section for details.
Enter the new Code and its Code

Name.
Move to the next field with the cursor.
To add or edit attributes, press ATRIB You may enter a default value for the
(F4). Attribute.
Press NEW (F2) to add another new

attribute. Press CONT (F1) to con-
tinue.

8.1.3 Defining and Activating/Deactivating Layers
Layers, Codes and Attributes can be Press NEW (F2) to create a new
added to a Codelist. When a layer. Input the Layer name and press
Thematical Codelist has been se- CONT (F1).
lected, the CODES (F3) and LAYER
(F5) keys will be available. To activate/deactivate individual
Layers, select the Layer and press
USE (F4) to toggle the Layer on/off.
To deactivate all Layers, press NONE

(F5). This key then changes to ALL
(F5). Use this to activate all the
Layers.
To create a new Layer or activate/

deactivate an existing Layer press
LAYER (F5).

8.1.4 Adding a Thematical Code to a Point
When a Thematical Codelist has The Code Name will be displayed for ATRIB (F4) - lets you define attributes
been selected for use within a Con- the Point Code that you have cho- for the selected code and add attribute
figuration Set, it will be possible to sen. Enter any attributes for the code values to the choicelist of an attribute.
add a Thematical Code to a point using the ATRIB (F4) key.
when measuring.
The code is stored along with the
Point Id information.
When the Point Code list box is open

there are several other operations
that you may carry out.
To add an attribute value to a
choicelist, highlight the line of the
according attribute and press ENTER.

or CONT (F1) selects the code and
2. Press ENTER and select the code returns to the survey screen.
from the list. NEW (F2) lets you define a new code. Type in the new attribute value, then
or LAST (F3) jumps to the code log and press ADD (F2).
3. Type in the first few characters of displays the codes that were last
the code until the desired code is assigned in order. STORE (F1) records the code and
displayed. returns to the Main Survey panel.

8.2 Free Coding 8.2.1 Importing, Selecting and Defining a Free Codelist
Free Coding is time-based information, Although it is possible to create a Coding Type - Choose Free Coding.
independent of any recorded points. new, empty Codelist on the Receiver
Codelist - Select the codelist from
and then create new Layers, Codes
the list or, to define a new codelist,
Free Coding can be used to generate and Attributes, it is far more practical
press ENTER.
virtually any type of code. Exporting of to create the complete Codelist in
the codes through an Output Mask SKI-Pro Codelist Manager and upload
converts them for use in any type of it to the Receiver.
third party surveying software.
Codelists can be transferred to the
Output Masks are defined in SKI-Pro PC Card or Internal Memory using the
using Format Manager. Some standard Transfer function in SKI-Pro.
Output masks exist, (E.g. for exporting Codelists on the PC Card or Internal
to GSI format), but you are also free to Memory must then be transferred to
The Codelists on the Receiver are
define whichever output mask best the Receiver using the Transfer
displayed. To create a new, empty
suits the format that you usually work function.
Codelist press NEW (F2).
with.
The Codelist is then selected for use
A Free Code consists of a Code in Configuration.
Name, a Description and then up to 20
Information Blocks which may contain
any data you wish to write in them.
The Output Mask defines how this data

will then be translated when it is
Enter the Name of the new Codelist
downloaded.
and if required the name of the
Creator. Press CONT (F1).

8.2.2 Defining New Codes
Codes can be added to a Codelist. Use the NEW (F2) key to add more
When Free Coding has been se- information blocks.
lected, the CODES (F3) key will be
available. Press CONT (F1) to continue.
Free Code - Input the identifier

Description - Input the description of
the Indentifier.
Press C-INF (F4) to add information

To create new Codes press CODES blocks for the code.
The new code is displayed in the list.
(F3).
An asterisk at the end of the line
indicates that the codes has
information blocks defined. Press C-
INF (F4) to view and if required add
information blocks.
Enter a meaningful name for the info

Press NEW (F2). block. Then move to the adjacent
field to enter a default value.

8.2.3 Adding a Free Code
When a Free Codelist has been An asterisk next to a code indicates

selected for use within a that it has attributes.
Configuration Set, it will be possible to
record a Free Code when measuring. NEW (F2) lets you add a new code.
LAST (F3) jumps to the code log and

displays the codes that were last
assigned in order.
To select the code:
1. Use the left or right cursor keys to C-INF (F4) lets you assign new
cycle through the code list. information blocks to the selected
or code.
The Last Code and second last code 2. Press ENTER and select the code
(2Last Code) that were used are from the list. Press CONT (F1) to select a code
shown. or from the list.
The CODE (F4) key will be available. the code until the desired code is
Press this key to access the codelist. displayed. Type in the attribute or add a new
attribute with NEW-I (F4).
To add an attribute value to an

existing choicelist of an attribute,
highlight the line of the according
attribute and press ENTER.

Type in the new attribute value, then
press ADD (F2).
STORE (F1) records the code and

returns to the Main Survey screen.

9. The CONFIG Key
The CONFIG key can be used at any Press CONFIG. To choose a different Configuration
time to make temporary alterations to Set, press CONFG (F5).
any parameter in the Configuration
Set.
There are some configurable para-

meters that can only be accessed
through the CONFIG key and are not
contained in the sequential
Configuration. Nevertheless, they are
part of the Configuration Set. You can configure any parameter for
the current Configuration Set. You You may select any Configuration Set
The other parameters that are may make changes to any in the list and press CONT (F1) or
available through the Sequential configurable option contained in items add a new one using the NEW (F2)
Configuration are described in 1-4. After making the change, you will key. Press ESC to return to the
Chapter 5. press CONT (F1). You will return to CONFIGURE screen.
whichever screen you were in
previously. The changes will be
temporary unless, after making the
change, you press the CONFIG key
again and press STORE (F3).
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 241 9. The CONFIG Key

9.1 Survey - Satellite
Enables you to define the Satellite SV Health - Can be set to Automatic Only a code solution is possible if
Elevation Mask and also automatic or User. When set to Automatic, the MaxTrak mode is selected. However,
tracking of healthy satellites. receiver monitors the incoming when the Track Mode is set back to
satellite signal and if the signal is Max Accuracy, RTK phase solutions
flagged as unhealthy, will not record will again be computed.
data from it or use data from it in a
real-time computation. Additionally, it is not possible to import
phase data into SKI-Pro that has
When set to User, you may define been collected when the MaxTrak
which satellites are used and which mode was selected. Only code
not. The satellites are defined using solutions can then be computed in
the HELTH (F4) key. SKI-Pro.
Elev Mask - The elevation mask or
elevation below which satellite data For the vast majority of applications LossOf Lock - When losing all
will not be recorded and below which there should be no reason to set SV satellite signals for example due to
satellites will not be shown to be Health to User. satellite shading caused by tall
tracked. For RT applications the Elev buildings, trees, etc. a message
Mask should be set to 10°. For post Track Mode - The sensor may also “Complete loss of lock” appears. The
processing only applications, the Elev be configured to operate in one of two sensor may be configured to beep
Mask should be set to 15°. These are Track Modes. with this loss of lock message or not.
the default mask angles used in the Max. Accuracy should be chosen for
System Default Configurations. normal survey applications.
MaxTrak is suitable for GIS applica-
tions where a lower accuracy may be
acceptable but it is desirable to track
satellites under noisier conditions
(trees, built up areas).
9. The CONFIG Key 242 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en
9.2 General - Units
Enables you to configure units for all Date - Select the date format from
types of measurement data displayed dd.mm.yy, mm/dd/yy or yy/mm/dd,
and recorded by the receiver. where dd = day, mm = month and yy
= year.
Time - Select the time format from 12

hours or 24 hours.
Temp - Select the units used for Dirctn Ref - Defines the direction
temperature from Celcius °C or reference or the direction from which
Fahrenheit °F. angles are measured.
Distance - Select from Meters, Int. Pressure - Select the units used for Dirctn Base - Defines the Direction
Feet (International Feet), Int. Feet 1/8 atmospheric pressure from millibar Base as either True or Magnetic.
in (International Feet to 1/8 inch), US (mbar), mm merc (mm Hg), inch When Magnetic is chosen, input the
feet, US feet 1/8 in (US feet to 1/8 merc (inch HG), hectopascal (hPa) current deviation of Magnetic North
inch), Kilometres or Int. Miles or pounds / in² (psi). from True North.
(International Miles).
Use the ANGLE (F6) key to configure
Angle - Select from 400gon, 360° the direction reference and direction
decimal, 360° ‘ “, or 6400mil. Use base for angular measurements.
ANGLE (F6) to define further options
for this unit.
Velocity - Select from km/h (kilome-

ters per hour), mph (miles per hour),
or knots.

9.3 General - Language 9.4 General - Hot Keys
Select the Language in which you You may assign a particular screen to
wish the Terminal Interface to be each of the keys F7 - F10 so that
displayed. The language is when one of these keys is pressed,
associated with the Configuration Set. that screen is displayed.
Select the key you wish to configure

The Receiver can hold up to two
and press ENTER. A list of all
languages.Use the DEL (F4) key to
available screens is displayed. Select
delete any languages that are not
the screen and press ENTER.
required.
Note that you can also configure the
function keys F1 - F6 to the hot keys
or select ‘NEXT Dialog Call’ to switch
between all previously opened
screens.

9.5 General - Time and Initial Position 9.6 General - Start-Up
It is important that the local time, date Then check your local position. If you Defines the screen that will be dis-
and initial position are approximately have a local Coordinate System played when the Receiver is switched
correct in order for the Receiver to defined, this will be available in grid on and the behaviour after power
quickly locate and track satellites. coordinates as well as WGS84 failure.
Geodetic and WGS84 Cartesian. Use
the COORD (F2) key to switch
between coordinate systems.
The NAV (F6) key enables you to

activate or deactivate the navigated
height solution. For most applications
this will be deactivated as it enables a
navigated position calculation with
Check that the Local Time is ap- only 3 satellites. Panel - Select the screen you wish to
proximately correct. This will be be displayed upon switching the
updated every time GPS satellites are Certain aerial applications may need Receiver on.
tracked. Check also the Time Zone to switch this to NO, thereby activat-
for your current location and Local ing the navigated height solution. AutoOn - PowerFail should be
Date. selected for system restarts after an
abrupt power failure like a short circuit
or unplugging batteries by mistake.
ExtPowerLow/PowerFail should
only be selected when the system is
powered by an external main AC/DC
as is the case with reference stations
power supply but not by batteries.

9.7 General - TR500
It is recommended for possible slow Enables you to configure some general Keyclick - Switches the Keyclick on
drop in voltage or an abrupt power features of the Terminal. or off.
failure.
Deflt αNUM - defines the set of extra
The option ExtPowerLow/ characters available through the
PowerFail is not recommend αNUM key or on the F1-F6 function
for systems running with batteries! keys whenever you type in an entry.
This option could then effect a deep
discharge on the battery and could
destroy the battery!
The ExtPowerLow/ Illu/Contr - Switches the screen

PowerFail option can only illumination on or off and sets the
be set temporary. After manual turn contrast level. Alternatively, use the key
off and on again, the option is always combination Alt + B for switching the
reset to PowerFail to protect the screen illumination on or off.
batteries from deep discharging.
Alarm - Switches the alarm on or off
Start-Up is particularly useful for and also controls the volume. The
operations without the TR500 alarm sounds when an important event
Terminal. Ensure that you start up in occurs (such as an error message
SURVEY\ MAIN and not in SURVEY\ appearing).
Begin.
For further details on how to configure When Illu/Contr or Alarm are selected,
the Sensor to automatically start up you can adjust the Illumination Level or
and occupy a point, refer to Chapter Contrast and Sound Level by using the
5, Configuring the Receiver. -10% (F4) and +10% (F5) keys.

9.8 General - Identification 9.9 Interfaces 9.10 Interfaces - Real-Time
The Sensor Identification can be Gives an overview of all interfaces The Real-Time interface enables you
defined. By default the last four and the port and device currently to configure the Real-Time
numbers of the serial number are assigned for that interface. parameters, the port and the device
used. Type in any other four character used for Real-Time data
Id if required. The Sensor Id is For example, a sensor is being used communication. The port (1,2 or 3)
displayed in the automatic point as a real time rover with a Satelline and the device are displayed. If both
template, log files etc. and defines radio attached to port 1 and hidden real-time interfaces are configured,
which instrument was used for certain points are being collected using a both will be displayed in the
measurements. DISTO connected to port 2. CONFIGURE\ Interfaces panel as
Real-Time 1 and Real-Time 2.
Set the focus on Real-Time and press

EDIT (F3) to modify the Real-Time
device and parameters.
Certain devices allow you to set

additional parameters e.g. channel
For this type of operation, the
switch. This parameters can be
Use the DEFLT (F5) key to Interfaces panel would look as shown
accessed by pressing CTRL (F5). For
automatically redefine the Sensor above.
information about all supported Real-
Identification as the last four figures Time devices refer to Appendix H.
A more detailed description on the
of the serial number.
interfaces is given in the following
sections. For information about Real-Time
Reference parameters refer to
For further details on the interfaces section
Tilt and Meteo see App. J. 5.3 Configuring the Receiver for Real-
Time Reference Operations.

9.11 Interfaces - NMEA Output
For information about Real-Time The NMEA Output interface enables Use the MESGS (F3) key to display
Rover parameters refer to section 5.4 you to configure which NMEA the messages that can be output, the
Con-figuring the Receiver for Real- messages to output through which port rates and the output timing method.
Time Rover Operations. using which device.
Set the focus on NMEA Output and

press EDIT (F3) to select the NMEA
messages to be output.
Highlight the message that is to be

output and press F3 (EDIT) to
configure how a particular message is
sent.
Select the port to which the NMEA
messages should be sent. Use the
DEVCE (F5) key to configure the
device itself. Refer to Appendix H for a
complete list of all supported devices.
Use the ID (F4) key to define the talker

ID that appears at the beginning of
each message. This will normally Rate - Choose a rate between 0.1
remain at the default GP for GPS. and 3600s at which the message
should be sent.

9.12 Interfaces - ASCII Input
Use - Choose Yes to output the sensors were sending their position The ASCII Input interface enables
message. message back at exactly the same you to configure port and device, from
time (as would be the case with which you want to receive and store
Output Time - A message may be Immediately). In this case the ASCII strings from external devices
sent either at an exact epoch or second and third sensor could delay such as depth sounders, barometers,
immediately. their output so the control station digital cameras, pipe detectors,
At Epoch means that the message receives the message from each Geiger counters etc.
will be sent at the exact epoch as sensor at a slightly different time.
defined by the Rate. The ASCII strings are stored as point
Immediately means that the A full description of each NMEA annotations together with the next
message is sent as soon as it is message is given in Appendix E. point measured. Point annotations for
available auto logged points are only stored
when Store Pt DB and Use Annot in
Output Delay - If the message is sent panel CONFIGURE\ Position Logging
At Epoch, then additionaly the are set to YES. For detailed
message may be delayed before it is information see section 5.4.
output through the chosen port. The
time of delay can be a value up to the The port (1, 2 or 3) and the device are
rate at which the message is output. displayed. Set the focus on ASCII
This may be useful if 2 or more Input and press EDIT (F3) to modify
sensors are being used to monitor the the ASCII Input device.
position of an object. The position of
each sensor is being output as a
NMEA message back to a master
control station. The control station
may not be able to cope with all the
positional data messages if all
If you want to use an external device Set User defined to YES. Enter a Reply - As a reaction of the sensor to
for ASCII input set Use Device to description to identify the annotation an incoming ASCII string an NMEA
YES. Select the Port to which the (e.g. depth sounder). message may be sent back to the
device is connected. Use the DEVCE external device. In case of a camera,
(F5) key to configure the device itself. Message Id - This can be used to for example, this may allow you to
identify particular data within the have the position being integrated into
End of Msg - Select the delimiter to incoming ASCII string. See Working the photograph afterwards.
be used to identify the end of the Example 2 for an example.
incoming ASCII string. This may be Press CONT (F1) to return to the
either CR, LF or CR + LF. Data prefix - To more easily identify CONFIGURE\ ASCII Input panel.
the annotations registered with a point
Press the ANNOT (F3) key to define it is possible to couple them with the
which of the incoming ASCII strings above given description. The
should be stored as a point description will then be stored
annotation and how. You may identify together with the ASCII string.
up to four different message types
(Annotation #1 to #4).

Working Example 1
You need to complete a survey on a

small lake and wish to record the
depth of the lake that is measured by
a 3rd party depth sounder at certain
locations. This depth sounder
constantly streams data at a rate of
Note that because the depth
1Hz and sends the depth it has
sounder is streaming data, the depth
measured in the following format:
measurement that is stored with the
point will be the last measurement
27.234<CR>
received by the sensor before the
27.345<CR>
point is stored (the point can be
27.232<CR>
stored either by pressing STORE
…..
(F1) or using Auto Store
functionality).
The ASCII Input interface needs to
be configured such that when a
The co-ordinates of points can now
position is measured, the depth
be measured over the lake and
measurement will be stored as
additionally, the depth of the lake at
annotation 1 with that point. To do
that point is also recorded as an
this, in the CONFIGURE\ ASCII
annotation.
Input panel, press ANNOT (F3) and
configure Annotation #1 to accept
the incoming ASCII data as shown
below.

Working Example 2
You wish that when a point is sur-
You need to complete a survey on veyed, this ASCII string is split and
contaminated waste land and using a that each individual gas reading is
gas analyser, you wish to measure recorded as a separate annotation
the level of different gasses at such that annotation 1 would contain
various locations. When a button is the value 2.786, annotation 2 would
pressed on the gas analyser, it will contain the value 0.034 etc.
measure the level of 4 different To achieve this, each annotation The waste land site can now be
gasses and outputs the results as an should be configured to accept only surveyed. The co-ordinates of any
ASCII string. This ASCII string has one particular gas reading. The points can be measured and before
the following format: Message ID line is used to “search” storing this point, the gas analyser is
the input for that particular gas activated to take a gas reading at
$GS1 2.786<CR/LF> reading. this point. The point can then be
$GS2 0.034<CR/LF> stored and the 4 gas readings are
$GS3 1.395<CR/LF> stored as individual annotations
$GS4 0.025<CR/LF> along with this point.
where $GS1 to $GS4 is the Message

ID for the 4 different gasses followed
by the gas reading itself in ppm.
When each annotation is configured
for each particular gas reading the
CONFIGURE\ ASCII Input panel
should look as follows.

9.13 Interfaces - Hidden Point 9.14 Interfaces - GSI/User Out
The Hidden Point interface enables The GSI/User Out interface enables
you to configure the port and device you to export a job with a format file
used for Hidden Point measurements. through a port on the sensor to a total
The port (1,2 or 3) and the device are station or any other device.
displayed. Set the focus on Hidden The port (1, 2 or 3) and the device are
Point and press EDIT (F3) to modify displayed. Set the focus on GSI/ User
the Hidden Point device. Out and press EDIT (F3) to modify the
GSI/ User Out port and device.
If you want to use an external device
set Use Device to YES. If you want to use a GSI/User Out If data is being transferred to a
device set Use Device to YES. Geodimeter total station, then the
Select the port to which the device is Select the port to which the device is total station must be in a mode ready
connected. Use the DEVCE (F5) key connected. Use the DEVCE (F5) key to to receive data.
to configure the device itself. For configure the device itself.
information about all supported SOKKIA devices can only handle
Hidden Point devices refer to Leica TPS300/700, Geodimeter and numeric point IDs. If Renumber is set
Appendix H. Zeiss REC500 total stations as well as to YES, all points are transfered but
the SOKKIA SDR33 datalogger are renumbered starting from 1. If NO is
If no device is connected the Hidden currently supported. selected, only points with numeric
Point measurement may also be point IDs are transfered and point IDs
entered manually. The parameters for When Leica TPS300/700 is selected are shortened to 4 digits, truncating
Hidden Point measurements can be and connected to the GPS receiver, from the right.
configured in CONFIGURE\ Survey, select the Job Number to which job
Point..., Hidden Point. Refer to the data should be sent. The Job
Chapter 5 for further details. Name of existing jobs in the TPS
instrument is displayed. For a new job,
type in a name.

9.15 Interfaces - Remote
The Remote interface enables you to Sensor Transfer with SKI-Pro
configure the Remote control mode
and the device connected to the Using the Remote interface it is
sensor. In most of the cases the possible to download data directly
sensor will be controlled via the from the memory device of the sensor
TR500 connected to the Terminal into SKI-Pro through the serial port of
port. Alternatively a remote computer the PC without having to remove the
can be used to steer the sensor. TR500 from the Terminal port.
For more information on exporting If the Remote mode is set to Terminal Configure the Remote interface to the
ASCII files using a Format file and a command is sent to the sensor appropriate port and device as
template refer to chapter 13.7 via any serial port the sensor auto- described above. This would nor-
Transfer GSI/ User. matically turns on and switches to mally be Port 2 and RS232 device
remote mode. using the standard System 500
download cable.
If the sensor is to be remotely con-
trolled, highlight the Remote interface Connect the sensor to the PC. Data
and select the Port. Press DEVCE can now be downloaded to the PC
(F5) to select the appropraite device using the Sensor Transfer component
from the list. Normally this will be in SKI-Pro in the normal manner.
RS232.
For more information about devices

refer to Appendix H.

9.16 Interfaces - PPS Out
The PPS Out interface enables you
to configure the PPS (Pulse Per The ASCII message takes the following format:
Second) output port and parameters.
This function is available only if the $PLEIR,HPT,sssssssss,nnnn*hh<CR><LF>
necessary hardware exists.
Format Content
Select PPS Out and press EDIT (F3). $PLEIR, Header
HPT, Message identifier (High Precision Time)
Set PPS Out to Yes. sssssssss, GPS time of week of next PPS pulse (in msec)
nnnn GPS week number
Set the PPS Rate at which the pulse *hh Check sum
shall be output. Select between 0.1 - <CR> Carriage return
20 seconds. <LF> Line feed
If an external device is connected to

the sensor an OWI or LB2 message The message will be sent at least 0.5 seconds prior to the next pulse. For
can be transmitted at the time the this reason messages are only sent when the PPS rate is greater than 1sec.
PPS is output. Change Notify msg to
ASCII (OWI) or Binary (LB2) and
press NPORT (F5) to select the port
and device through which the mes-
sage shall be transmitted.

9.17 Interfaces - Event Input
The Limit Error is the time limit The Event Input interface enables Select Event Input and press EDIT
within which PPS shall be generated. you to configure the Event Input ports (F3).
If the time accuracy exceed this value and parameters. This function is
no PPS output is generated. Change available only if the necessary
Limit Error to YES and enter a value hardware exists.
in nanoseconds.
The Event Input port allows direct
The following technical details provide connection to an external device (e.g.
pulse characteristics and cable aerial camera). When this device
connectivity. operates (e.g. the shutter opens), the
time that the event occurred will be
The time pulse has a 3.3V peak recorded in the GPS Select Port 1 or 2 or if you want to
(= High) on a 50 ohm resistance. The measurements. These records can use both at the same time 1 & 2.
pulse length is 25 usec with the later be superimposed on the pro-
leading edge coinciding with the cessed kinematic data and the Select the Polarity according to the
beginning of each epoch. positions where the events took place external device you are using. The
can be interpolated in SKI-Pro. polarity selected effects both ports in
The cable should be matched with an the same way.
appropriate resistance of 50 ohm. In adition to the time stamps, the user
The connector Type is: Huber & can also log positions, velocity and
Suhner FFA.0S.CTAC32Z. quality. Events logged during real time
operations can also be exported to an
ASCII file using an appropriate
Format File and the Sensor Transfer
functionality. Refer to Chapter 13 for
further details.

Press PARAM (F5) to modify Extern Bias - Enables you to define a Scroll down and enter a Description.
additional parameters. calibration value according to the This description will be recorded with
external event device and cable used. the event record. This is particularly
useful if two event input ports are
Time Guard - If two or more events used at the same time in order to
take place during the time (in differentiate between the two event
seconds) defined, only the first event records.
will be recorded. Enter 0 to accept all
events. The shortest recording time is The technical specification for the
1 second, however all events will be Event Input port are as follows:
counted.
Pulse type: TTL, positive or negative
If both event input ports are used If an external device is connected to going pulse
select the Event Port number and set the sensor an OWI or LB2 message Pulse Length: Minimum 125 nsecs
the parameters for each. can be transmitted at the time the Voltage: TTL level (~5V, min. 3.3V)
event takes place. Pin definition: Center = signal,
Info to Log - Select the information case = ground
that shall be logged with the Event To enable messages, change Notify SR530 Connector type:
record. Msg to ASCII (OWI) or Binary (LB2) Huber & Suhner Lemo Typ ll
and press NPORT (F5) to select the FFA.00.250.CTAC327
Bias Intern - Set to User, for setting port and device through which the
your own calibaration value for a message shall be transmitted.
particular sensor. Factory uses
default settings.
Intern Bias - When Bias Intern is set
to User, set a calibration value here
for a particular sensor.

The ASCII message takes the following format:
$PLEIR,EIX,ssssssss,tttttttt,nnnn,cccc,dddd*hh<CR><LF>
Format Content
$PLEIR, Header
EIX, Message identifier = event input “1” or “2”
sssssssss, GPS time of week of event (in msec)
tttttttt, GPS time of week of event (sub msec in nsec)
nnnn GPS week number
cccc Event count
dddd Event pulse count1
*hh Check sum
<CR> Carriage return
<LF> Line feed
1
This is the count of all pulses including those violating the specified time
guard boundary conditions. This allows determination of missed events.

10. Status 10.1 Real-Time Input Status
The Status of all Receiver functions Real-Time Status is available when a 1. Real-Time Rover
can be accessed through the Real-Time reference or Real-Time
STATUS key at any time. rover is being used. The information
available differs with the operation
mode.
The panels below describe what

would be seen when an RTK
reference or rover is being used with
Leica data format. Different data
would be seen if RTCM corrections Data Format - The data format being
were being used or code only data received.
Status is divided into 4 main sub was being transmitted and received. Sats L1/L2 - The number of satellites
menus. on L1/L2 being used in the
computation.
1 Survey - Status of survey related Last recvd - The amount of time
functions. since the last message was received
2 Logs - Logfiles of what has been from the reference station.
recorded. % recvd - The Receiver compares
3 General - Status of hardware and the amount of data received through
firmware. the GPS Antenna with the amount
4 Interfaces - Status of the received from the reference station
interfaces, ports and external and displays this as a percentage.
devices.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 259 10. Status

Press DATA (F3) for information Press AMBIG (F4) for information Press REF (F6) for information about
about the data being received from about the ambiguity resolution pro- the Reference Station.
the satellites. cess.
The Point Id and Antenna Height

Sat - The number of the chosen Each Satellite used in the real-time (Ant Height) of the reference point
satellite computation is displayed with the are displayed.
Phase L1 - The number of phase ambiguity status on each frequency.
cycles from the Antenna to the YES indicates a fixed ambiguity, NO Then either Marker or Antenna is
satellite on L1. that the ambiguity is not yet fixed. displayed, indicating from where the
Phase L2 - The number of phase coordinate is given.
cycles from the Antenna to the
satellite on L2. Press COORD (F2) to view the
Code L1 - The pseudorange to the coordinates in WGS84 Geodetic and
satellite from L1 data. Cartesian formats and local grid
Code L2 - The pseudorange to the coordinates if a Coordinate System is
satellite from L2 data. being used.
10. Status 260 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

10.2 Stop and Go Indicator
2. Real-Time Reference The Stop & Go Indicator gives infor- Static Mode
mation regarding the amount of time
spent on a point and the amount of
time required at a point.
The information displayed differs,

depending on whether you are in
static or moving mode.
Data Format - The data format being Completed - A percentage value

sent. indicating how much data is required
Sats L1/L2 - The number of satellites for successful processing (100%) and
on L1/L2 being used in the how much has been collected. The
computation. criteria used to display this value
Last sent - The amount of time since depend on what has been set in the
the last message was sent. Configuration Set. See explanation
below.
The DATA (F3) and REF (F6) keys
are available. The information Time to Go - If set, a timer showing
displayed there is exactly the same how much time is left before you can
as with a Real-Time Rover. cease observations for this point.
Time at Pt - The amount of time

spent recording at the point.

Cycle Slips - The number of cycle In a Post-Processed Survey, where Positions - The number of real time
slips that have occurred on L1/L2 Auto Stop and/or STOP P-PRC have positions required on each point are
since recording commenced on the been set, the value may be displayed specified.
current point. according to:
Time - A minimum time is specified. Stop and Go Indicator - A baseline
GDOP - The current calculated value Observations - A certain number of length is selected and a percentage
for PDOP or GDOP. observations have been specified. calculated using the baseline length,
Stop and Go Indicator - A baseline number of satellites and GDOP.
Obs Rec Rate - The Observation length is selected and a percentage No. Sats - A length of time is
Recording Rate currently set. calculated using the baseline length, specified that varies with the number
number of satellites and GDOP. of satellites available.
Static Obs - The number of Static No. Sats - A length of time is
Observations (epochs) recorded at specified that varies with the number
this point. of satellites available.
Completed Criteria - If no special In a Real-Time Rover Survey, where

settings have been made in the Auto Stop and/or STOP R-TME have
Configuration Set, the percentage is a been set, the value may be displayed
conservative estimate based on a 10- according to:
15km baseline. This is also the Accuracy - when the specified
default setting for Real-Time accuracy is reached, measurement
Reference Stations. will stop. This is impossible to predict
in percentage terms and so the
default Stop and Go indicator (10-
15km) is displayed.

10.3 Position
Moving Mode Press VELCY (F4) to view velocity
information. Your velocity in the
horizontal and vertical directions is
given together with the bearing for the
horizontal direction.
Press TARGT (F6) to define and

navigate to a target. All functions are
Local Time - The local time is available as in Real Time Point
displayed followed by the time latency Stakeout except for the fact that
5 Sats since - The length of time that to UTC in brackets. positions cannot be recorded.
5 satellites have been observed for. In
Kinematic on the Fly operations, it is The position is then given. Use the When working in advanced rover
important to observe 5 satellites for COORD (F2) key to switch between mode, you may use the BLINE (F3)
about three minutes or so without WGS84 geodetic/Cartesian and local key to see information about the
interruption at the beginning of the coordinates. Note that local baseline. Baseline information,
chain. coordinates are only available if a however, can only be displayed if the
local coordinate set has been defined. reference coordinate is sent as part of
GDOP - The current calculated value the data format used for broad-
for PDOP or GDOP. Accuracy indicators for the current casting.
position in horizontal and vertical
Obs Rec Rate - The Observation components are given.
Recording Rate currently set.
Moving Obs - The number of Moving

Observations (epochs) recorded in
this interval.

In the rover advanced mode, you may Known Point - The origin point of the Origin Id - Available for the methods
also use the GRADE (F5) key. In the grade is a selected known point. Known Point and Last Point. This is
subsequent panel STATUS\ Grade, Last Point - The origin point of the from where the grade is calculated.
information about the grade between grade is the last measured point. With Known Point, select from the list
an origin point and the current rover Distance - The origin point of the of known points in the current job.
position is displayed based on four grade is not a fixed point as it is the With Last Point, the point ID of the
different methods. case with the Known Point or Last last measured point is automatically
Point method. It is updated with the displayed.
current rover position after the rover
has been moved over a certain
distance. The application starts when Distance - Available for the method
a distance has been entered. The Distance. Set a distance in meters
rover position at that time is taken as after which the position of origin is
the first origin from where the grade is updated.
calculated.
Time - The origin point of the grade is Time - Available for the method Time.
According to the update rate, the not a fixed point as it is the case with Set a time intervall in seconds after
individual values are updated the Known Point or Last Point which the position of origin is
automatically. Note that the highest method. It is updated with the current updated.
update rate in this panel is 1 second rover position after a certain time
even though the general update rate interval. The application starts when a
might be set to a value < 1 second. time has been entered. The rover
position at that time is taken as the
To define the method, highlight the first origin from where the grade is
Method field and press ENTER. calculated.

Grade <1:> - Grade between the first Hgt Diff - Orthometric height differ- Bearing - Bearing between the origin
point and the current rover position. ence between the origin point and the point and the current rover position.
current rover position. If the Displayed if the method is Known
grade = 1 : slope = ∆V : ∆H orthometric heights are unavailabel, Point or Last Point.
the height difference refers to the
positive for cut slopes local ellipsoid. Should this not be
negative for fill slopes available either, the WGS84 ellipsoi-
dal is used instead.
Horz Dist - Horizontal grid distance

+ ∆V : ∆H − ∆V : ∆H between the origin point and the
∆V ∆V
current rover position. If local grid
∆H ∆H coordinates are unavailable,
cut slope fill slope thehorizontal distance refers to the
local ellipsoid. Should this not be
available wither, the WGS84 ellipsoid
is used instead.
Grade <%> - Grade between the first Slope Dist - Slope distance between
point and the current rover position in the origin point and the current rover
percent. position in local grid. If local grid is
unavailable, local ellipsoidal coordi-
nates are used instead. Should those
not be available either, the WGS84
ellipsoidal coordinates are used.

10.4 Logging Status
Information about the raw GPS data # DB Pts - Total number of points Size Obs - The memory occupied by
logging is given. contained in the Job’s database, i.e. the raw GPS data in the current Job.
manually recorded points as well as
Auto-Points. Total Size - The memory occupied by
the current Job.
# AUTO Pts - The number of points
that have been recorded automati- Other Jobs - The memory occupied
cally in the current track, i.e. the by all other jobs on the current
current START-STOP sequence. memory device.
Logging - Indicates whether raw Use the FILES (F4) key to view Memory Free - The amount of free
GPS data logging is active or not. information about the logged data memory on the current memory
files. device.
StaticObs/Moving Obs - The num-
ber of Static or Moving observations
(epochs) recorded in this interval. The REF (F6) key is available when
Static or Moving Obs are displayed the Receiver is configured as a real-
depending on the current measuring time rover.
mode.
Pressing this key gives information
All Static Obs - The total number of about the logging status on the
static observations (epochs) recorded Current Job - The name of the Reference station.
in the current Job. currently selected Job.
All Moving Obs - The total number # / Size Pts - The number of and
of moving observations (epochs) memory occupied by the points in the
recorded in the current Job. current Job.

10.5 Satellite Status
Information about the satellites is QI1 & QI2 - The quality indicator of TRACK (F2)
given. the phase measurement reconstruc-
tion is given for L1 (QI1) and L2 (QI2). Allows toggling between elevation/
azimuth and tracking/searching
information.
Sat - The PRN number of each

observed satellite is given.
Sat - The PRN number of each
Elev - The elevation of the satellite observed satellite is given.
above the horizon is given together
with the direction in which it is moving L1 & L2 - The tracking status of each
(rising or setting). satellite. TR = Tracking, SH = search-
ing.
Azi - The azimuth of the satellite is
given. SN1 & SN2 - The signal to noise ratio
on L1 (SN1) and L2 (SN2) is given.
SN1 & SN2 - The signal to noise ratio
on L1 (SN1) and L2 (SN2) is given. QI1 & QI2 - The quality indicator of
the phase measurement reconstruc-
tion is given for L1 (QI1) and L2 (QI2).

HELTH (F4) SKY (F5) the elevation mask back to its original
value.
SYMB (F3) - Toggles the display of

the satellites in the graphic to satellite
symbols.
INFO (F5) - Toggles the displayed

satellite information between tracking
information, Signal to Noise Ratio and
Press cursor down key. Displays a sky plot showing positions Quality Indicator Information.
of the satellites and related informa-
tion of the highest 6 satellites.
On the graphic, north/south corre-

sponds the central vertical line. The
rings show the elevations of 15, 30
and 60° from the outside to the
inside. The satellites are shown in
their relative positions.
The PRN numbers of Bad (unhealthy)
satellites, OK (healthy) satellites and ELE00 (F2) - Sets the elevation mask
satellites for which no data is avail- to 0 for this panel only in order that
able are listed. you may view the satellites below the
cutoff mask. This key then changes
to ELExx which enables you to set

10.6 Point Log Status
REF (F6) A log of all points in the currently PPRC flt ph - Post processed GPS
selected job is displayed in order of phase float position (ambiguities not
This key is available when the Re- time. resolved).
ceiver is configured as a real-time PPRC fix ph - Post processed GPS
rover. phase. Ambiguities fixed.
RTME Code - Real Time GPS
Pressing this key gives information position code only.
about the satellites being tracked at RTME fix ph - Real-Time GPS phase
the Reference station. position. Ambiguities fixed.
GPS RTCM - Real Time GPS
position from RTCM code corrections.
Further information is available by Unknown - Unknown source.
pressing the INFO (F5) key. User enterd - coordinate entered by
user.
The column Crd Source appears and
displays the source of the coordinates Pressing INFO (F5) again reveals the
for each point. CQ (coordinate quality) in and the
coordinate class. The coordinate
Calculated - calculated from other class may be either:
sets of coordinates. E.g. via COGO
routines or averaged. MEAS - Point measured once
GPS Navigtd - GPS navigated AVRG - Point measured more than
position. once and coordinates averaged.
PPRC Code - Post processed GPS CTRL - Point user entered or held
code only. fixed with no accuracy matrix.

10.7 Code Log Status 10.8 Message Log Status 10.9 Memory/Battery Status
The last 5 codes that have been used The last 100 messages displayed on
from the current codelist are the terminal are listed in order of time
displayed. Should you select a (most recent first). This log can only
different codelist for use, this log will be deleted by pressing DEL-A (F4).
be cleared.
Pressing INFO (F5) reveals the time Pressing INFO (F5) reveals the time
at which the code was recorded. and date that the message appeared.
Press cursor down.
PC-Card - Amount of memory

remaining on the PC-card.
Memory Int - Amount of memory
remaining on the internal memory.
Battery A - amount of charge remain-

ing in internal battery A.
Battery B - Amount of charge re-

maining in internal battery B.

10.10 Sensor Status 10.11 Software Version Status
Battery Ext - Amount of charge Displays the Firmware version, the
remaining in the external battery. Boot software of the sensor,
Measurment Engine software,
Bat PC-Card - Battery status of the Measurement Engine Boot software
SRAM PC Card battery. The three and the Firmware for the Keyboard /
status levels are OK, Low and Error. Display (TR500) currently installed.
Note that you should change the PC-
Card Battery when it becomes Low. MORE (F6) provides information on
Failure to do so may result in loss of The Receiver model used and its special software settings.
data. Ensure that any data on the serial number are displayed.
card is backed up before changing
the battery. PC Flash Cards do not Control Mode- Displays the device
use a battery. that is used to control the sensor.
Normally this the TR500.
Bat Backup - Receiver system
backup battery. When this battery Additionally it indicates whether the
becomes low, contact your Leica PPS output and the Event Input
representative to arrange ports are available.
replacement.
In case of a Real-Time Rover you

may press REF (F6) to display the
Memory and Battery Status of the
Reference Station.

10.12 Interfaces Status
Gives an overview of all interfaces To get detailed information on the Event Input - Pressing IFACE (F3)
and the port and device currently status of single interfaces press the allows you to view the Time, Event
assigned for that interface. IFACE (F3) button. Specific status Count and Event Pulse Count for the
information is available for the selected port(s).
For example, a sensor is being used following interfaces.
as a real time rover with a Satelline
radio attached to port 1 and hidden Real-Time - Pressing IFACE (F3)
points are being collected using a allows you to view the Real-Time
DISTO connected to port 2. Input status. For details see chapter
10.1.
The NMEA output and the ASCII
Input are not currently configured. ASCII Input - Pressing IFACE (F3)
allows you to view the ASCII Input
status.
For further details about Status
information for the different devices
please refer to Appendix H.
For this type of operation, the

Interfaces panel would look as shown
above. For each annotation you may either
view the given description or the last
received ASCII string specified by the
Message Id. Toggle between both
views by pressing DATA/DESCR (F3).
11. Applications 11.1 Determining a Coordinate System
Applications contains a number of GPS gives coordinates relative to a approach where the coordinates are
miscellaneous functions that are not global datum known as WGS84. This transformed from the WGS84 Datum
necessarily related. coordinate datum is however to the local ellipsoidal datum and then
relatively new in terms of the length of a map projection is applied to obtain
From within this menu item you may time that people have been giving grid coordinates. Other methods
determine coordinate systems, carry specific points coordinates. The involve transforming the coordinates
out point management functions, WGS84 datum is therefore not used directly from WGS84 into a local grid.
access an on-board calculator, define as the datum for coordinates in the
wake-up sessions and access any of vast majority of countries around the System 500 receivers contain three
the standard and/or optional world. different methods: the Helmert
application programs (assuming the method, the 1-Step method and the
security code has been entered). As surveying developed through the 2-Step method. The method used
centuries, individual countries depends on the results required and
For further description of the optional adopted datums that best suited their the quality and extent of known
Application programs please refer to individual requirements. points.
the appropriate manuals.
Therefore when surveying with GPS,
coordinates are first obtained relative Which method to use?
to the WGS84 datum. These This question largely depends on
coordinates then have to be local conditions and information.
transformed into the local coordinate If you wish to keep the GPS
system. measurements totally homogenous
and the information about the local
There are several methods by which map projection is available, the
this can be done. One is the Helmert Classical 3D approach would be the
most suitable.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 273 11. Applications

For cases where there is no 1. 3D Helmert Transformation:
information regarding the ellipsoid Ellipsoid and Projection must be
and/or map projection and/or you wish known, Geoid information is optional.
to force the GPS measurements to tie
in with local existing control then the 2. 1-Step Transformation: Geoid
One Step approach may be the most information is optional, no other
suitable. information is required.
The 2-Step approach takes the local 3. 2-Step Transformation: Ellipsoid, Coord Sys - Type in a new name for
ellipsoid and map projection into Projection and a Pre-transformation the new coordinate system.
account and can therefore be used for must be known, Geoid information is
larger areas than 1-Step trans- optional. WGS84 Pts - Select the Job from
formations. Compared to the which the points with WGS84
Classical 3D approach it treats coordinates will be taken.
position and height information
separately, which allows for position Local Pts - Select the Job or ASCII
only control points to be used as well. file from which the points with local
coordinates will be taken.
In order to determine a Coordinate
System, you will require the Use LOCAL (F4) to define the source
coordinates of points in both the of the local coordinates (from Job or
WGS84 and local coordinate system. From the Application Menu, select ASCII).
Depending on the type of Determine Coord System and press
transformation you wish to use, you CONT (F1).
may also need details of the map
projection, local ellipsoid and a local
geoidal model program.
11. Applications 274 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Use NEW (F2) to define a new Press CONT (F1) to proceed with the
coordinate system. Note the Coordinate System Determination.
difference between define and
determine. Here you can define a
Coordinate System using an existing
transformation. When you determine
a Coordinate System you also
determine a new transformation using
When ASCII is selected, the ASCII point data.
(F4) key is available. Use this key to
define the format of the ASCII file. If you have known parameters for the
Coord Sys - The name of the
Coordinate System, you may enter
Coordinate System is displayed.
When you have selected the source them directly in
for the local points Press CONT (F1) CONFIG\Survey\Position.
Transform - Define the name of the
until you return to the COORDSYS\ Transformation. By default the same
Determination Begin screen. Use EDIT (F3) to edit the selected
Coordinate System. name as the Coordinate System will
be suggested. Type in a new one if
Use the CSYS (F6) key to view the required.
Use DEL (F4) to delete the selected
list of current Coordinate Systems.
Coordinate System.
Trans Type - Select the type of
Use INFO (F5) to display the date transformation to be determined.
when each coordinate system was Classical is the 3D Helmert type
created. transformation, One Step is a
transformation type where no
Press CONT (F1) to return to the information about local ellipsoid or
COORDSYS\ Determination Begin map projection is required.
screen.
2-Step is a transformation type where Press CONT (F1) to return to Geoid Model - If a Geoid Model is to
information about the local ellipsoid, COORDSYS\Type Selection. be applied, press ENTER and select
map projection and a pre-trans- it from this list.
formation is required. Projection - Available if a Classical
or a 2-Step Transformation Type is
Pre-Transf - Available only if a 2-Step selected. Select the Map Projection
transformation type is selected. It is a from the list or open the list and input
preliminary 3D transformation which the parameters for your local map
is used together with the selected projection, (see box over). When
projection to obtain preliminary grid used for the first time, this list will
coordinates to be used for a final 2D contain only non-standard map
transformation. Select a pre-trans- projections. Geoid Model Field Files can be
formation from the list or open the list exported from SKI-Pro onto the PC-
and enter a new transformation by Non - standard map projections card or internal memory in the
pressing NEW (F2). available include: Data\GPS\Geoid sub-directory. They
Czech and Slovak can either be transfered to the Sys-
Ellipsoid - Available if a classical or a Danish Bornholm tem RAM or be read directly from the
2-Step transformation and a standard Danish Jylland PC- card.
projection type is defined. Select the Danish Sjelland
ellipsoid on which your local coordi- Dutch RD Stereographic Use PCARD (F2) to update the list
nates are based. Open the list and Finnish KKJ with Geoid Model Field Files existing
press DEFLT (F5) to reveal all of the Hungarian on the PC-card.
available ellipsoids. If your ellipsoid is Malaysian
not listed, you may add it to the list by New Zealand To edit the name of the Geoid Model
pressing NEW (F2) and entering the Romania Stereo 70 press EDIT (F3).
parameters. Swiss
Swiss 95
Use INFO (F5) to see where the CSCS Model - If a CSCS Model is to Use INFO (F5) to see where the
geoid model is stored, which ellipsoid be applied, press ENTER and select CSCS model is stored and the date
the model is based on and the date it from this list. and time of creation.
and time of creation.
Use SHIFT + PARAM (F5) to view the
Use SHIFT + PARAM (F5) to view the parameters defining the CSCS Model
parameters defining the Geoid Model Field File.
Field File.
Press CONT (F1) to return to
Press CONT (F1) to return to COORDSYS\Type Selection.
COORDSYS\Type Selection.
For detailed information on CSCS
For detailed information on Geoid CSCS Model Field Files can be Models, please refer to the SKI-Pro
Models, please refer to the SKI-Pro exported from SKI-Pro onto the PC- Online Help.
Online Help. card or internal memory in the
Data\GPS\CSCS sub-directory.They Press CONT (F1) to proceed.
can either be transfered to the
System RAM or be read directly from
the PC- card.
Use PCARD (F2) to update the list

with CSCS Model Field Files existing
on the PC-card.

Defining a map projection
Most map projections conform to a

standard type and will need to be
defined before being used for the
first time.
From the COORDSYS\ Type Enter the name of your projection Points from the two systems with the
Selection screen, open the and select the type of projection. same point Id will be suggested for
Projection list. Although the majority of projections matching by default.
are Transverse Mercator, UTM or
Lambert, a variety are available. If you do not wish to match two
points, highlight the point pair
Input the parameters of your concerned and press MATCH (F5).
projection, not forgetting to scroll This key is also used when
down the complete list and enter all determining a 1-Step or a 2-Step
parameters. transformation and you wish to match
the points in height or position only.
Press DEFLT (F5) to reveal all of the The next step in the process is to To match a new coordinate pair,
available default projections and US match the common points. press NEW (F2) and select the
State Plane Zones. WGS84 and local point to be
matched.
Select NEW (F2) to enter a new
projection set.

New WGS84 points may be mea- To hold a parameter fixed, highlight it.
sured from here using NEWOC (F5). The FIX (F4) key will become
Press CONT (F1) to return to this available. Type in the fixed value. In
panel. order that the parameter is simply not
calculated, enter 0.
To edit an existing coordinate pair,
select the pair and press EDIT (F3). To reset a fixed parameter, in order
Make any necessary adjustments and that it will be calculated, select the
press CONT (F1) to return to this Trans-model - Select the type of parameter and press ADJST (F4).
panel. transformation model you wish to
use. In practice, you will only see Press CONT (F1) to return to the
Use DEL (F4) to unmatch the se- minimal differences in the previous screen.
lected coordinate pair. transformed coordinates between
each model. In principle Molodensky Press CONT (F1) to execute the
When a Classical type transformation - Badekas is more numerically stable transformation calculation.
is being selected, the PARAM (F5) due to the fact that it takes its rotation
key is available after pressing SHIFT. origin from the center of gravity of the
WGS84 coordinates. Bursa - Wolf
This enables you to define the type of takes its centre of gravity from the
transformation model and the origin of the WGS84 datum.
parameters for the transformation.
You may then (if required) either enter
known values for certain parameters
and hold them fixed at those values
or set the values to 0. Parameters
that have the ----- displayed will be
calculated.

Classical Transformation Results 1-STEP/ 2-STEP Transformation
Results
The residuals of the transformation

are displayed. This is the difference
between the transformed WGS84
The Name and Trans formation The transformation is split into a 2D
coordinates and the original
Model (Trans model) used are Helmert transformation for position
coordinates in the local system.
displayed. and a Height Interpolation.
Values that are marked with a star
Then the calculated translation For a 1-Step transformation the
indicate where the highest residuals
parameters are displayed. center of gravity of the points on the
lie.
WGS84 Datum is calculated. A
Shift dX, dY, dZ - Shift along X, Y temporary central meridian is then
Use INFO (F5) to view the height
and Z axes. constructed through this center of
residuals.
gravity and a Transverse Mercator
Rotation X, Y, Z - Rotations about projection applied.
Use RESLT (F3) to view the
transformation calculation result (the X, Y and Z axes.
calculated transformation Scale - Scale factor between the
two datums. continued...
parameters). The information given
will differ with the type of
transformation performed.

For a 2-Step transformation first the Shift H0 - Height of the interpolation Shift dX, dY, Rotation, Scale Factr -
pre-transformation is applied to plane at the point it intersects the Z The position transformation results
obtain auxiliary cartesian coordi- axis. can be edited if required. This may be
nates. Then the specified map Origin X0, Y0 - Coordinates of the necessary in some circumstances
projection is applied on the given center of gravity of points in the where you have computed a One
ellipsoid. auxiliary local grid. Step transformation, but still wish to
For both methods this results in a use a specific scale or rotation for
temporary auxiliary grid. A 2D Use the RMS (F5) key to display example.
Helmert transformation is then calculated accuracies for each of the
performed between the auxiliary grid transformation parameters. Elev Factor - Displays the elevation
and the given local system. factor calculated from the ellipsoidal
Use the SCALE/ ppm (F4) key to height(s) of the common point(s).
The position transformation results switch between ppm and scale factor
are given first. values. Apply Elev - If set to YES the Comb
Factor will be calculated as Scale
Shift dX, dY - Shift along the X and Use the EDIT (F3) key if you wish to Factor x Elev Factor. If set to NO the
Y axes. edit the previously calculated 1-Step Comb Factor will be equal to the
Rotation - Rotation about the Z axis. or 2-Step parameters. Scale Factor of the original calcula-
Scale - Scale factor between the two tion.
datums.
In COORDSYS\ Edit Parameters
Then the Height transformation press ABORT (F5) to go back without
information is given. any changes or press CONT (F1) to
accept the Comb Factor and the
Slope dH/dX / dH/dY - Slope of the other 1-Step/ 2-Step parameters you
height interpolation plane when have changed.
looking along the X or Y axis.
In COORDSYS\ Parameters press transformation. 1/Dist, 1/Dist2 and 1/
CONT (F1) to proceed. Dist3/2 distributes the residuals of the
control points according to the
distance between each control point
and the newly transformed point.
Multiquadratic distributes the
residuals using a multiquadratic
interpolation approach.
The method of distribution is stored
with the new coordinate system.
An overview of the Coordinate
System is given. #Match Pts - The number of
matched points used in the
Coord Sys - The Coordinate System transformation calculation.
name.
Max Res E, N, H - The largest
Trans Type - The type of residual in East, North and Height.
transformation used.
Press CONT (F1) to save the
Residuals - The method by which Coordinate System and return to the
residuals will be distributed Application menu.
displayed.
This may help the transformation
result be more realistic and help
disperse any strains in the

11.2 Adding Points to Existing Coordinate Systems
Points may be added to existing When adding new points manually,
Coordinate Systems. This is useful if the points matched in the previous
you have to measure outside of an parameter calculation are recalled
existing transformation area and and used again, even if they did not
therefore need to extend the area by have matching point Ids. The new
measuring the WGS84 coordinates point(s) have to be selected by you
of a point known in the local system using the NEW (F2) key.
that lies outside of the existing Select the Coordinate System that
transformation area. you wish to include new points in. When AUTO (F5) is pressed, the
Press CONT (F1). coordinates that were matched in the
Measure the new point(s) in the same previous parameter calculation are
job as the other existing points used recalled and used again, even if they
to determine the Coordinate System. did not have matching point Ids. The
new point(s) that have identical point
From Applications select Determine Ids will be matched and included in
Coordinate System. the computation. You are then
presented with the results. Press
CONT (F1) to accept them or, if there
Now you have two choices. You may is a problem, press ESC to return to
either automatically match the new the Determination Begin screen and
points and calculate the new recompute manually.
parameters by pressing AUTO (F5).
Alternatively, you may proceed
manually through the Coordinate
Determination as described in the last
Press CSYS (F6) to list the section.
Coordinate Systems available.

11.3 Point Management
Enables you to manage the points Calc (Grid) - calculated (Grid) from
contained in the currently selected other sets of Coordinates. E.g. via
Job. You may also set a point filter COGO routines.
according to varying criteria. GPS Navigtd - GPS navigated
position.
PPRC Code - Post processed GPS
code only.
PPRC flt ph - Post processed GPS
Each point is displayed with the time phase float position (ambiguities not
and date on which it was recorded. resolved).
Note that automatically recorded PPRC fix ph - Post processed GPS
points will only be displayed if Store phase. Ambiguities fixed.
Select Point Management and press Pt Db is set to YES in the RTME Code - Real Time GPS
CONT (F1). CONFIGURE\ Position Logging panel position code only.
(see chapter 5.4 for details). RTME fix ph - Real-Time GPS phase
Coordinates for the same point position. Ambiguities fixed.
recorded on different datums are GPS RTCM - Real Time GPS posi-
displayed separately. Each point is tion from RTCM code corrections.
displayed with its highest Point Class Unknown - Unknown source.
only. User enterd - WGS84-coordinate
entered by user.
Press INFO (F5) to reveal the Crd User (Grid) - Grid coordinates
Source - the source from which the entered by user.
coordinates were generated.
Calculated - calculated (WGS84)

from other sets of coordinates.

Pressing INFO (F5) again reveals the If the panel shows local grid Additionally, when a Configuration Set
CQ (coordinate quality) and the coordinates you may use the ELL H/ is being used where Advanced mode
coordinate class. The coordinate ORTHO (F5) key to switch between is set, the averaging functionality in
class in ascending order may be: entering orthometric or local Threshold Settings is set to Avg and
ellipsoidal heights. the point contains more than one
MEAS - Point measured once When you have entered the point measurement, the AVRG (F6) key is
AVRG - Point measured more than details press STORE (F1) to store the available.
once and coordinates averaged. point and return to the previous
Regardless of whether Avg or Abs is screen.
selected in the Threshold settings,
points with more than one associated Use EDIT (F3) to view the
measured point will still be shown as coordinates and point annotations of
average here. a selected point or to edit the point ID.
CTRL - Point user entered or held Unless set otherwise, the coordinate
fixed with no accuracy matrix. displayed is that which corresponds
to the highest coordinate class
Use NEW (F2) to enter a new point. available. Press USE (F2) to either select or
Enter the new point Id and the deselect measurements from the
coordinates. Use the COORD (F2) Use the COORD (F2) key to switch averaged coordinate.
key to switch between Coordinate between Coordinate Systems.
Systems. Press DEL (F4) to delete single
Use the INFO (F5) key in the same measurements.
way as in the MANAGE screen to
switch the information displayed When you have finished editing the
about the point. coordinates, press STORE (F1) to
store the point and return to the list of
points of the current job.
When a Configuration Set is being When SHIFT is pressed the JOB (F3)
used where Advanced mode is set, key enables you to change the
the averaging functionality in current job. Note - this function is not
Threshold Settings is set to Abs and available if you access Point
the point contains more than one Management with a Hot-Key.
measurement, then the ABS (F6) key
is available. When SHIFT is pressed the FILT (F6)
key is available along with the stan-
The absolute differences for Easting, dard HOME, END, PG UP and PG
Northing and Height can only be DN keys.
displayed if the survey is carried out
in a local coordinate system. Use FILT (F6) to order the points and
to apply a filter to the points.
An asterisk identifies those which
exceed the threshold settings.
Press USE (F2) to include or exclude CONT (F1) returns you to the previ-
a measurement from calculating the ous screen.
absolute coordinate difference. An
absolute coordinate difference can Press DEL (F4) to delete single
only be calculated between two measurements.
measurements. Sort By - Sets the method by which
CONT (F1) to return to Edit Point the points are ordered. Point Id sorts
Press DIFF (F3) after having set the screen. alphabetically, Time by the time the
use flag for two measurements, to point was calculated and Internal
display the absolute coordinate CONT (F1) returns to the listing of Index by the order in which they are
differences. points of the current job. stored on the memory device.

Filter By - Sets a filter on the points Range of Pt Id’s - Define a start and Coordinate Type - Select the type of
contained in the Job. Used if you only end Point Id. Only points that fall coordinates you wish to make
want to display points belonging to a either alphabetically or numerically available - WGS84 only, Local only or
specific subset. Note that when set, within this range will be available. WGS84 and Local.
the filter also applies to every screen
on the list where you can access the Pt Id Wildcard - Specify a wildcard Code - Select the Code(s) for the
point list. that you wish the point Id to contain. points that you wish to make avail-
E.g. ***NT will look for all points with able. All points that do not have those
No Filter - No filter set. The occupa- 5 characters ending in NT. codes attached will not be available.
tion with the highest class that exists Press CODES (F3) to toggle the use
for each point is displayed. (Class is Only points that contain this wildcard status of individual Codes to YES or
in following descending order: CTRL, will then be available. NO.
AVRG, MEAS).
Time - Specify a start and end date Layer - Select the Layer(s) for the
Radius from Pt - Enables you to filter and a start and end time. Points that points that you wish to make avail-
by selecting a point and all points were recorded outside of this time able. All points that do not have those
within a defined radius from it. window will not be available. Layers attached will not be available.
Press LAYERS (F5) to toggle the use
Closest Pt - Used in Stakeout. When Class - Select a point class. All points status of individual Layers to YES or
selected, finds the closest point to that are not in this class will not be NO.
your current position, then finds the available. Note that when class
closest point to that and so on. The MEAS is selected, points with class
points are then ordered thus so that in AVRG will be split into their MEAS
Stakeout you are always sure that components and be displayed sepa-
you are taking the most efficient rately.
route.

11.4 Calculator 11.5 Wake-up Sessions
By pressing STAKE (F6) you may The Calculator functions according to You may program the Receiver to
select an additonal stake out filter. the RPN principle. This has the automatically start, measure and then
The options No Filter, Points to Stake advantage that complicated shut down again without any
and Staked Points are available. calculations require less keystrokes. interaction from an operator. You may
It is available for any calculation you define several Wake-Up Sessions in
When you have set the required Filter wish to make. order that the Receiver will make
press CONT (F1) to continue. several measurements automatically
one after the other.
Select Wake-up Sessions from the

APPLICATION menu.

If it will be carried out on an unknown
point, leave it set at ---. Define a Point
Id template in the Configuration Set.
Define a name alone, without any
automatic increment if you always
wish the point to have the same point
ID. Define a name with an automatic
increment if you wish the point to
Any existing Wake-up Sessions are Job - Select the job which should be have a different Point ID for each
displayed. used to record the point(s)/data. wake-up session.
Use NEW (F2) to enter a new Wake- Config Set - Select the Configuration Ant Height - Enter the height of the
up Session. Set which should be used. Antenna above the point.
Use EDIT (F3) to edit an existing Start Date - Enter the date when the # Execute - The number of times that
Wake-up Session. Session should start. you wish to repeat this Wake-Up
session.
Use DEL (F4) to delete an existing Start Time - Enter the Start Time
Wake-up session. when the Session should start. Interval - Appears when # Execute is
set to a value greater than 1. Defines
When NEW (F2) is pressed the Duration - Enter the duration of the the time interval that must elapse
following screen appears. Session. between start times of the different
executions of the Session.
Point Id - If the wake-up session will
be carried out on a known point,
select it from the listbox.

11.6 COGO
The COGO functions enable you to Use Offset - Enables you to activate
calculate new points using existing an additional entry field for a parallel
data. This existing data may be offset whenever a line is to be de-
existing coordinates of points, existing fined.
known distances or existing known
angles. Instead of using existing Use Brg. - Enables you to enter and
points from the Job database, points display bearings in the four quadrants
can be measured on the spot and NorthEast, SouthEast, SouthWest
Select COGO from the APPLICA- and NorthWest. If this option is set to
used for computation.
TION menu. YES and a bearing needs to be
In order to use the COGO functions
local grid coordinates must be entered the function key QUAD (F6)
available i.e. a local coordinate enables you to switch between the
system must be defined. Only the quadrants.
COGO function ‘Inverse’ can also
handle coordinate systems that would Press CONT (F1) will bring you to the
not allow the computation of grid COGO menu.
coordinates.
Job - Change the current Job if
necessary.
Change Log File to YES and enter a

File Name if you want to generate a
log file of all the calculations. The file
will be written in the \LOG
subdirectory of the PC card or internal
memory.

Inverse Local coordinate system attached: Press CONT (F1) to return to the
COGO\ Menu.
This function enables you to calculate
the inverse between two grid or two
geodetic points. All coordinates used
in the program can be entered
manually, selected from the database No local coordinate system attached:
or measured.
The Grid Bearing (Azimuth), Grid

Distance and the Height Difference are
displayed.
To display Geodetic Azimuth and

Ellipsoidal Distance press GEOD (F2).
The Geodetic Azimuth, Ellipsoidal
Enter the start point and the end Distance and the Height Difference
point of the line or press NEWOC are displayed.
(F5) to measure new points.
Press COMP (F1) to start the COGO\ Menu.
computation.
To get back to Grid Bearing and Grid

Distance then press GRID (F2).

Input:
P1 - Start point of line
(E, N, h / Lat, Long, h)
P2 - End point of line
(E, N, h / Lat, Long, h)
Output:
α - Grid Bearing / Geodetic Azimuth
d - Grid Distance / Ellipsoidal
Distance
- Height Difference

Traverse Single point computation:
This function enables you to calculate Press COMP (F1) to start the compu-
one or more new points by defining a tation.
start point and entering its distance
and azimuth from the start point.
Easting, Northing and Height of the

new point are displayed.
Enter the start point of the line or Enter a Point Id, change the Height if
press NEWOC (F5) to measure a neccessary. Press STORE (F1) will
new point. Enter the Bearing bring you back to the COGO\ Menu.
(Azimuth), the optional Parallel Offset Input:
and the Horizontal Distance. Instead Alternatively press STAKE (F5) to P1 - Start point of line (E, N, h)
of entering these values manually you switch to the stakeout screen and use α - Bearing (Azimuth)
may calculate them from two existing the coordinates directly for stakeout. d - Horizontal Distance
points by pressing INV (F2).
Output:
P2 - End point of line (E, N, h)

Multiple point computation: The point stored is associated with a Distance. Press TRAV (F3) to con-
traverse execution. Therefore, it is tinue the traverse or SIDE (F4) for a
Press TRAV (F3) to start a sequential suggested as next start point. single side shot.
traverse.
Enter the Bearing (Azimuth), the In the COGO\ Traverse Results

optional Parallel Offset and the panel, Easting, Northing and Height
Easting, Northing and Height of the Horizontal Distance. Instead of of the side shot are displayed. Enter a
first new point are displayed. entering these values manually you meaningful point ID and press
may calculate them from two existing STORE (F1). Again, this leads to the
Press COORD (F2) to toggle points by pressing INV (F2). COGO\ Traverse panel.
between coordinate types.
Pressing TRAV (F3) displays the To add another traverse point or side
Press STAKE (F5) to switch to the results in the COGO\ Traverse shot follow the instructions above.
stakeout screen and use the Results panel. There, press STORE
coordinates directly for stakeout. (F1). To finish the traverse enter the
Bearing (Azimuth), the optional
Alternatively, enter a Point Id and This leads again to the COGO\ Parallel Offset and the Horizontal
change the Height if neccessary. Traverse panel. Enter another Distance for the end point. Press
Press STORE (F1) to store the point Bearing (Azimuth), the optional COMP (F1) followed by STORE (F1)
and continue with the traverse. Parallel Offset and the Horizontal to return to the COGO\ Menu.

Input:
P1 - Start point of line (E, N, h)
α - Bearings (Azimuths)
d - Horizontal Distances
Output:
P2 - First traverse point (E, N, h)
P3 - Second traverse point (E, N, h)
P4 - Third traverse point (E, N, h)
...
Side1 - Side point (E, N, h)

Intersection: Bearing - Bearing Press COMP (F1) to start the compu-
tation.
the intersection point of two lines. The
lines may be defined by a point and a
bearing (azimuth).

intersection point are displayed.
Enter a Point Id, change the Height if

neccessary and press STORE (F1)
Enter the start point of the first line or will bring you back to COGO\ Inter-
press NEWOC (F5) to measure a section.
new point. Enter the Bearing Input:
(Azimuth) and the optional Parallel Alternatively press STAKE (F5) to P1 - Start point of first line (E, N, h)
Offset. Enter the start point of the switch to the stakeout screen and use α - Bearing (Azimuth)
second line together with the Bearing the coordinates directly for stakeout. P2 - Start point of second line (E,N,h)
and Parallel Offset. β - Bearing (Azimuth)
Instead of entering these values
manually you may calculate them
from two existing points by pressing Output:
INV (F2). P - Intersection point (E, N, h)

Intersection: Bearing - Distance Press COMP (F1) to start the
computation.
the intersection point(s) of a line and
a circle. The line is defined by a point
and a bearing (azimuth) and the circle
by the centre point and the radius.

first intersection point are displayed.
To display the second intersection
point press OTHER (F3).

Enter the start point 1 of the line or neccessary and press STORE (F1)
Input:
press NEWOC (F5) to measure a will bring you back to COGO\ Inter-
P1 - Start point of first line (E, N, h)
new point. Enter the Bearing section.
α - Bearing (Azimuth)
(Azimuth) and the optional Parallel
P2 - Centre point of circle (E, N, h)
Offset. Enter the centre point 2 and Alternatively press STAKE (F5) to
r2 - Radius
the radius (Distance) of the circle. switch to the stakeout screen and use
Instead of entering the values the coordinates directly for stakeout.
Output:
from two existing points by pressing
P3 - 1. Intersection point (E, N, h)
INV (F2).

Intersection: Distance - Distance

the intersection point(s) of two circles.
The circles are defined by a the
centre point and the radius.

first intersection point are displayed.
The first intersection point is the point
left of the line P1-P2. To display the
second intersection point press
OTHER (F3).
Enter the point 1 of the first circle or Enter a Point Id, change the Height if
press NEWOC (F5) to measure a neccessary and press STORE (F1)
new point. Enter the optional Parallel will bring you back to the COGO\ Input:
Offset and the radius (Distance). Intersection menu. P1 - Centre point of 1. circle (E, N, h)
Enter the values for the second circle. r1 - Radius
Instead of entering the values manu- Alternatively press STAKE (F5) to P2 - Centre point of 2. circle (E, N, h)
ally you may calculate them from two switch to the stakeout screen and use r2 - Radius
existing points by pressing INV (F2). the coordinates directly for stakeout.
Press COMP (F1) to start the Output:

computation. P3 - 1. Intersection point (E, N, h)

Distance -- Offset

the distance and offset values of an
offset point from a line defined by two
points, the bearing and distance of
the baseline, the location of the offset The Distance along the line and the
point in relation to the baseline and Perpendicular Distance (Offset) are
the bearing from the offset point to displayed.
the baseline. A negative Perp. Dist (Offset)
indicates that the point lies on the left
hand side of the line P1-P2.
A negative Distance indicates that the
point lies behind the start point of the
line P1-P2.
Press MORE (F5) to display the Input:

bearing and the distance from the P1 - Start point of line (E, N, h)
start point to the end point of the P2 - End point of line (E, N, h)
Enter the start and end point of the
baseline, the location of the offset P3 - Offset point (E, N, h)
line or press NEWOC (F5) to
point in relation to the baseline and
measure new points. Enter the offset
the bearing from the offset point to Output:
point.
the baseline. d - Distance
Press COMP (F1) to start the o - Offset (Perpendicular Distance)
computation.
COGO\ Offsets menu.

Set Point by Distance -- Offset Instead of entering the values
This function enables you to calculate from two existing points by pressing
a point by using the distance INV (F2).
(chainage) and offset values from a
line. The line is defined by two points. Press COMP (F1) to start the compu-
tation.
Enter the first and the second point Easting, Northing and Height of the
of the line or press NEWOC (F5) to offset point are displayed.
measure new points. Enter the
Distance along the line and the Enter a Point Id, change the Height if Input:
Perpendicular Distance (Offset). neccessary and press STORE (F1) P1 - Start point of line (E, N, h)
Enter a negative Distance if the point will bring you back to the COGO\ P2 - End point of line (E, N, h)
lies behind the start point of the line Offset menu. d - Distance (Chainage)
P1-P2. o - Offset (Perpendicular Distance)
Enter a negative Perp. Dist (Offset) if Alternatively press STAKE (F5) to
the point lies on the left hand side of switch to the stakeout screen and use Output:
the line P1-P2. the coordinates directly for stakeout. P3 - Offset point (E, N, h)

3 Point Arc

the centre point and the radius of an
arc defined by three points

centre point are displayed. To display
the Radius press MORE (F6).

will bring you back to the COGO\
Enter the three points on the arc or Arcs menu.
press NEWOC (F5) to measure new
points. Alternatively press STAKE (F5) to Input:
switch to the stakeout screen and use P1 - First point on arc (E, N, h)
Press COMP (F1) to start the the coordinates directly for stakeout. P2 - Second point on arc (E, N, h)
computation. P3 - Third point on arc (E, N, h)
Output:
C1 - Centre point of arc (E, N, h)
r - Radius

Distance on Arc

a point on an arc defined by three
points and based on the arc distance.

new point on the arc are displayed.

will bring you back to the COGO\
Enter the three points on the arc or Arcs menu.
press NEWOC (F5) to measure new
points. Enter the Arc Distance starting Alternatively press STAKE (F5) to
from the first point. switch to the stakeout screen and use Input:
the coordinates directly for stakeout. P1 - First point on arc (E, N, h)
Press COMP (F1) to start the P2 - Second point on arc (E, N, h)
computation. P3 - Third point on arc (E, N, h)
b - Distance on Arc
Output:
P - New point on arc (E, N, h)

11.7 Area
The Area function enables you to
calculate an area based upon points
in the database. The area segments
may be defined as lines or arcs. The
nodes along the perimeter of the area
must be defined clockwise.
In order to use the area function, local
grid coordinates must be available i.e.
Job - Change the current Job if To define the segments of a new area
a local coordinate system must be
necessary. or to add additional segments to an
defined.
already existing area press NEW
Area - Select between defining a New (F2). Select the points from the list
Area or modify the Last Area. By and press ADD (F2) after each Node
default the last area definition will (point) or click ARC (F3) to define an
always be retained allowing you to arc. Arcs can be defined by two
modify it. points and a radius or by three points.
Alter-natively you may press NEWOC
Change Log File to YES and enter a (F5) to measure new points. When all
File Name if you want to generate a segments of the area are defined
log file of the area calculation. The file press CONT (F3).
Select Area from the APPLICATION
will be written in the \LOG
menu.
subdirectory of the PC card or To modify the Id of a Node (point) or
internal memory. to change the arc definitions set the
focus on that segment and press
Press CONT (F1) will bring you to the EDIT (F3).
Create Area screen.

11.8 Line Division
Press DEL (F4) to delete an seg- This application allows a line to be
ment. created and then this line can be
segmented creating any number of
To finish the area definition and start points along this line. These points
the calculation press CALC (F1). The can then be staked out if required.
last point is automatically joined with
the first point of the definition and the Access the Line Division application
result is displayed. from the Application menu.
PLOT (F5) displays a praphical
screen showing the outline of the
defined area.

APPLICATION\ Menu.
Choosing this application leads to the

The units as set in CONFIGURE LINE DIV\ Begin panel.
\General\Units are used to display the
results.
Press LIST (F3) or ESC to return to

the Create Area screen and modify
the area definition.

Job – Allows access to the standard Height Def - Allows the definition of Method - Allows a choice between
JOB\ panel with full functionality.The how the heights of the points that will By Segments and By Interval and
job that is shown on entering this be created are computed. The two defines how the chosen line is
panel is the currently active job. choices are Slope and Use Start Pnt segmented.
Select the job containing the points Ht.
from which the line will be created. By Segments means that the
Use Start Pnt Ht means all created number of segments by which the line
Type - Allows the selection between points are given the same height as will be divided can be entered.
the two ways in which a line may be the start point in the chosen line.
defined. The two choices are Start + If By Segments is chosen, the next
Endpoint and Start + Dst + Bg If Type Start + Endpoint has been line in the panel reads Num of Segs
(Startpoint + Distance + Bearing). selected, Slope means that all and a positive integer value may be
Depending on your selection different created points are given a height that entered.
menu items become available. is interpolated between the heights of
the start and the end point for the By Interval means that the interval at
Start + Endpoint means that a Start chosen line. which the new points are created
Point and an End Point have to be along the line can be entered.
given to define the line. Select two If Type Start + Dst + Bg has been
points from the list or enter NEW selected, Slope means that the If By Interval is chosen, the next line
points. height of the interpolated points is in the panel reads Interval and a
determined by the entered Zenith positive integer value may be entered.
Start + Dst + Bg means that a Start angle of the line.
Point as well as an Azimuth and a
Length have to be given to define the
line. Select a start point from the list
or enter a NEW point.

Strt Pnt Id - Allows a point ID to be
entered from which all subsequently
created points from this line division
will be assigned.
PtIDInc/Dec - Allows to enter a

positive or negative integer value
which will be used to create the point
Ids that the newly created points will
be assigned.
The new points will be stored in the

chosen job as user entered grid
points and can then be staked out
using the usual stake-out routines.

12. Utilities 12.1 Directory of Memory Device
The Utilities menu item is revealed by The directory of the currently se- DATA - Contains user defined ASCII
pressing SHOW (F4) from the Main lected memory device is displayed. files including the line definition file
Menu. STK_Line.txt as well as the sub-
directory GPS. GPS contains any
almanac files that have been trans-
ferred from the Receiver as well as
the GEOID, the CSCS and the
RINGBUF sub-directory. GEOID
contains any Geoidal Model files,
CSCS contains any CSCS Field Files
Utilities contains file, memory and If an internal memory is fitted, and RINGBUF contains any Ring
security utilities. DEVCE (F5) will be available. Use Buffer Data files.
this to access the directory of the
internal memory. GEODB - Contains all Job files
including GPS raw data and point
To enter a directory, highlight it and information.
press ENTER. To move up a level
out of a sub-directory, highlight the GPS - Contains any coordinate
double points and press ENTER. system files transferred from the
Receiver as well as the sub-directo-
CODE - Contains all codelist files. ries CONF and PROG. CONF
contains any configuration set files
CONVERT - Contains all format files transferred from the Receiver. PROG
defined in Format Manager. contains Receiver firmware and text
files.
DTM - Contains any DTM stakeout
file to be used with this application.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 307 12. Utilities
12.2 Format Memory Module
GSI - Contains any GSI files created Enables you to reformat a memory If you want to format the Sensor
through the Transfer command on the device. All data will be erased and a System RAM press SYSTM (F5) and
Receiver. fresh directory structure created. confirm twice by pressing (F5).
IDEX - Contains any IDEX files If you format the System

created through the Transfer RAM all system data such as
command on the Receiver. Almanac, User defined
Configuraton Sets, User defined
LOG - Contains any log files Antennas, Codelists, Geoid Model
generated from the optional Field Files and CSCS Model Field
application programs. Files will be lost.
Device - Select the memory device
See Appendix G for further details on you wish to format. Internal is
the directory structure of the memory available when an internal memory
device. module is fitted.
Quick format - Selects the way in

which the formatting is carried out.
When set to YES the data will not be
visible any more but in reality still
exists on the memory device. It will be
overwritten as and when required.
When set to NO all data is really
deleted.
12. Utilities 308 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

12.3 Enter Security Code 12.4 Self Test
The security code is required to A memory self test can be performed
activate optional application on both the PC card and the internal
programs. memory device (if fitted).
Select the application program you The self test will test the chosen
wish to activate and then enter the memory device for bad sectors or
security code supplied by Leica corrupted data and report on the
Geosystems when you purchased result.
the option.
Instructions on how to use each

optional application program are
contained in a separate manual
accompanying the security code.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 309 12. Utilities

13. Transfer 13.1 Job 13.2 Config Set
Transfer enables you to transfer all Enables you to Transfer a Job be- Enables you to transfer Configuration
types of data between different data tween PC Card and Internal Memory. Sets between Sensors and PC Cards.
devices on the Receiver. Transfer of
data to SKI-Pro is carried out from
within SKI-Pro.
Select Transfer from the Main Menu.
Select From where you wish to Select From where you wish to
transfer the Job. The device To which transfer the Configuration Set. The
the Job will be transferred will auto- device To which the Configuration Set
matically selected. will be transferred will be automati-
The following screen appears. cally selected.
Job - Select the Job to be trans-
ferred. Press ALL (F3) to select all Config Set - Select the Configuration
the Jobs. Set to be transferred. Press ALL (F3)
to select all the Configuration Sets.
MORE (F6) enables you to define
which data to transfer. Select from
Points and Obs, Points only or Obs
only.
13. Transfer 310 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

13.3 Coordinate System 13.4 Antenna Info 13.5 Codelist
Enables you to transfer Coordinate Enables you to transfer Antenna Info Enables you to transfer Codelists
Systems between Sensors and PC Records between Sensors and PC between Sensors and PC Cards.
Cards. Cards.
Select From where you wish to Select From where you wish to Select From where you wish to
transfer the Coordinate System. The transfer the Antenna Info Record. The transfer the Codelist. The device To
device To which the Coordinate device To which the Antenna Info which the Codelist will be transferred
System will be transferred will be Record will be transferred will be will be automatically selected.
automatically selected. automatically selected.
Codelist - Select the Codelist. Press
Coord Sys - Select the Coordinate Antenna - Select the Antenna Info ALL (F3) to select all the Codelists.
System to be transferred. Press ALL Record. Press ALL (F3) to select all
(F3) to select all the Coordinate the Antenna Info Records.
Systems.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 311 13. Transfer

13.6 ASCII/GSI to Job
Enables you to convert an ASCII file
into a Job.
The reason to convert an ASCII file to Example for an ASCII file in GSI8 format:
a job is mainly for Stake Out. When
staking points there are many advan-
110001+00000015 81..00+64340360 82..00+52962354 83..00+00000689 71....+000sheep
tages to stake out points stored in a
72....+000black 73....+0000DEAD 74....+23102001 75....+0011h02m
job rather than staking from an ASCII
file. For example, points stored in a
job can be filtered and sorted, indi-
vidual points can be found more
quickly and so on.
The ASCII file may be in a simple The converted points will be added attributes are attached to the point in
Format (e.g. Pt Id, East, North, to the Job database. Points are the GSI file, the program then
Height) or in GSI8 or GSI16 format always imported with the point class performs a subsequent check. It
(e.g. Pt Id, East, North, Height, Code, controll. If a point already exists in prompts when a code or attribute
Attributes). In all cases, the imported the database with the point class value is different.
height can be selected to be controll, the program will prompt you
orthometric or ellipsoidal. Codes and to overwrite it or not. If a point
attributes can be imported with GSI8 already exists in the database with
and GSI 16. This is restricted to the point class measured, the
thematical coding, which uses WI71 program will prompt you to add the
for code IDs and WI72 to 79 for point that is to be imported as
attribute values. controll point. If this is answered with
yes and codes and possibly

When ASCII File is selected, the Height Pos - Sets the position of the
ASCII (F4) key becomes available. height.
Use this to define the format of the
ASCII file. Use the DEFLT (F5) key to reset the
format to its original values.
Define the delimiter used to separate
the information for each point and
Select the file Type of the source file. then define the position of each
GSI File or ASCII File. The file must component of each point. An example
be located in the \GSI directory for of what you have defined is given at
GSI files and in the \DATA directory the bottom of the screen.
for ASCII files.
Select the file From which you want Delimiter - Sets the character used previous screen.
to convert and the Job To which the to separate the various point compo-
points shall be added. nents. Choose from Comma (,), Line When GSI File is selected, a GSI
Feed (new line), Semicolon (;), and coordinate switch may be defined.
Hgt Type - Visible in Advanced mode Space (blank). This is necessary in case of “left
only. Allows the point to be imported handed” coordinate systems. The
as either height type Ortho or ID Pos - Sets the position of the Point WI81 value (normally the easting
Ellipsoidal. Ortho is the default Id. value) is then imported as the
option. If Ellipsoidal has been northing and the WI82 value
selected then this setting is East Pos - Sets the position of the (normally the northing value) as the
remembered until the sensor is easting. easting.
turned off.
North Pos - Sets the position of the
northing.

13.7 GSI / User
Enables you to convert a Job into an Format Files need to be stored in the
ASCII file using a Format file. Format System RAM of the sensor. Press
files define the format of the final FORMT (F3) to transfer them from
ASCII file and are created using Leica the directory \CONVERT of the PC
Format Manager software. Card or internal memory to the
System RAM or vice versa.
Use SHIFT - LHS (F3) to define the If PC-card or Internal has been
GSI coordinate switch. selected as the desired device you
Switch 81/82 - YES activates the have to specify the Destination and
coordinate switch. the File name:
Destinatn - Select the type of file that

Select From which device you wish to will be written. This specifies where
select a Job and To which device you the file will be written.
wish to store the ASCII file.
File - Specify the file name and
The ASCII file can either be written to extension.
the PC-card/ Internal Memory or,
Press CONT (F1) to return to the alternatively, to another device via a If To Instrument has been chosen you
previous screen. serial port. have to specify the Port and the
Device.
Job - Select the Job from which you
wish to write the data.
Format - Select the Format File that

you wish to use.

When Leica TPS300/700 is selected
and connected to the GPS receiver,
select the Job Number to which job
the data should be sent. The Job
Name of existing jobs in the TPS
instrument is displayed. For a new
job, type in a name. When transfering
Press IFACE (F5) and set Use into an existing TPS job, all fixpoints The SDR33 must be ready to receive
Device to YES. in that job are deleted during transfer. data before starting the transfer on
System500. Jobs are transfered with
If data is being transferred to a the same name as on System500.
Geodimeter total station, then the
total station must be in a mode ready It is necessary to use the correct
to receive data. format file when transferring data to a
total station.
SOKKIA devices can only handle 4
digit numeric point IDs. If Renumber Press FILT (F6) if you wish to transfer
is set to YES, all points are transfered a selection of points only. For more
Select the port to which the device is
but renumbered starting from 1. If NO information about the filter settings
connected. Use the DEVCE (F5) key
is selected, only points with numeric please refer to 11.3 Point
in the CONFIGURE\ GSI/User Out
point IDs are transfered and point IDs Management.
panel to configure the device itself.
are shortened to 4 digits, truncating
from the right. Press CONT (F1) to transfer the file.
Leica TPS300/700, Geodimeter and
Zeiss REC500 total stations as well The number of exported points will
as the SOKKIA SDR33 datalogger then be displayed.
are currently supported.

13.8 Geoid Field File 13.9 CSCS Field File 13.10 Firmware
Enables you to transfer Geoid Field Enables you to transfer CSCS Field Enables you to transfer Receiver
Files between Sensors and PC Files between Sensors and PC firmware from the PC Card to the
Cards. Cards. Sensor.
Select From where you wish to Select From where you wish to Version - Select the firmware version
transfer the Geoid Field File. The transfer the CSCS Field File. The that you wish to transfer.
device To which the Geoid Field File device To which the CSCS Field File
will be transferred will be will be transferred will be Note that for PC Card capacity
automatically selected. automatically selected. reasons, the firmware is available in
separate sections as well as one file.
If you transfer a Geoid Field File If you transfer a CSCS Field File
From the PC-Card To the Sensor From the PC-Card To the Sensor This enables different sections to be
then a Geoid model will be then a CSCS model will be uploaded via the PC Card if the
automatically created. automatically created. complete file will not fit on the PC
Card.
Geoid File - Select the Geoid Field CSCS File - Select the CSCS Field
File. Press ALL (F3) to select all the File. Press ALL (F3) to select all the
Geoid Field Files. CSCS Field Files.

13.11 Firmware TR500 13.12 Language Version 13.13 Application Text
Enables you to transfer Terminal Enables you to transfer Local Enables you to transfer a language
firmware from the PC Card through Language files of the system software file for the optional Application
the Sensor to the Terminal. to the Sensor from a PC Card. programs from the PC Card to the
Sensor.
Version - Select the firmware version Version - Select the language version Version - Select the Language File
that you wish to transfer. that you wish to transfer. for the optional Application program.

13.14 Almanac 13.15 Account File 13.16 CFC Log Mask File
Enables you to transfer GPS Satellite Enables you to transfer a Telemax Enables you to transfer a Cultivated
Almanac Files to the Sensor from a Account File between PC Card and Field Control Log Mask File between
PC Card. Sensor. PC Card and Sensor.
Almanac - Select the Almanac that Select From where you wish to Select From where you wish to
you wish to transfer. transfer the Account file. The device transfer the CFC Log Mask File. The
To which the Account file will be device To which the CFC Log Mask
transferred will automatically be File will be transferred will be auto-
selected. matically selected.
File – Select the Account file to be Log Mask - Select the Log Mask.
transferred. Up to two files may be Press ALL (F3) to select all the Log
selected on each sensor. Since Mask Files available.
Account files are sensor specific only
the appropriate files will be indicated
to you for selection. Press ALL (F3)
to select both files at once.

13.17 Beacon Station List 13.18 Modem/GSM Station List 13.19 System
Enables you to transfer a Beacon Enables you to transfer Modem/GSM Enables you to transfer the complete
Station List between PC Card and Station details between PC Card and System RAM between PC Card and
Sensor. Sensor. Sensor in a file called Sysram.sys.
This includes:
– All information from the Config Sets

– Coordinate Systems
– Format Files
– Codelists
– Language Files
Select From where you wish to Select From where you wish to – Application Text Files
transfer the Beacon Station List. The transfer the Modem/GSM Station List.
The device To which the Modem/
– Almanac
device To which the Beacon Station
List will be transferred will be GSM Station List will be transferred – Telemax Account Files
automatically selected. will be automatically selected. – CFC Log Mask Files
– Beacon Station List
File - Select the beacon.txt file. File - Select the Stations.bin file.
When uploading a Sysram.sys file to
a receiver, all existing settings on the
receiver will be overwritten.

13.20 Any File Type
Enables you to transfer any file
between the DATA directories on the
memory devices.
Select From where you wish to

transfer the file. The device To which
the file will be transferred will be
selected automatically.
Select From where you wish to
transfer the File. The device To which
File - Other namings than
the File will be transferred will be
Sysram.sys are not allowed.
automatically selected.
File - Select the File. Press ALL (F3)

to select all the Files.

Appendix A - Operating and Storage Temperatures
Component Operation Storage
Receiver -20°C to +55°C -40°C to +70°C
Terminal -20°C to +55°C -40°C to +70°C
Antenna -40°C to +75°C -40°C to +75°C
PC Flash Cards -20°C to +75°C -40°C to +75°C
Internal Memory -20°C to +55°C -40°C to +70°C
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 321 Appendix A

Appendix B - Observation Times
Obs. Method No. sats. GDOP< 8 Baseline Length Approximate observation time
By day By night
Rapid Static 4 or more Up to 5 km 5 to 10 mins 5 mins

4 or more 5 to 10 km 10 to 20 mins 5 to 10 mins
5 or more 10 to 15 km Over 20 mins 5 to 20 mins
Static 4 or more 15 to 30 km 1 to 2 hours 1 hour

4 or more Over 30 km 2 to 3 hours 2 hours
Appendix B 322 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix C - Seismic Record Format
Seismic records may be generated and saved along with Record Content Description
the point information. They take the following format: @ Record Flag. @ = Automatically stored (not user
entered).
GSE Record Type. GSE = GPS SEismic.
@,GSE,V,M,gg.g,pp.p,hh.h,vv.v,aaa.aaa,ss,eee,ii,REC,RSN Version Version number of this record.
M Position type. Range 0,1,2,3,4. Default if none
available - 0
0 - position not available
1 - navigated position
Example 2 - differential code position
3 - differential phase, float solution
@GSE12 4.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.220 5 1 2SR530 001899 4 - differential phase, fixed solution
gg.g GDOP value. Range 0.0 to 99.9. Default if not
available - 0.0.
pp.p PDOP value. Range 0.0 to 99.9. Default if not
available - 0.0.
hh.h HDOP value. Range 0.0 to 99.9. Default if not
available - 0.0.
vv.v VDOP value. Range 0.0 to 99.9. Default if not
available - 0.0.
aaa.aaa Antenna Height - sum of instrument height and
antenna offset. Range -99.9 to 999.99. Default if not
available - 0.0.
ss Number of satellites used for solution. Range 0 to 12.
Default if not available - 0.
eee Number of epochs spent on point. Range 0 to 999.
Default if not available - 0. Default if not available-0.
ii Length of interval between epochs (seconds). Range
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 30, 60. Default if not
available - 0.
REC Receiver type. Range SR299, SR399, SR299E,
SR399E, SR9400, SR9500, SR510, SR520, SR530,
GS50
RSN Receiver serial number. Range 0 - 999999. Value if
unavailable - 0.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 323 Appendix C

Appendix D - Defined Line File Format
Lines that have been defined in Stakeout are stored in the Record Format Description
file STK_Line.txt in the data directory of the memory @< Start of first line of record
device. Up to 100 lines may be stored in this file. ID Line ID, 16 characters
xxxxx.xxx Start Point Easting

Line records take the following format, separator is a
space, but no space after @< and @>. The linear unit is yyyyy.yyy Start Point Northing
Meter and the angular unit is Gon. hhh.hhh Start Point Orthometric Height
@> Start of second line of record

@<ID xxxxx.xxx yyyyy.yyy hhh.hhh Line definition type:
@>LD LDD LD
1 - Endpoint Easting, Northing, Height
2 - Distance, Bearing, %V
3 - Distance, Bearing, H/V
4 - Distance, Bearing, V/H
5 - Distance, Bearing, Hgt Diff
LDD Line definition values. Depend on LD, as
shown above.
1
} }2 64473 44
8 64 474 44
8 647 548
@< ID xxxxx.xxx yyyyy.yyy hhh.hhh
@{> LD
{ LDD
{
6 7 8
Appendix D 324 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Appendix E - NMEA Message Formats
The Receiver can output a variety of NMEA messages. GLL - Geodetic Position - Latitude/Longitude
These can be set using the CONFIG key or may be GNS - GNSS Fix Data
steered from a connected device using a query message. GSA - GPS DOP and Active Satellites
GSV - GPS Satellites in View
Note that a Talker ID appears at the beginning of the LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP
header. This is normally GP for GPS but may be set by LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality
the user in CONFIG\NMEA. VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed
ZDA - Time and Date
The query message format is the same for every NMEA
2
message apart from the message identifier. Port from which NMEA message is requested:
1 - Port 1
Format Content 2 - Port 2
$PLEIQ, Header, message sent from Outside 3 - Port 3
World.
3
XXX, Message Identifier1 Output rate of NMEA Message
x, Port2 0 - Output off 11 - 12 s 21 - 10 min
x Output Rate3 1 - 0.1 s (10Hz) 12 - 15 s 22 - 12 min
*hh Checksum 2 - 0.2 s (5Hz) 13 - 20 s 23 - 15 min
<CR> Carriage Return 3 - 0.5 s (2Hz) 14 - 30 s 24 - 20 min
<LF> Line Feed 4-1s 15 - 1 min 25 - 30 min
5-2s 16 - 2 min 26 - 1 h
1
Message Identifiers are: 6-3s 17 - 3 min 200 - Output
GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data 7-4s 18 - 4 min immediately
GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP 8-5s 19 - 5 min
GGK (PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP 9-6s 20 - 6 min
GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ 10 - 10 s
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 325 Appendix E

In the listing of NMEA messages, certain symbols are
used as identifier for the field types. They are:
Special Format Fields
A Status Single character field: hhmmss.ss Time Fixed / Variable length field:
A = Yes, Data Valid, Warning Flag Clear hoursminutesseconds.decimal - 2 fixed
V = No, Data Invalid, Warning Flag Set digits of hours, 2 fixed digits of
llll.ll Latitude Fixed / Variable length field: minutes, 2 fixed digits of seconds and
degreesminutes.decimal - 2 fixed digits a variable number of digits for decimal-
of degrees, 2 fixed digits of minutes fraction of seconds. Leading zeros are
and a variable number of digits for always included for hours, minutes
decimal-fraction of minutes. Leading and seconds to maintain fixed length.
zeros are always included for degrees mmddyy Date Fixed length field:
and minutes to maintain fixed length. monthdayyear - 2 fixed digits for
yyyyy.yy Longitude Fixed / Variable length field: month, 2 fixed digits of day, 2 fixed
degeesminutes.decimal - 3 fixed digits digits of year. Leading zeros always
of degrees, 2 fixed digits of minutes included for month, day and year to
and a variable number of digits for maintain fixed length.
decimal-fraction of minutes. Leading Defined Field Some fields are specified to contain
zeros are always included for degrees pre-defined constants, most often
and minutes to maintain fixed length. alpha characters. Such a field is
eeeeee.eee Grid Easting Fixed length field: indicated by the presence of one or
At the most 6 fixed digits for meters more valid characters. Excluded from
and 3 fixed digits for decimal fractions the list of allowable characters are the
of meters. following that are used to indicate
nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing Fixed length field: other field types: A, a, c, x, hh,
At the most 6 fixed digits for meters hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, yyyyy.yy.
and 3 fixed digits for decimal fractions
of meters.
Appendix E 326 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data
Numeric Value Fields Format Content
$GPGGA, Header, incl. Talker ID, message sent from
x.x Variable numbers Varaible length integer or floating Receiver
numeric field. Optional leading and hhmmss.ss, UTC time of Position
trailing zeros.
llll.ll, Latitude
a, Hemisphere “N”/“S”
(example: 73.10 = 73.1 = 073.1 = 73)
yyyyy.yy, Longitude
hh_ Fixed HEX field Fixed length HEX numbers only a, “E”/“W”
x, GPS Quality Indicator
Information Fields 0 = fix not available or invalid
1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix
2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed
c--cVariable text Variable length valid character field
3 not existing
aa_ Fixed alpha field Fixed length field of upper-case or
4 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixed
lower-case alpha characters xx, Number of satellites in use, 00-12
xx_ Fixed number field Fixed length field of valid characters x.x, HDOP
x.x, Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level.
Note, if no orthometric height is available the
local ell. height will be exported. If the local ell.
height is not available either, the WGS84 ell.
height will be exported.
M, Units of altitude meters (fixed text “M”)
x.x, Geoidal separation
M, Units of geoidal separation meters (fixed text
“M”).
x.x, Age of differential GPS data, null when DGPS
not used
xxxx Differential Reference Station ID, 0000-1023
*hh Checksum
<CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed

GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP
Format Content This message type is Trimble proprietary.
$GPGGK, Header, incl. Talker ID,message sent from
Receiver Content
Format
GGK Sentence Formatter
$PTNL,GGK, $ Start of sentence delimiter
hhmmss.ss, UTC of Position Fix
— TALKER ID, fixed with PTNL
mmddyy, UTC date GGK Sentence Formatter
llll.ll, Latitude hhmmss.ss, UTC of Position Fix
a, Hemisphere “N”/“S” mmddyy, UTC date
yyyyy.yy, Longitude llll.ll, Latitude
a, “E”/“W” a, Hemisphere “N”/“S”
x, GPS Quality Indicator yyyyy.yy, Longitude
0 = fix not available or invalid a, “E”/“W”
1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix x, GPS Quality Indicator
0 = fix not available or invalid
xx, 1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix
Number of Satellites in Use
(Common satellites between ref and rover,
Values between 00 to 12, may be different xx, Number of Satellites in Use
from the number in view)
x.x, (Common satellites between ref and rover,
GDOP
EHT Values between 00 to 12, may be different
Ellipsoidal height
x.x, from the number in view)
Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level. x.x, PDOP
Note, if no orthometric height is available the EHT Ellipsoidal height
local ell. height will be exported. If the local ell. x.x, Altitude above/below mean sea level for
position of marker. Note, if no orthometric
M height is available the local ell. height will be
Units of altitude meters (fixed text “M”)
*hh exported.
Checksum M
<CR> Units of altitude meters (fixed text “M”)
Carriage Return *hh
<LF> Checksum
Line Feed <CR> Carriage Return
<LF> Line Feed

GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ GLL - Geodetic Position - Latitude, Longitude
Format Content Format Content
$GPGGQ, Header, incl. Talker ID,message sent from $GPGLL, Header, incl. Talker ID,message sent from
Receiver Receiver
GGQ Sentence Formatter llll.ll, Latitude
hhmmss.ss, UTC of Position Fix a, Hemisphere “N”/“S”
mmddyy, UTC date yyyyy.yy, Longitude
llll.ll, Latitude a, “E”/“W”
a, Hemisphere “N”/“S” hhmmss.ss, UTC time of position
yyyyy.yy, Longitude A, Status1
a, “E”/“W” A = Data valid
x, GPS Quality Indicator V = Data not valid
0 = fix not available or invalid a Mode Indicator1
1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix A = Autonomous mode
2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed D = Differential mode
3 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixed N = Data not valid
xx, Number of Satellites in Use *hh Checksum
(Common satellites between ref and rover, <CR> Carriage Return
Values between 00 to 12, may be different <LF> Line Feed
from the number in view)
x.x, Coordinate Quality
EHT Ellipsoidal height
x.x, Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level. 1
The Mode Indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field
Note, if no orthometric height is available the is set to A for the Mode Indicators A and D. The Status field is set to V
local ell. height will be exported. If the local ell. for the Mode Indicator N.
M Units of altitude meters (fixed text “M”)
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed

GNS - GNSS Fix Data GSA - GPS DOP and Active Satellites
Format Content Format1 Content
$XXGNS, Header, message sent from Receiver. XX=GP $GPGSA, Header, incl. Talker ID,message sent from
- GPS only, XX=GL - GLONASS only, XX=GN- Receiver
Combined GPS/GLONASS a, Mode
hhmmss.ss, UTC time of position M = Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D
llll.ll, Latitude mode
a, Hemisphere “N”/“S” A = Automatic, allowed to automatically switch
yyyyy.yy, Longitude 2D/ 3D
a, “E”/“W” x, Mode
c--c, Mode Indicator 1 = Fix not available
N = No Fix 2 = 2D
A = Autonomous. GPS Nav Fix 3 = 3D
D = Differential. DGPS Fix xx, PRN numbers of satellites used in solution
P = Precise Nav (no deliberate degradation (this format is repeated 12 times and null for
such as SA) unused fields)
R = Real Time Kinematic. RTK Fix x.x, PDOP
F = Float RTK. x.x, HDOP
xx, Number of satellites in use, 00-99 x.x VDOP
x.x, HDOP of all satellites used in computation *hh Checksum
x.x, Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level, <CR> Carriage Return
meters. Note, if no orthometric height is <LF> Line Feed
available the local ell. height will be exported.
If the local ell. height is not available either, the
WGS84 ell. height will be exported.
x.x, Geoidal separation, meters
x.x, Age of Differential GPS Data, null when GPS 1
Example:
not used. $--GSA,a,x,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,
xxxx Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023 x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed

GSV - GPS Satellites in View LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP
$GPGSV, Header, incl. Talker ID, message sent from $GPLLK, Header, incl. Talker ID,message sent from
Receiver Receiver
x, Total number of messages, 1 to 3 hhmmss.ss, UTC time of position
x, Message number, 1 to 3 mmddyy, UTC date
xx, Total number of satellites in view eeeeee.eee, Grid Easting, meters
xx, Satellite PRN number M, Meter (fixed text “M”)
xx, Elevation, degrees, 90° maximum nnnnnn.nnn, Grid Northing, meters
xxx, Azimuth, degrees True, 000 to 359 M, Meter (fixed text “M”)
xx SNR (C/No) 00-99 dB, null when not tracking x, GPS Quality
....., 2nd-3rd SV 0 = fix not available or invalid
xx, 1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix
xx, 4th SV 2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed
xxx, 3 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixed
xx xx, Number of satellites used in computation
*hh Checksum x.x, GDOP
<CR> Carriage Return x.x, Altitude above/below mean sea level for
<LF> Line Feed position of marker. Note, if no orthometric
height is available the local ell. height will be
exported.
Note M Meter (fixed text “M”)
*hh Checksum
- Satellite information may require the transmission of <CR> Carriage Return
multiple messages. The first field specifies the total <LF> Line Feed
number of messages, minimum value 1. The second field
identifies the order of this message (message number),
minimum value 1.
- A variable number of “PRN-Elevation-Azimuth-SNR” sets
are allowed up to a maximum of four sets per message.
Null fields are not required for unused sets when less than
four sets are transmitted.

LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed
$GPLLQ, Header, incl. Talker ID,message sent from $GPVTG Header, incl. Talker ID,message sent from
Receiver Receiver
hhmmss.ss, UTC time of position x.x, Course over ground, degrees (0.0° to 359.9°)
mmddyy, UTC date T, True (fixed text “T”)
eeeeee.eee, Grid Easting, meters x.x, Course over ground, degrees (0.0° to 359.9°)
M, Meter (fixed text “M”) M, Magnetic (fixed text “M”)
nnnnnn.nnn, Grid Northing, meters x.x, Speed over ground
M, Meter (fixed text “M”) N, Knots (fixed text “N”)
x, GPS Quality x.x Speed over ground
0 = fix not available or invalid K, Km/h (fixed text “K”)
1 = No Realtime position, navigation fix a Mode Indicator
2 = Realtime position, ambiguities not fixed A = Autonomous mode
3 = Realtime position, ambiguities fixed D = Differential mode
xx, Number of satellites used in computation N = Data not valid
x.x, Coordinate Quality *hh Checksum
x.x, Altitude above/below mean sea level for <CR> Carriage Return
position of marker. Note, if no orthometric <LF> Line Feed
height is available the local ell. height will be
exported.
M Meter (fixed text “M”) Note - The Magnetic declination is set in the Receiver
*hh Checksum using the CONFIG key.
<LF> Line Feed

ZDA - Time and Date
Format Content
$GPZDA, Header, incl. Talker ID,message sent from
Receiver
hhmmss.ss, UTC time
xx, UTC Day, 01 to 31
xx, UTC Month, 01 to 12
xxxx, UTC Year, 1997 to ...
xx, Local zone description, hours (-13 to 13) (±)
xx Local zone description, minutes (00 to 59)
*hh Checksum
<LF> Line Feed
Note - This message is given high priority and is output as

soon as it is created. Latency is therefore reduced to a
minimum.

Appendix F - Pin Assignments and Sockets
Port 1 Port2/PWR Port 3 Terminal PWR

Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function
1 RTS 1 Bat1) 1 RTS 1 KDU_ON 1 Bat1)
2 CTS 2 +12V2) 2 CTS 2 KDU_PWR 2 +12V2)
3 GND 3 GND 3 GND 3 GND 3 GND
4 Rx 4 Rx 4 Rx 4 Rx 4 ---
5 Tx 5 Tx 5 Tx 5 Tx 5 ---
6 Vmod 6 Vmod
7 Bat1) 7 Bat1)
8 +12V2) 8 +12V2)
Appendix F 334 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

1) Input into sensor Sockets
2) Output out from sensor
Port 1 and 3:
Lemo FGA.1B.308.CLCD.x2Z
Port 2, PWR:
Lemo FGG.1B.305.CLCx.xxZ
Event:
Lemo ERN.0S.250.CTL
PPS:
Lemo HGP.00.250.CTL
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 335 Appendix F

Appendix G - Data Device Directory Structure
The following structure refers to PC Cards and Internal Memory. It shows where files are stored for transfer to and from
the System RAM and where data is stored.
CODE All Codelists
CONVERT All Format files from Format Manager

Cultivated Field Control Log Mask File
DATA User-defined ASCII files

STK_Line.txt (Line Definition File)
Point Files
GPS Alamanac files
DTM DTM Stakeout file GEOID Geoid Model Field files
GEODB All Jobs CSCS CSCS Field Files

Coordinate System Files
RINGBUF Ring Buffer Files
(RS500)
Appendix G 336 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

GPS Antenna Info Record Files
beacon.txt (Beacon Station List)
Stations.bin (Modem / GSM Station List)
CONF Configuration Sets
PROG Firmware Files

Language Files
Sysram.sys (System RAM file)
SERVICES Telemax Accountfiles
GSI GSI Files
IDEX IDEX Files
LOG Log Files from Application Programs
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 337 Appendix G

Appendix H - External Devices
Interfaces Devices Certain devices may be used with
An interface should be considered as A device should be considered as one or more interfaces. For example,
a function of the sensor. For example, both the hardware which is used in a radio modem can be used to
Real-Time is one function that can be connection with an interface and the receive Real-Time Reference data
activated on the sensor, Hidden Point parameters that allow the hardware to but a second radio modem could also
is another function and so on. communicate with the sensor. be used to simultaneously output
NMEA messages.
System 500 supports the following The devices that are supported by the
interfaces: sensor can be divided into the follow- Note:
ing groups: The PPS Output and the Event Input
Real - Time Input/Output are optional interfaces that require
NMEA Output RS232 special hardware (ports) and devices
ASCII Input Radio modem devices which are not described here. Please
Hidden Point Input GSM refer to the respective chapters in
Meteo Modem devices section 9 of this manual.
Tilt RTB Module (CSI)
GSI/ User Out RTS Module (Racal)
Remote Control SAPOS
PPS Output Hidden Point devices
Event Input
Each interface may be controlled by

one or more Devices.
For further details on the interfaces

Tilt and Meteo see App. J.
Appendix H 338 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

RS232
Port 1, 2 and 3 of the Sensor are Enter a name and change the para-
standard RS232 interfaces. If you are meters according to the specification
using an external device that is not of your external device.
directly supported you may use the
default RS232 configuration.
By default a standard RS232 device

is available in the list.
RS232 - Standard parameters with

9600 baud rate.
Press CONT (F1) to store the device.
To create a new standard RS232
device highlight RS232 and select
NEW (F2).
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 339 Appendix H

Radio and Repeaters
Radio devices are normally used to Configuring the Radio Certain localised versions of the
transmit or receive Real-Time data. above radios may require extra
Additionally a Radio device may also configuration before use with System
be used to steer and communicate 500. In this case, highlight the radio
with the Sensor e.g. to download raw model used and press NEW (F2).
data from a remote location etc. Enter a name (e.g. Satelline Italy) and
enter the applicable device param-
The following radio devices are eters.
supported with System 500: From CONFIGURE\ Interfaces
highlight the interface (e.g. Real- To configure a third party radio
Satelline 1AS/2AS Time) you want to use with the Radio highlight Unknown Radio and press
Satelline 2ASx and press EDIT (F3). NEW (F2). Enter a name (e.g. Radio-
Satelline 2ASxE XY) and enter the applicable device
Satelline 3AS/3ASd parameters.
Pacific Crest RFM96W
Pacific Crest PDL
AT-RXM500 (Akasaka Tech)
Dataradio T-96S (Australia only)
Teledesign TS4000 (USA only)
The Teledesign TS4000 requires a

specific housing to be purchased Press DEVCE (F5) to access the
from Leica USA. device list. The port settings are the parameters
used for the communication between
the Sensor and the radio. If required,
edit them to suit the radio settings or
change the radio settings.
Radio Modems and Channel Case 2 Channel switching on Pacific Crest
Switching One Real-Time Reference and one Radio Modems must be activated by
Channel switching is supported with Real-Time Rover are being used. If a Pacific Crest dealer and may
Satelline 2ASx, 2ASxE, 3AS/3ASd the signal is blocked due to radio require a special license.
and Pacific Crest RFM96 modems. It interference, you can switch the
Satelline Radio Modems must be in
offers you the ability to set the chan- channel at the Reference and Rover
Programming mode. This can be set
nel on the radio modem. to try a slightly different frequency.
by a Satelline dealer. Channel switch-
This changes the frequency at which ing may contravene radio broadcast-
the radio operates by a small amount. ing regulations in certain countries.
This can be used in the following Note that when using channel switch-
Make yourself aware of the regula-
situations: ing, the Ref Stn Id at the Reference
tions in force in the area in which you
should be set to a different Id for each
Case 1 are operating.
reference site.
Two Real-Time Reference stations
are set up at two locations, each The number of channels available
broadcasting on two different chan- and the frequency spacing between
nels. This gives the Rover two advan- channels will depend on the radio
tages: modem used.
1. If the signal from one reference
station is blocked, you can switch
channels and try the other one.
2. You can obtain two separate
fixes for each point, providing redun-
dancy for future least squares adjust-
ment operations.

Channel switching is available via For the radio modems Satelline 3AS, Additionally if you are using the
CONFIGURE\ Interfaces. Pacific Crest RFM96W and Pacific device for a Real-Time Rover sensor
Crest PDL, the channel to which the you may set the following parameter:
radio is set is checked and displayed.
For other radios than those, a similar Accept Ref - Defines which reference
check is technically impossible. station to accept real-time data from.
Therefore, the channel displayed Choose from the following:
does not necessarily coincide with the Any Received means that the sensor
actual radio channel. will accept data from any reference
station from which it receives data.
Enter a Channel number and confirm 1st Received means that data will be
Highlight the device to switch chan- with CONT (F1). received and used from the first
nels and press CTRL (F5). reference station that is recognised
by the rover. If you wish to force the
system to try to establish a new
connection with a different reference
station press 1st (F6).
User defined enables you to define
which reference station data will be
received from according to its Ref
Stn Id. This is necessary when
several reference stations send RTK
messages delayed on the same
frequency (Time Slicing) and you
wish to switch from one reference
station to another.

Highlight the reference station you Since not all radio modems are
wish to use. CONT (F1) returns to the suitable as repeaters, we recommend
previous panel. The number of the the Satelline 3AS(d) and all Pacific
selected reference station is taken Crest RFM96 and PDL Models.
over into the Ref Stn Id line.
A radio, which is programmed as a
Note that setting Ref Stn Ids is only repeater, can still be used for refer-
With User defined you may press possible without a survey or stakeout ence and rover applications. How-
SCAN (F5) to access a list of refer- operation running. ever, this is not recommended for
ence stations transmitting on the power consumption reasons.
particular channel. The list shows the
reference station IDs, the RTK format It is important that all radio modems
used for transmitting and the latency Repeaters and Repeater Box at reference, repeater and rover
(time delay) with which the messages Firmware 3.00 and higher supports operate on the same frequency. For a
are sent. This SCAN functionality is the use of repeaters. channel switch, the repeater requires
independant from time slicing and connection to the sensor.
can therefore always be used to A repeater is a radio, which is set up
check the RTK format of the refer- for repeater mode. A repeater The GHT38 is a repeater box for the
ence. receives data from the reference and Leica housings for radio modems. By
broadcasts the data further to the using this box, the housings can be
rover. Consequently, the range fixed to a tripod. The power supply for
increases. The total range depends the modem is enabled with an exter-
on the set up of reference, repeater nal battery and a power cable.
and rover.
For more information on how to set
up a repeater with a repeater box see
section 2.13.
GSM
GSM devices are normally used to If you are using a third party Select a standard GSM phone from
transmit or receive Real-Time data. GSM phone make sure it the list.
Additionally a GSM device may also supports AT command
be used to steer and communicate language. To select the Bosch 908/909, the
with the Sensor e.g. to download raw Sagem MC850 or the Siemens S25/
data from a remote location etc. S35i, highlight GSM and press EDIT
The following standard GSM models Configuring the GSM Phone (F3). Press OPT (F4). Under Type
are directly supported with System select the equivalent GSM.
500 and fit into a Radio Housing:
To define any other GSM device,
Siemens M1 highlight GSM and press NEW (F2).
Siemens M20 Enter a name (e.g. GSM-XY) and
Siemens TC35 enter the applicable device param-
Wavecom WMOD2 eters.
Wavecom M1200 Series From CONFIGURE\ Interfaces
highlight the interface (e.g. Real-
The following GSM models are also Time) you want to use with a GSM
supported but do not fit into a hous- phone and press EDIT (F3).
ing:
Press DEVCE (F5) to access the
Bosch 908/909 device list.
Sagem MC850
Siemens S25/S35i
The port settings are the parameters
Before using GSM phones used for the communication between
for data transmission make the Sensor and the GSM phone. If
sure your network operator required, edit them to suit the GSM
supports data transmission. phone.
Press the OPT (F4) key to access the Dial - This is the dialing string used to ~ Inserts a delay of 1/4 second
GSM options. The GSM options dial the phone number. A placeholder
^^ Insert character ^
enable you to define the AT com- shall be used to insert the phone
mands used for communiction number as defined in GSM Connec- Please refer to the instruction manual
between the sensor and the GSM tion. of your GSM phone for information
phone. about which AT commands to use.
Hangup - This is the hangup se-
quence used to end the network
connection. Using the GSM Phone
The way in which GSM phones are
Escape - This is the escape se- used for Real-Time GPS differs from
quence used to switch to the com- radios. The Rover contacts the
mand mode before using the hangup Reference. The Reference phone just
Under Type select User and modify sequence. has to be switched on. One Rover
the remaining parameters. Alterna- can then dial in to the Reference
tively select a standard GSM phone The characters below may be used to Station phone. As soon as the Refer-
type from the list and press SET-U define the AT commands: ence is contacted, it sends the data to
(F5) to turn these parameters into the Rover that has called it.
user parameters and then modify ^M Inserts a carriage return and
them. send command
Therefore you can pre-define several
^# Inserts the phone number as GSM Connections and use them to
Init 1 and Init 2 - This is the initialisa- defined in GSM Connection switch between different Reference
tion sequence to initialise the phone. Stations.
Between Init1 and Init 2, a check for ^S Bearer Service: Speed (Proto-
the PIN is inbuilt. col and NetDataRate)
In CONFIGURE\ Interfaces highlight
^C Bearer Service: Connection the device to switch stations and
Element press CTRL (F5).

User defined enables you to define Search for the nearest GSM Refer-
which reference station data will be ence Station to the current sensor
received from according to its Ref position by pressing NEAR (F2). The
Stn Id. current sensor position is the position
at the time when the NEAR key is
Ref Stn Id - The Id of the Reference pressed. A GSM station is only
Station to be used. Note that setting included in the search when Use
Ref Stn Ids is only possible without a Coord in panel CONFIGURE\ GSM
Select the Station to contact. The survey or stakeout operation running. Station is set to YES.
phone Number of the Station (Refe-
rence) and the type of Protocol to be NetDataRate - Some GSMs are Once the nearest GSM Reference
used are displayed. capable of automatic searching for Station has been found, the Station
the network baud rate. In this case field is updated accordingly.
Accept Ref - Defines which reference Autobauding can be set. Otherwise,
station to accept real-time data from. one of the predefined network baud
Choose from the following: rates must be selected.
Any Received means that the sensor
will accept data from any reference ConnElement - Choose Non-Trans-
station from which it receives data. parent for a GSM working with RLP
1st Received means that data will be (Radio Link Protocol) and Transpar-
received and used from the first ent for a GSM working without RLP.
reference station that is recognised Please refer to the GSM manual to
by the rover. If you wish to force the see if the GSM uses RLP. Before
system to try to establish a new RLP can be used with a GSM, it must
connection with a different reference be support by the network. Check
station press 1st (F6). with the network provider.

The SCAN functionality can be used To enter a new GSM station, highlight Enter the Station name, telephone
to check the data format of a GSM Station in panel CONFIGURE\ GSM Number and the type of GSM Proto-
reference. Pressing SCAN (F5) Station and press ENTER. col (Analog, ISDN V.110 or ISDN
establishes a connection to the GSM V.120). ISDN V.110 is equivalent to
reference. The reference station id, the UDI (Unrestricted Digital Informa-
the data format used for transmitting tion) mode found in firmware versions
and the latency (time delay) of the earlier than V4.0.
GSM reference station is displayed.
Use COORD - Set to YES to include
a GSM station in the search for the
nearest GSM reference station. If
All existing stations are listed. To edit YES is set, coordinates can be
a station, highlight it and press EDIT entered and COORD (F2) can be
(F3). To delete a station, highlight it used to switch between coordinate
and press DEL (F4). To enter a new systems.
station, press NEW (F2).
Press CONT (F1) to accept the
CONT (F1) cuts the GSM connection settings and return to the station list
and returns to the previous panel. and CONT (F1) a second time to
The station id of the highlighted return to panel CONFIGURE\ GSM
reference station is taken over into Station.
the Ref Stn Id line, if Accept Ref is
set to User defined. Change the NetDataRate (Network
baud rate) if necessary.

Press the CODES (F3) key to input Press Shift and then CMD (F4) to When a GSM Phone is configured a
your PIN code. SEND (F3) an AT command to the softkey CONEC (F4) or DISCO (F4)
GSM. becomes available upon pressing
SHIFT in the MAIN, SURVEY and
Note that this functionality can only be STAKEOUT screen.
employed in Advanced Mode.
Press CONT (F1) in the CONFIG-

URE\ GSM Connection panel to
return to CONFIGURE\ Interfaces.
If for some reason the PIN code is

blocked (E.g. the wrong PIN was
entered) input the PUK Code to be This enables you to quickly connect
able to access the PIN. to the selected Station or disconnect
immediately after the survey is
DEL (F4) will delete both the existing completed in order to save air time.
PIN and PUK code.
Press CONT (F1) to return to previ-

ous screen.

Status of the GSM phone
To access the GSM status press
STATUS /Interfaces, highlight the
GSM device and press VIEW (F3).
Information about the connected

GSM phone is displayed.
Firmware - Current firmware release.
Operator - GSM network operator.
Status - Registration status.
Signal Level - Indication of received

signal strength on the GSM network.

Modem
A Modem device is normally used to Configuring the Modem Highlight Modem from the list and
communicate with the Sensor e.g. to press NEW (F2). Enter a name (E.g.
download data or to transmit NMEA ModemXY) and enter the applicable
messages etc. device parameters.
The following modem communication
settings are as standard included with
System 500:
U.S. Robotics 56K From CONFIGURE\ Interfaces

Sprint PCS Motorola Timeport P8167 highlight the interface (e.g. Prim.
Remote) you want to use with a
modem and press EDIT (F3).
If you are using a third party The port settings are the parameters
modem make sure it sup- Press DEVCE (F5) to access the used for the communication between
ports AT command lan- device list. the Sensor and the modem. If re-
guage. quired edit them to suit the modem.

Press the OPT (F4) key to access the Hangup - This is the hangup se- Please refer to the instruction manual
modem options. The modem options quence used to end the network of your modem for information about
enable you to define the AT com- connection. which AT commands to use.
mands used for communiction
between the sensor and the modem. Escape - This is the escape se-
quence used to switch to the com- Using the Modem
mand mode before using the hangup The way a modem is used is very
sequence. similar to a GSM phone. Please
refere to the section GSM on how to
The characters below may be used to use a modem.
define the AT commands:
Under Type select User and modify ^M Inserts a carriage return and
the remaining parameters. Alterna- send command
tively select a standard modem type ^# Inserts the phone number as
from the list and press SET-U (F5) to defined in GSM Connection
turn this parameters into user param-
eters and then modify them. ^S Bearer Service: Speed (Proto-
col and NetDataRate)
Init 1 and Init 2 - This is the initialisa- ^C Bearer Service: Connection
tion sequenze to initialise the modem. Element
Dial - This is the dialing string used to ~ Inserts a delay of 1/4 second
dial the phone number. A placeholder ^^ Insert character ^
shall be used to insert the phone
number as defined in Modem Con-
nection.

RTB Module (CSI)
The RTB (Real Time Beacon) Module Configuration Press RTCM (F6) to set the RTCM
receives DGPS corrections from U.S. version and the number of bits/byte.
Coast Guard or other differential
correction beacons. Press CONT (F1) to continue.
It is used for Real-Time applications In CONFIGURE\ Interfaces press

in the meter or submeter accuracy CTRL (F5).
range. The module consists of a
combined GPS/Beacon antenna and
a radio module that is available in a From CONFIGURE\ Interfaces
detachable housing. highlight Real-Time press EDIT (F3).

device list. Select RTB Module (CSI)
and press CONT (F1) to confirm.
At certain locations it is possible that
several beacon signals can be
received at the same time. If Fre-
quency is set to Automatic the
strongest signal available will be
used.
This is not necessarily the closest. If

Ensure that the Data Format is set to you know the frequency of the closest
RTCM 9,2. beacon select User defined and
enter the frequency.

Status of the RTB Module (CSI) Frequency - The frequency on which
To access the RTB Module status the RTB module is currently operat-
press STATUS /Interfaces, highlight ing.
the RTB device and press VIEW (F3).
Bit Rate - The bit rate on which the
TB module is currently operating.
Use the RSTN (F4) key to display the
Beacon Stations available on the
Sensor.
Note that the Beacon Station list has
to be transferred to the Sensor
before.
Information about the connected RTB
Module is displayed
Signal - Strength of the incoming

signal in µV/m.
SN Ratio - Signal to noise ratio in dB.

Depending on the beacon station the
Bit Rate may vary. Select Auto will
detect the bitrate automatically. Select
User defined and enter a value
according to the Beacon station.
Press CONT (F1) to close the control

panel.
RTS Module (Racal)
The RTS Module (Racal) receives Configuration Press RTCM (F6) to set the RTCM
DGPS corrections from RACAL version and the number of bits/byte.
LandStar satellites. It is used for
Real-Time applications in the meter Press CONT (F1) to continue.
or submeter accuracy range.
In CONFIGURE\ Interfaces highlight
The module consists of a combined Real-Time and press CTRL (F5).
GPS/LandStar antenna and a DGPS
radio receiver that is available in a
detachable housing. From CONFIGURE\ Interfaces
highlight Real-Time and press EDIT
To receive DGPS corrections from (F3).
the LandStar satellites a correspond-
ing license must be available. Press DEVCE (F5) to access the
device list. Select RTS Module
(Racal) and press CONT (F1) to DGPS corrections can be received
confirm. from different RACAL ground stations
via different satellites. Each satellite
sends this corrections by different
beams (Channels).
Ensure that the Data Format is set to

RTCM 1, 2.

If Ref Stn ID is set to Automatic it Status of the RTS Module (Racal) AGC - Automatic Gain Control
will search the closest ground station To access the RTS Module status indicating the voltage being fed to the
according to your current position. If it press STATUS /Interfaces, highlight variable gain amplifier on the de-
is set to User defined you may enter the RTB device and press VIEW (F3). modulator.
an Id manually or press RSTN (F4) to
request a list of all ground stations Freq. Offset - The difference be-
available. tween the occupied carrier frequency
and the entered frequency.
If Channel is set to Auto it will select Bit Error Rate - The bit error rate
an appropriate spot beam from the between 0 and 7.
nearest satellite. If it is set to User
defined you may enter a Channel Information about the connected
number manually. Racal module is displayed.
Press CONT (F1) to close the control Ref Stn ID - 3 digit Racal reference
panel. station ID. If -1 is displayed the
necessary license is not available.
Channel - Demodulator channel

number.
Signal - Strength of signal. For good

reception a signal of 1.5V or higher is
recommended.

SAPOS Using a SAPOS decoder box
SAPOS is a reference station service Configuration Two different services are available.
available for Germany. RTCM corrections from the closest
reference can be received or your
To make use of this service there are own position can be sent to the
three different options: device which then receives correc-
tions based on a virtual reference
1. SAPOS reference decoder box. station.
2. SMARTgate box. From CONFIGURE\ Interfaces

highlight Real-Time and press EDIT In CONFIGURE\ Interfaces highlight
3. Telemax Service. (F3). the Real-Time and press CTRL (F5).

device list. Select SAPOS-Box and
press CONT (F1) to confirm.
Change Ref Net to Yes if corrections

for a virtual reference shall be used.
Select one of the following Data Press CONT (F1) to close the control
Formats : RTCM 1,2, RTCM 18,19 or panel.
RTCM 20,21.

Using a SMARTgate box
SMARTgate is a device which has Configuration Press CONT (F1) to return to the
GSM and Radio as well as the CONFIGURE\ Interfaces panel.
functionality of the SAPOS-Box
integrated (see www.navsys.de). The
device is connected to the sensor in
the Leica radio housing.
To operate this device special user-

profiles have to be transferred to the
SMARTgate box. Such a user-profile In the CONFIGURE\ Interfaces panel Press CTRL (F5) to access the
contains information on the kind of highlight Real-Time and press EDIT CONFIGURE\ SMARTgate panel.
communication, the service em- (F3).
ployed, the account used, a list of
reference stations, an acceptable
minimum distance etc.
The parameters of the user-profiles

are neither deletable or editable nor
may they be copied to the sensor.
You may select from differently
configured profiles on the sensor, Set R-Time Data to Rover and set Profile - Select one of the User
though. the Data Format to either RTCM 1,2 Profiles stored in the SMARTgate
or RTCM 20,21. box.
Press DEVCE (F5) to access the Profile No - Displays the number of

device list. Select SMARTgate and the selected profile.
press CONT (F1).
Ref Select - Choose the criterion by Viewing the Status of SMARTgate Press ACCNT (F3) to display the
which the Reference Station shall be currently used Account, its Provider,
selected. To access the SMARTgate status the currently used Service (e.g. EPS
Choose Profile to select the refer- press STATUS /Interfaces, highlight or HEPS) and the Credit Unit and
ence station according to the given the SMARTgate device and press Credit Time.
profile. DEVCE (F5).
CreditUnit - Displays the remaining
Choose Frequency to select the credit units.
reference station according to a CreditTime - Displays the time
frequency different to the given remaining according to the credit
profile. The Frequency has to be units.
manually specified.
Press VERS (F4) to display the Type
Choose Phone No to select the Profile - Displays the selected User and the Serial No. of the SMARTgate
reference station according to a Profiles. box, the Software Version and its
phone number different to the given Software Date.
profile. The Phone No has to be Profile No - Displays the number of
manually specified. the selected profile.
Using the SMARTgate box
Choose Station No to select the Medium - Displays the currently used
reference station according to a medium. This may be either GSM, Once you have set the configuration
station number different to the given 2m Radio or None. for the SMARTgate box the connec-
profile. The Station No has to be tion to the SAPOS station can be
manually specified. Error Rate - Displays the error rate of established by pressing SHIFT-
the currently active medium (0...99%). CONEC (F4) in the MAIN, SURVEY
or STAKE-OUT panel. To disconnect
again press SHIFT-DISCO (F4).
Using the Telemax Service
To make use of the Telemax service Set a R-Time Data to Rover and set Press the RTCM (F6) key to select
you first have to transfer the sensor the Data Format to either RTCM 1,2 the Telemax service in setting
specific Account file to your sensor. A or RTCM 20,21. Telemax to YES. Select the appro-
maximum of two Account files may priate Accountfile, which you have
be transferred to each sensor, e.g. transferred to the sensor before.
one for private and one for non-
private use.
For details on how to transfer such
Account Files refer to chapter 13.15
Transfer Telemax Account File.
Configuration Press DEVCE (F5) to access the

device list. Select the GSM or Modem With the Data Format being set to
attached to your sensor from the list RTCM two different services are
or define a NEW (F2) one. For details available. Either RTCM corrections
on how to configure and use a GSM from the closest reference can be
phone or Modem refer to the sub- received or your own position can be
chapters GSM and Modem in the sent via the selected device which
Appendix H. then receives corrections based upon
a virtual reference station.
In the CONFIGURE\ Interfaces panel Press CONT (F1) to confirm your
highlight Real-Time and press EDIT selection and return to the CONFIG- Change Ref Net to YES if corrections
(F3). URE\ Real-Time panel. for a virtual reference shall be used.
Press CONT (F1) to confirm.

Using Telemax
Once you have set the configuration

for your GSM phone or the Modem
and selected the Telemax service you
can establish the connection to the
SAPOS station by pressing SHIFT-
CONEC (F4) in the MAIN, SURVEY
or STAKE-OUT panel.
Based upon the Account file the

Telemax software checks if you have
the right to receive uncoded RTCM
corrections from the SAPOS station.
To disconnect again press SHIFT-
DISCO (F4) in the MAIN, SURVEY or
STAKE-OUT panel.

Hidden Point
Hidden Point devices are special Configuration
devices to measure distances, angles
and azimuths to points which are not From CONFIGURE\ Interfaces
accessible by means of GPS e.g. highlight Hidden Point and press
house corners or trees. These mea- EDIT (F3). To Hidden Point
surements can be used to feed the
Hidden Point application which is
accessible in the Survey and Stake-
out screen when the operation mode Disto
is set to Advanced. The following Pole
devices are supported:
Leica Disto memo (distance only)

Leica Disto pro (distance only) Set Use Device to YES. If NO is set
Leica DistoTM pro4 (distance only) the Hidden Point measurements need Positive
Leica DistoTM pro4 a (distance only) to be entered manually. Press Dist Offset
Laser Ace 300 DEVCE (F5) to access the device list.
Criterion 400 Select a Hidden Point device form the
Criterion Compatible list. For the Disto memo or Disto pro,
Leica Vector select Disto. When using a DistoTM Negative
Leica Laser Locator pro4 or DistoTM pro4 a select Disto 4. Dist Offset
Leica Laser Locator Plus Press CONT (F1) to confirm.
All devices support reflectorless Enter a distance Dist Offset if neces-

distance measurements using laser sary. A negative offset means the Measuring Offsets when using the Disto
technology. distance measured will be reduced by
the offset.
Hgt Offset - Available if Use Device sured or estimated, the result is the The instrument height is the distance
in the current panel and Include Hgt ground height difference between from the ground to the center of the
in the panel CONFIGURE\ Hidden rover and aimed point. Enter the external device.
Point in the current configuration set values in the corresponding two new
(see chapter 5.4.1.) are set to YES. lines. The target height is the distance from
The options are: the ground to the aimed point.
None - Neither instrument nor target

height is considered. The result is the
delta height between the center of the
external device and the aimed point.
This delta height can be measured,
estimated or left as zero.
Inst Height - The instrument height is
considered. If the delta height be-
tween the center of the external
device and the aimed point is mea-
sured or estimated, the result is the
height difference between the rover
point on the ground and the aimed
point. Enter the instrument height into
the corresponding new line.
Inst Height & Trgt Height - Instru-
ment as well as target height to be HgtTrgt = HgtInst + Inst Height + Delta Hgt - Trgt Height
considered. If the delta height be-
tween the center of the external
device and the aimed point is mea-
If you are using a device that mea-
sures azimuths press EAO (F3) to
enter an external angle offset. Select
the Method Permanent and enter a
value or select New for each Point
and the program will prompt for a
value during each Hidden Point
measurement.
Press CONT (F1) to confirm.
In order to connect a device

to the receiver use only the
cable delivered with the
device.

Appendix I - MC500
Introduction
The MC500 is an OEM GPS receiver,
that can be integrated into complete
positioning systems.
The MC500 receiver has a rugged

housing that meets high shock and
vibration environmental specifica-
tions. This makes the receiver ideal
for use in high vibration and other
difficult environments - such as
Machine Control. Details of these
specifications can be found in the
MC500 User Manual.
The receiver and measurement

performance of the MC500 are the
same as the SR530. The MC500 MC500 GPS receiver
tracks the L1 C/A code and L2 P-
code to reconstruct the carrier phase.
When Anti-Spoofing (A-S) is acti-
The MC500 also includes the data With a radio modem attached the
vated, the receiver switches to a
logging features of the RS500 (see receiver can be used for RTK opera-
patented P-code aided tracking
Appendix J) and is suitable for refer- tions. Coordinates can be calculated
technique that provides full L2 carrier
ence station applications in severe with a precision of up to about 1cm.
measurements and L2
environments
pseudoranges.
Appendix I 364 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Standard Features Integration assistance and OWI Cabling Connections / Options
The MC500 includes as standard the documentation is available on request Cable connections are identical to
following features: from Leica. other System 500 receivers.
PPS Output functionality installed. Powering the MC500 Refer to MC500 Equipment list, Dozer
Event Input functionality installed. The MC500 requires 12VDC power to 2000 Installation and Maintenance
Met / Tilt Interface. be supplied externally, as there is no Guide for cabling options.
Ring Buffer Functionality. option to connect standard
Ground Stud. Camcorder batteries. Please see Front Panel Diagram for
Environmental shock absorbers. cable connection information.
Dust caps for external ports. Turning the MC500 On/Off
Due to the ruggedised housing of the
Data Storage MC500, there is no on/off switch on
The MC500 also comes as standard the front of the sensor.
with a PCMCIA card. This card
enables data to be stored for post- The MC500 can be powered on or off
processing. This card is installed by the TR500 Terminal or by a remote
behind the protective cover. This control command (OWI).
cover should only be removed by an
approved Leica technician. Like the Sr5xx sensors, the MC500
will automatically power itself up and
Outside World Interface (OWI) return to the previous operating mode
External control of the MC500 is after any temporary power failure.
achieved through use of the Outside
World Interface (OWI) message
format from Leica.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 365 Appendix I

Port 1 Port2/PWR Port 3 Terminal PWR
Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function
1 RTS 1 Bat 1 RTS 1 KDU_ON 1 Bat
2 CTS 2 +12V 2 CTS 2 KDU_PWR 2 +12V
3 GND 3 GND 3 GND 3 GND 3 GND
4 Rx 4 Rx 4 Rx 4 Rx 4 ---
5 Tx 5 Tx 5 Tx 5 Tx 5 ---
6 Vmod 6 Vmod
7 Bat 7 Bat
8 +12V 8 +12V

Operating and Storage Tempera-
tures
The range of the operating and
storage temperatures of the MC500
is greater than that of the SR5xx
sensors:
Operating temp: -20°C to +60°C

Storage temp: -40°C to +70°C
The operating and storage tempera-

tures of all other MC500 components
are the same as detailed in Appendix
A.
Shock and Vibration Specifications

Exceeds MIL-STD-810C, Proc VIII.
Equip Cat F for Tracked Vehicles
Mounting Diagram
The attached diagram shows the
dimensions for mounting the MC500.
MC500 GPS receiver - Mounting Dimensions
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 367 Appendix I

Documentation Packages
Please see the following documenta-
tion to learn more about the MC500
MC500 User manual
OWI Manual
Dozer 2000 Installation and Mainte-

nance Manual
Dozer 2000 User Manual
Dozer 2000 Equipment List

Appendix J - RS500
Introduction With a radio modem attached, the Standard Features
The RS500 receiver has been de- receiver can be used to transmit data The RS500 includes the following
signed specifically for use as a for RTK operations using proprietary standard features, which are not
reference station. as well as standard RTCM, CMR and available in the SR5xx sensor types:
CMR+ formats. The RS500 cannot
The RS500 uses the same housing receive Reference Station broadcasts One PPS Output port.
and meets the same environmental and therefore cannot be used as a Two Event Input ports.
specifications as the SR5xx sensors, Real-Time rover receiver. Ring Buffer logging.
which are detailed in Appendix A. Support for external sensors (Meteo/
Generally, the RS500 operates in the Tilt).
same manner as the SR530, but is
designed to operate for specific
reference station applications using Data Storage
remote control software, i.e. Leica The RS500 supports all standard
Geosystems ControlStation™ soft- Leica Geosystems PCMCIA card
ware. types. The internal memory option
may be installed as well. This enables
It supports internal logging of GPS The receiver and measurement data to be stored internally for post-
raw data, but can also log data from performance is the same as with the processing.
specific external devices approved by SR530. The RS500 tracks the L1 C/A
Leica Geosystems. Both GPS raw code and L2 P-code to reconstruct
data and external sensor data can be the carrier phase. When Anti-Spoof-
directly output to an external remote ing (A-S) is activated, the receiver
control software package. switches to a patented P-code aided
tracking technique that provides full
L2 carrier measurements and L2
pseudoranges.
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 369 Appendix J

Outside World Interface (OWI) Turning the RS500 On/Off Operation of the RS500
External control of the RS500 via The RS500 can be powered on or off Like the SR5xx sensors, the RS500
remote interface is achieved through by the TR500 Terminal, the sensor can be operated either with the
use of the Outside World Interface integrated ON/OFF button or by a TR500 Terminal or by remote control.
(OWI) command language. The remote control command (OWI). However, the TR500 cannot be used
ASCII/NMEA-type message format for running a survey, stakeout or any
from Leica as well as the compact Using the ON/OFF button of the other applications available for
Leica Binary 2 format can be used. will reset the receiver. All System 500. Used with an RS500,
Integration assistance and OWI programmed outputs, data the Terminal provides the basic
documentation is available on request logging parameters and functionality to set certain operation
from Leica Geosystems. interface configuration parameters, port configurations and
options that have been set all transfer capabilities, including the
by OWI commands will be upload of new firmware. Via the
Powering the RS500 lost. STATUS hard key all status informa-
The RS500 can be powered using the tion is available.
Leica standard internal Camcorder Like the Sr5xx sensors, the RS500
batteries or Leica standard external will automatically power itself up and For the majority of applications, the
batteries for temporary use. For a return to the previous operating mode RS500 has to be operated using
more permanent setup, a universal after any temporary power failure. Leica Geosystems ControlStation™
100V-240VAC 50-60Hz to 12VDC or other appropriate reference system
power converter is available. Alterna- control software.
tively, 12VDC power sources may be Cabling Connections / Options
utilised by means of a user Cable connections are identical to
configurable 12VDC power cable with other System 500 receivers.
in-line fuse.
Appendix J 370 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Using the TR500 with the RS500 The RS500 also has reduced Ring Buffer Functionality
CONFIG and STATUS options. Only
When the RS500 is turned on using the options that are relevant to The RS500 is supplied as standard
the TR500, the following screen will operating an RS500 are available. with ring buffer functionality. The ring
appear. Full details on the CONFIG and buffer allows a second set of GPS
STATUS menu options available are raw data to be recorded at a different
described in the main body of this observation rate as is defined within
manual. TR500 configuration options the standard/primary logging configu-
unique to the RS500 sensor are ration.
described in the following sections.
The user can define the time period
for storing data into the ring buffer.
The RS500 has the same main menu For example, if the user chooses to
panel as the SR5xx sensors except store 1 hour of data into a ring buffer
that the first three menu options are then the last one hour of stored data
removed. It is also not possible to will always be available. Data that is
perform the real-time configuration for older than 1 hour is automatically
the RS500. This needs to be done over-written by the data currently
using remote control software. All being logged. When the logging into
data management, job control and a ring buffer is activated a check will
sensor status operations required by be made that there is enough free
an RS500 user are possible using the space on the PC Card or internal
menu options shown above. memory to log the data with the
desired logging rate and duration.

This required space will be reserved, Configuring the Ring Buffer Data Interval - The size of the ring
so that it cannot be used by other buffer. This sets the duration for how
applications e.g. standard / primary Press the CONFIG button and then long data should be recorded to the
logging. choose 2 Operation and then 6 Ring ring buffer before newly observed
Buffer. data is recorded over the oldest data.
Ring buffer functionality is primarily
designed to be configured using Flag Obs – Defines the dynamic
remote control commands from mode for the selected Ring Buffer.
external software and this is how Choose between Static and Moving.
most users will control the ring
buffers. However, it is also possible Device - If the sensor has internal
to configure ring buffers by using the memory installed then the data
TR500 terminal. Ring Buffer No - Select a ring buffer recorded to the ring buffer can be
to configure. It is possible to config- stored on the sensor internal memory
ure up to 10 ring buffers. Only one or the PC-Card.
buffer can be running at one time.
Status - Indicates if the currently

chosen ring buffer is ACTIVE (log-
ging) or INACTIVE (not logging).
Obs Rate - The rate at which obser-

vations will be logged to the chosen
ring buffer. Choose between 0.1s to
60s.

Starting the Ring Buffer It is not possible to change the
Once the chosen ring buffer has been configuration parameters of a ring
configured, pressing START (F3) buffer once data has been recorded
activates logging to the ring buffer. to the buffer. Only after deleting the
recorded data stored in that buffer,
can the configuration parameters be
edited.
Note, that it is not possible to activate
more than one Ring Buffer at a time. A ring buffer does consist of several
To log data to another ring buffer with files sharing the same file name with
a different configuration requires the incrementing file extension. The
currently active ring buffer to be number of files a ring buffer consists
Note that if there is insufficient stopped before starting the new one. of depends on the data interval
memory available on the chosen
specified and is automatically
device for the ring buffer, then it will Once data has been logged to a ring determined. For example, a one hour
not become active. Either the ring buffer and logging has been stopped interval will consist of 6 files each of
buffer configuration is reduced in size then the data in this ring buffer can be 10 minutes length and a seventh file
by choosing a different interval or deleted by pressing DEL (F4). which is currently logged data to
shorter period or the memory
when the ring buffer is active. The
available on the chosen device is Pressing START (F3) restarts ring buffer consists only of MDB
increased by erasing data from the logging. (Measurement DataBase) files. No
card.
additional job (GeoDB) files will be
created.
Once the chosen ring buffer is active,
the STOP (F3) button then becomes
available to stop logging to the ring
buffer.

The ring buffer data will be stored on Additional External Devices Data received from all of these
the chosen memory device in the sensor types can be logged along
following directory: The RS500 supports additional with the GPS raw data onto the
external devices, which may be sensor PC card or internal memory if
\DATA\GPS\RINGBUF required for GPS reference stations installed. The data will be logged
serving special applications. Currently into the same raw measurement files
The static point which is stored into supported devices are: as the GPS raw data. External
the ring buffer has the following point application software such as
Id automatically assigned: • Meteorological Data Sensors ControlStation™ is required to
• Paroscientific, Inc.: Met3A convert this data to ASCII readable
RBxxxxff Fan-Aspirated Pressure, formats, e.g. RINEX.
Temperature and Humidity It is further possible to directly pass
where: Sensing System this data through the sensor and
xxxx - 4 character sensor ID (by • Paroscientific, Inc.: Met3 output it directly via the remote
default serial number of the sensor, Pressure, Temperature and communication port to the controlling
last 4 digits) Humidity Sensing System application software. This is possible
ff - 2 character ring buffer number • Vaisala : PTU200GPS (must in addition or instead of direct logging
(00, 01 , … 09) be programmed to mimic this data internally.
MET3 data string)
The above external devices can be
• Tilt Data Sensors connected to Ports 1, 2 or 3 of the
• Applied Geomechanics, Inc.: RS500. Specific interface cables are
MD900-T Digital/Analog available from your Leica
Clinometer Geosystems representative, which
provide power to the external sensors
from the RS500 thus creating a much
neater Reference System installation.
Configuring Meteo Devices If the rate is set higher than the The output message format is Leica
device is able to deliver data, it may Binary V2 (LB2) message type
Press the CONFIG button and then happen that no complete data sets “Meteorological and Inclination Data
choose 4 Interfaces and then 6 can be received at all or the data will (ID 1016)”. Documentation for the LB2
Meteo. not have changed from the previous Interface Control is available on
measurement. Please refer to the request from your Leica Geosystems
documentation related to the attached representative.
device.
Log to File – Select YES to activate device list. Select a Meteo device
direct logging of the Meteo data to a from the list and press CONT (F1) to
file. Data will be logged always into confirm. To interface to the Vaisala
Use Device – Set to YES, to activate the same file/job where the GPS raw PTU200GPS, choose the MET3
using a Meteo device and access the data is being logged to. No data will interface but make sure the Vaisala
configuration options. be logged, unless raw data logging is system has been programmed to
active. Data will also be logged to mimic the MET3 data string (details
Port - defines the port to where the ring buffer raw data files if ring buffer will be supplied with Vaisala
Meteo device will be connected. logging is active. PTU200GPS when purchased via
Leica Geosystems).
Data Rate – Defines the rate at which Notify Msg – Select BINARY, to
data will be requested from the Meteo directly output the Meteo data to
device. Select between 0.1 to 3600 external application software via a
seconds. Note, the maximum rate selected communication port. Press
possible also depends on the type of NPORT (F4) to select the remote port
Meteo device attached. and configure the device through
which the message shall be transmit-
ted.
Configuring Tilt Devices If the rate is set higher than the The output message format is Leica
device is able to deliver data, if may Binary V2 (LB2) message type
Press the CONFIG button and then happen that no complete data sets “Meteorological and Inclination Data
choose 4 Interfaces and then 7 Tilt. can be received at all or the data will (ID 1016)”. Documentation for the LB2
not have changed from the previous Interface Control is available on
measurement. Please refer to the request from your Leica Geosystems
documentation related to the attached representative.
device.
Log to File – Select YES to activate device list. Select a Tilt device from
direct logging of the Tilt data to a file. the list and press CONT (F1) to
Use Device – Set to YES, to activate Data will be logged always into the confirm.
using a Tilt device and access the same file/job where the GPS raw data
configuration options. is being logged to. No data will be
logged, unless raw data logging is Power Failures
Port - defines the port to where the active. Data will also be logged to ring Like the SR5xx sensors, the RS500
Tilt device will be connected. buffer raw data files if ring buffer will automatically power itself up and
logging is active. return to the previous operating mode
Data Rate – Defines the rate at which after any temporary power failure.
data will be requested from the Tilt Notify Msg – Select BINARY, to After a power failure the ring buffer
device. Select between 0.1 to 3600 directly output the Tilt data to external configuration will be restored. A ring
seconds. Note, the maximum rate application software via a selected buffer, which was running at the time
possible also depends on the type of communication port. Press NPORT of the power failure, will be restarted
Tilt device attached. (F4) to select the remote port and automatically without user (or remote
configure the device through which control) interaction.
the message shall be transmitted.

Appendix K- GS50 / GS50+ and GIS Data
Collection
Introduction After the data is collected in the field, the GIS DataPRO
office software allows you to import, edit and export the
This appendix describes the operation and data collection data to your GIS. The software can also be used to design
techniques specific to the GS50 / GS50+ and GIS data codelists which allow you to customize the field data
collection methods. collection process to suit your needs. To learn more about
the GIS DataPRO office software, please consult the
This Appendix should be read in parallel with the main
“Getting Started with the GIS DataPRO Office Software
body of this Technical Reference Manual to which the
chapters described below refer. User Manual”.
The Leica GIS DataPRO system is composed of both GIS DataPRO Post-processing software
hardware and software components.
GIS DataPRO is used for data collection preparation and
The hardware consists of the GS50 / GS50+ sensor,
data post processing. Please refer to the “Getting Started
TR500 terminal and antenna. This is used in the field to with the GIS DataPRO Office Software User Manual” for
collect and record spatial (position) and non-spatial
more details.
attributes.
To install the GIS DataPRO software:
1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive of your PC.
Hardware 2. Execute the “Setup” command.
GS50 / GS50+
TR500 3. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
Leica GIS Antenna Both a hardware and software user manual can be found
DataPRO on the CD in PDF format. The software itself contains a
Software comprehensive online Help System.
GIS DataPRO
Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 377 Appendix K

Hardware and Accessories
The GS50 Receiver With a radio modem the receiver can using 2 GS50s (one as a reference
be used for RTK measurements. and the other as a rover.) No
The GS50 tracks the L1 C/A code Coordinates can be calculated with a additional options are necessary for a
and uses it to reconstruct the carrier precision of up to about 1 m. post-processing arrangement.
phase. Data can be stored for post-
processing in SKI-PRO or GIS
Hardware Configurations and
DataPRO. Baselines can be One Unit Operation
Specifications
calculated up to a precision of
10-20mm +/-2ppm. It is possible to use only one GS50 as
The following pages contain different
With a radio modem or other DGPS a rover by downloading and post-
possible combinations for connecting
source the receiver can be used for processing RINEX data from the
the GS50 / GS50+ sensor with
real-time measurements accepting Internet or Public FTP server. The
various accessories.
RTCM code corrections. Coordinates quality obtained cannot generally be
can be calculated with a precision of estimated because it depends on the
Centimeter level accuracy can be
up to about 0.4 meters. quality of public data and the baseline
obtained by using two GS50+
length1. In theory, it should be possible
receivers, one as reference and one
The GS50+ Receiver to obtain 30cm accuracy with
as rover. For real time applications, a
reasonable baseline length1 and
radio modem is needed to transfer
The GS50+ is a 12 channel L1, 12 quality reference data.
the correction signal from the
channel L2 code and phase GPS Along with the GIS DataPRO
reference to the rover.
receiver. The standard GS50+ software, the equipment shown in the
records phase measurements for chapter “Equipment Setup: Real-Time
The following solutions will allow the
post processing and RTK purposes. Rover, GIS Rover” is sufficient for this
user to obtain sub-meter positional
Data can be stored for post-process- type of application. The same
accuracy using the Leica GS50.
ing in SKI-Pro or GIS DataPro. equipment would also be sufficient for
With post-processing it is typical to
Baselines can be calculated to a simple navigation, yielding accuracies
obtain positional accuracies of 30cm
precision of 5-10 mm +/-1 ppm. of 2-3 meters.
Appendix K 378 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en
DGPS provided there is a radio or modem
capability to transmit the data in a
For real-time DGPS positioning, the standard RTCM data format.
standard equipment employs either
public coastguard beacon or satellite The GS50 / GS50+ is also capable of
differential signal provided by Racal- transmitting standard RTCM
Landstar for differential corrections. corrections in real-time.
Both equipment set-ups are shown to
you in the Equipment Setup chapter:
Real Time Rover, GIS Rover. Both
require the use of GIS DataPRO
software. While the Racal-Landstar
signal provides global coverage
(except in the Polar Regions,) beacon
stations only broadcast the public
signal in certain areas.2 With either
option, a typical accuracy of 40cm to
70cm can be expected, but is 1
Reasonable baseline length for best quality is
dependent upon location.
about 100km, depending on the atmosphereic
Other DGPS sources are also conditions. The measurement range for the
available depending on your location. baseline length is >1000km.
In most countries, one or more
2
sources of public signal should be For additional information on locations and
available. The GS50 / GS50+ is able information please visit http://www.csi-
dgps.com
to work with any of these sources,

Hardware and Accessories (cont)
RACAL/LANDSTAR RTS
In addition to the standard features

previously listed, additional
accesories can be used in conjunc-
tion with the GS50 to enhance data
collection methods. The Racal-
Landstar satellite differental module
and antenna can be used for Real
Time corrections where beacon or
reference data is not available. The
Racal module and antenna attach to
the GS50 in the same configuration
as the RTB module and antenna (see
chapter Equipment Setup - Real Time
Rover, GIS Rover). Because of the
nature of the satellite differential,
signal coverage is global (except in
the polar regions.)
Because the RACAL signal

Racal RTS Module Type 90952/3/90 /GFU10
correction is porprietary in and LandStar Mk4 Antenna Type 90952/3/30,
nature, it is necessary to Racal Tracs Ltd. Surrey, England
obtain a subscription to the
service.

Hardware and Accessories (cont)
LASER RANGEFINDERS AND
DISTANCE METERS
When objects cannot be occupied

directly, a variety of choices are
available for offset location and can
be interfaced via port 2 on the GS50 /
GS50+.
(Above)
The Laser Ace is a laser rangefinder from (Above)
MDL in the UK. It has a range up to 300 The LEICA Laser Locator and Laser Locator
The LEICA Disto (Below). The DistoTM pro4 meters with an accuracy of 10cm. For more Plus are modern high-performance binocular.
and DistoTM pro4 a are capable of visible light information on the Laser Ace, visit They combine the functions of four instru-
measurement with a range of 100 meters and http://www.mdl-laser.com. ments in one compact, handheld unit:
subcentimer accuracy. For more information binocular observation, distance measurement,
on the Disto family of products, please visit northfinding and inclinometer. For more
http://www.leica-geosystems.com. information on the Vector family of products,
please visit http://www.leica-geosystems.com.
(Right) The Impulse, by Laser Technology is a

laser rangefinder from Laser Technology with
a range up to 500 meters with an accuracy of
about 15cm. For more information on The
Impulse, please visit http://Lasertech.com.

Compact Flash and Sensor Transfer
Sensor Transfer with SKI-Pro/GIS Compact Flash - Directory Structure and Transfer
DataPRO Using the standard default for external PCMCIA Flash memory, Firmware,
Rawdata and Configuration information can easily be transferred to and from
Using the Remote interface it is the GIS DataPRO software.
possible to download data directly Using Windows Explorer to transfer data
from the memory device of the sensor To transfer data from the PCMCIA card to your PC, for use by the GIS
into SKI-Pro or GIS DataPRO through DataPRO software, you must first understand the directory/storing structure
the serial port of the PC without of the GS50 / GS50+ sensor.
having to remove the TR500 from the
Terminal port. If the PCMCIA card has been format-
ted on the sensor (Please refer to the
Configure the Remote interface to the H/W user manual), then the following
appropriate port and device as directory structure should appear on
described in chapter 9.15 “Interfaces- the card.
Remote”. This should normally be
Port 2 and RS232 device using the Real Time Beacon Stations
standard System 500 download It is possible to select a beacon ser-
cable. vice from a list that can be placed on
the PCMCIA card. The file must be
Connect the sensor to the PC. Data called beacon.txt, saved in the GPS
can now be downloaded to the PC, in directory and finally be transferred to
the normal manner, using the Sensor the sensor.
Transfer component in SKI-Pro.
228.0 Daiohzaki
The frequency of the beacon service 292.0 Cape Mendocino
should be placed on the left, with the 313.0 Helgoland
description on the right, seperated by
a space as (shown right).
Operation and Configuration
The GS50 / GS50+ Receiver If the sensor is configured as a Point Management is located under
reference station, there is no differ- a submenu Point/Line/Area Man-
The GS50 and GS50 + receivers are ence between the GIS Data Collec- agement of the main application
specifically designed for GIS data tion and the SR5xx Survey program. menu.
collection. It uses a different ap- Additionally both GIS programs are
proach, measure coordinates in a
situated on the SR510/20/30 in the
topological format, relating attribute
application menu and are available as
information to geographic location.
Like all GIS systems, the GS50 / a paid upgrade option to the survey
GS50+ collect three types of features: program.
Points, Lines and Areas.
Additional applications:
Because these sensors are
configured for GIS use, the main On board the GS50 / GS50+, the The menu Point leads to the point list
programs Survey and Stakeout which applications Determine Coord Sys, which is identical to the point man-
are found on the SR510, SR520, Point Management, Calculator, agement. The menus Line and Area
SR530 are replaced by the GIS Data COGO and CFC are available and lead to lists containing measured
Collection and the GIS Navigation/ lines and areas.
identical to those running on the
Update program.
SR510/20/30.
PLOT (F4) shows a graph of the
points, lines or areas.

The CONFIG Key
Described below are the changes that Configuration: Satellite The MaxTrak™ should be used when
apply to the use of the CONFIG key no GPS measurement would normally
in the GS50 and GS50+. The Satellite configuration option be possible.
uses an additional choice for the track
For example, the main configuration mode. The default choice is Max. Track Mode as well as the SV Health
menu uses the wording GIS Data Accuracy, the additional choice on configurations options are visible in
Collection instead of Survey. GS50 / GS50+ is MaxTrak™. Advanced mode only.
LossOf Lock - When losing all

satellite signals for example due to
satellite shading caused by tall
buildings, trees, etc. a message
“Complete loss of lock” appears. The
sensor may be configured to beep
with this loss of lock message or not.
With the MaxTrak™ option, satellite
tracking is much more stable under
poor GPS conditions. For long-time
static measurements under good
conditions, the accuracy of the default
Max. Accuracy setting is higher than
with the MaxTrak™ setting.

Configuration: Coding Configuration: Stake-Out Configuration: Point Template User
Mask
The GS50 / GS50+ only allows The Stake-Out Configuration is The configuration of the Cursor Pos
thematical coding. available under the name is not used in the GIS Data Collection
Navigation. program, although it can be
For this reason, the panel cannot be configured on the GS50 / GS50+.
exited with CONT (F1) if no codelist is The STORE -> Job configuration
available. You can define a new option when staking from an ASCII This change applies to chapters 5.2
codelist or load a configuration file file stake points is not available.This and 5.4.
from the PC-Card. applies to chapter 5.4.
The use of the Point Template mask
This change applies from chapter 5.1 differs for the GIS Data Collection
to 5.4. program and the Survey program. For
this reason, the working examples
given in chapters 5.2 and 5.4 do not
apply to GS50 / GS50+.
Time and Date templates can be

configured with EDIT (F3) to use
either the Code or the Sensor ID as
the prefix for the Point ID.

If a user defined point template mask Configuration: Occupation settings Configuration: Logging
is used on GS50 / GS50+, for
example “Point ###” with an The configuration option Auto The configuration of logging for auto
increment value 1, the Point Id is STORE is not available for GIS Data logged positions is not available for
shown in the first line of the attribution collection. This is because the GS50 / GIS Data Collection. This is because
panel. GS50+ always stores automatically. the autologged positions are not
connected to any topology.
Assume the last measured point was This change applies to chapters 5.1,
“Point 202”, then the next proposed 5.2 and 5.4. The GIS Data Collection program
id is “Point 203”. The Point Id cannot employs a different method to collect
be overwritten manually. In Advanced mode, the End Survey points automatically which is more
option is also not available. This is suited to GIS data collection.
Nevertheless the enumeration value
because the GIS Data Collection can
203 is changeable. During GIS point
only be exited manually. Additionally, For post-processing of lines and
data collection, Shift ENUM (F5) areas measured in stream mode
the Auto OCUPY option is not
leads to the following panel. (START-STOP), it is mandatory to set
available because occupation always
starts manually. Log Static and Log Moving to YES.
To configure the number of averaged This change applies to chapters 5.1,

positions for nodes, press NODES 5.2 and 5.4.
(F4) in the Configure\ Occupation
Settings panel.
Entering a different enumeration and
CONT (F1) changes the Id enumera- This change applies to chapters
tion immediately. 5.1.1, 5.2.1 and 5.4.1.
Configuration: Formats Configuration: Start-up Configuration: Real-Time
The line for configuration of OCUPY The Start-up Configuration allows The GS50 is a L1 code-only DGPS
counter used in the SR510/20/30 configuration of the sensor to either receiver. It uses RTCM data
survey program is removed. This is create a daily job or to create a job messages 1,2 or 9,2 only for data
because there is no such counter in manually. Enter the configuration exchange. The GS50+ uses all
the GIS Data Collection Program. Start-Up with the CONFIG key. RTCM formats as the SR530.
This change applies from chapter 5.1 The standard settings allow
to 5.4. communication with public DGPS
sources. For example, coast guard
world-wide differential signals use the
RTCM 9,2 messages, whereas the
satellite differential service - RACAL
Landstar - uses the RTCM 1,2
message.
If a pair of GS50 / GS50+ receivers

are communicating with each other
then any of the realtime formats can
be used on both receivers, as long as
those recievers are using matching
formats.
This applies to chapters 5.3 and 5.4.

The STATUS Key
Configuration: Hidden Point Described below are the changes that
refer to the use of the STATUS key.
The full Hidden Point Configuration is
available under the different name The main status menu uses the
Offset. wording GIS Data Collection instead
of Survey.
This applies to chapters 5.4.1 and
9.13. This difference applies to chapter 10.

Data Collection with the GS50 and GS50+
Described below are the changes that GIS Navigation/Update: OCUPY differentiates if the target
refer to data collection with the GS50 point is taken from a job or from an
/ GS50+. Chapter 7.5, describing Staking Out, ASCII file.
is similar for most operations. The For an ASCII file target point having
Due to the different measurement small differences are described here. no topological information, point data
program, the chapters 7.1, 7.2 and collection is started to measure the
7.4 are not applicable at all on a coordinates and to enter new code
GS50 / GS50+. and attribute values.
For a job target point, OCUPY
The manual “Getting Started with replaces the old point coordinates
GS50 / GS50+” is available with the new measured coordinates.
describing the GS50 / GS50+ main
programs in detail. SHIFT AUXPT(F5) leading to
The PCKUP button is replaced by the auxiliary point stake-out is not
Chapter 7.3 describing realtime NESTD button, which is also used in available on GIS Navigation program.
reference station operations is fully the GIS Data Collection program. It
applicable. simply leads to a new data collection
procedure. After data collection is
complete, navigation is continued.

Codelist administration on GS50:
From chapter 8, Coding, only the

chapters up to 8.1.2 apply to the
GS50 / GS50+.
The GIS thematical coding does not

use layers, but differentiates coding
types for points, lines and areas.
Therefore defining a new code on the
GS50 / GS50+ allows entering of the
new code with the choice of the type.

Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Total Quality Management-
Switzerland, has been certified as being Our commitment to total customer
equipped with a quality system which satisfaction
meets the International Standards of
Quality Management and Quality Ask your local Leica agent for more
Systems (ISO standard 9001) and information about our TQM program
Environmental Management Systems
(ISO standard 14001).
Leica Geosystems AG
CH-9435 Heerbrugg
712646-4.0.0en (Switzerland)
Printed in Switzerland - Copyright Leica Phone +41 71 727 31 31
Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland 2002 Fax +41 71 727 46 73
Original text www.leica-geosystems.com

TechRef en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TechRef en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

20 30 40 50

GPS System 500

Technical Reference Manual

Congratulations on your purchase of Leica System 500

To use equipment in the permitted manner, please refer to

2 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Support is provided by Leica Geosystem’s worldwide network of

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 3

Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice

Symbols used in this manual 4 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 5 View of chapters

Contents 6 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 7 Contents

Contents 8 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 9 Contents

10 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

It can be used in many applications,

The main components of System 500

SKI-Pro, a PC based software is also

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 11 1. Introduction

The GPS Antenna is selected for use

The AT501 is a L1 single frequency

1. Introduction 12 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 13 1. Introduction

RS500 - A dedicated GPS Reference

GS50 - This receiver has been

1. Introduction 14 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 15 1. Introduction

The card can become very hot during

1. Introduction 16 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 17 1. Introduction

The battery contains toxic material and must be disposed of in an environmen-

1. Introduction 18 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

GEB121 Batteries Chargers The batteries are delivered

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 19 1. Introduction

Set up on pole with Minipack

2. Set-up and Connection 20 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

be fitted directly to the Receiver.

SR530 Receiver, front panel

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 21 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 22 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 23 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 24 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 25 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 26 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 27 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 28 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 29 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 30 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 31 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 32 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 33 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 34 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 35 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 36 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

2. Set-up and Connection 38 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 39 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 40 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 41 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 42 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 43 2. Set-up and Connection

2. Set-up and Connection 44 Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en

Technical Reference Manual-4.0.0en 45 2. Set-up and Connection